Lamco PDF

LAMCO Slings & Rigging, Inc.
4960 41st Street Court, Moline, IL 61265

(309) 764-7400 - (800) 447-1885 - Fax: (309) 764-1105
Visit our website at www.lamcoinc.com
Manufactured by LAMCO - Same Day Emergency Service
Synthetic Slings
Alloy Chain Slings
Wire Rope Slings & Assemblies
L0108
LAMCO Customer Satisfaction
Customer Satisfaction Is Our Goal!

Our #1 Goal at LAMCO is customer satisfaction. If for any reason you are not
satisfied with the service you receive, please feel free to contact any of the indi-
viduals listed below. Our local telephone number is (309) 764-7400 and our toll
free number is (800) 447-1885.
VP Marketing & Finance Theodore (Ted) King (ext. 204)

VP Operations Charles (Chuck) Lambrecht (ext. 201)
Manager - Metal Fabrication Robert (Bob) Pegg (ext. 205)
As a reminder, all of the items that we manufacture and distribute are not listed
in this catalog. Please contact your Outside Sales Representative, listed below,
or our Customer Service department for ordering assistance or to answer any
product questions you may have.
Contact Your Outside Sales Representative for On-Site Help

With Lifting & Material Handling Solutions.
Your Outside Sales Representative Is:
I
LAMCO Full Service Lifting Center
LAMCO
Same Day Emergency Service Since 1971
For ergonomically designed lifting solutions ranging from nylon slings to manipulators and
vacuum lifters as well as complete overhead crane systems...LAMCO is the only name you
need to know.
At LAMCO we can design and fabricate standard and single use ergonomic lifting devices to
meet your specific needs. Our manufacturing capabilities allow us to offer Same Day
Emergency Service for slings with capacities up to 65 Tons (130,000 lbs.). All slings and lift-
ing devices are made to OSHA and ASME/ANSI standards. We also represent over 75 man-
ufacturers of lifting products to supply you with the best lifting solutions for a safe and efficient
workplace.
Our manufacturing and service capabilities include, but are not limited to:
SYNTHETIC - ALLOY CHAIN - WIRE MESH SLINGS

•Slings designed and manufactured to your specific length and pad requirements
•Webbing replacement and repairs made to slings
•Certified testing equipment with Test Certificates for proof testing to 150,000 lbs.
METAL FABRICATION
•Complete design and fabrication of single use ergonomic lifting devices
WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES AND WIRE ROPE SLINGS

•Wire rope slings and multi-leg bridles with Flemish Eyes for extra safety
•Wire rope assemblies for hoists and cranes
•Wire rope cut to specified lengths at No Additional Charge
OVERHEAD HOISTS AND CRANE SYSTEMS

•Chain and wire rope hoists - Air, Electric and Hand
•Complete crane systems and installation - ceiling mounted or free standing
HOIST REPAIR
•Factory Trained Technicians - Certified Testing Equipment
•Air, Electric and Hand hoists
“FLOOR TO RAFTER” OVERHEAD LIFTING INSPECTIONS

•Slings & Rigging Hardware
•Overhead Cranes & Hoists
•Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices
TRAINING AND INFORMATION SERVICES

•Sling use & inspection training seminars at our facilities or at your location
•LAMCO Wall Charts and Rigger’s Cards
II
LAMCO Sling & Hoist Training Seminars
About the Seminars

LAMCO offers training seminars for your employees on the prop-
er Care, Use and Inspection of Slings and Hoists. Seminars
can be tailored to your needs from one hour to full-day sessions.
Full-day seminars are offered 4 times a year at our Moline loca-

tion. Topics covered include Principles of Lifting, Sling and Hoist
Inspection and Proper Sling and Hoist use. In addition to class-
room instruction, attendees will participate in hands-on inspection
of slings and tour our manufacturing facility. A certificate will be issued upon completion
of the class.
LAMCO also offers training seminars in 1-4 hour durations that can be used for in-plant
safety training.
Who should attend?

All individuals with responsibility for using/inspecting slings.
This includes laborers, steel erection workers, sheet metal
workers, equipment operators, foreman, job superintendents,
electricians and other specialty crafts.
Why attend?
Rigging and material handling failures are among the
leading causes of injury and death at construction sites
and manufacturing operations. The vast majority of these
accidents can be attributed to operator error and not
equipment failure. Failures can be prevented by respon-
sible and trained personnel who know and understand the
limitations of rigging and the proper use of equipment and
load charts.
When?
A seminar and fee schedule is available and can be sent to you by calling (800) 447-
1885 or (309) 764-7400.
CALL NOW!
EMPLOYEE SAFETY IS NOT SOMETHING TO POSTPONE.
• ON SITE SLING INSPECTIONS, PERFORMED

BY LAMCO, ARE ALSO AVAILABLE •
III
LAMCO Frequently Ordered Items
This space is made available to simplify the ordering of items that you order on a repetitive
basis.
Item Number Description Special Remarks
IV
LAMCO TABLE OF CONTENTS
Synthetic Slings & Attachments

Care, Use & Inspection of Synthetic Slings ................... pg. 2
Synthetic Sling Capacity Charts .................................... pg. 7
Wear Pads ..................................................................... pg. 18
Synthetic Sling Hardware .............................................. pg. 19
Roundslings ................................................................... pg. 24
Wire Rope Slings / Wire Rope /

Attachments
Care, Use & Inspection of Wire Rope Slings ................. pg. 29
Wire Rope Sling Capacity Charts .................................. pg. 33
Care, Use & Inspection of Crane Ropes ....................... pg. 37
Wire Rope Capacity Charts & Specialty Ropes ............. pg. 40
Wire Rope Hardware, Crane Blocks, Sheaves ............. pg. 45
Alloy Chain Slings & Attachments

Care, Use & Inspection of Grade 80 Alloy Chain Slings pg. 72
Grade 80 Alloy Chain & Attachments .......................... pg. 74
Grade 100 Alloy Chain & Attachments ........................ pg. 86
Grade 120 Alloy Chain & Attachments ........................ pg. 97
Specialty Chain, Chain/Wire Mesh Slings ..................... pg. 98
Custom Lifting Devices

Lift & Spreader Beams ................................................... pg. 104
Wire Fabricated Hooks .................................................. pg. 106
Coil Handling Equipment ............................................... pg. 110
Sheet Handling Equipment ............................................ pg. 115
Ergonomic / Work Cell Equipment

Manipulators .................................................................. pg. 117
Lift Tables ....................................................................... pg. 119
Specialty Balancers & Hoists ......................................... pg. 120
Workstation Jibs & Cranes ............................................. pg. 128
Hoists & Accessories

CM Manual, Lever, Electric & Air Hoists ........................ pg. 138
CM Manual & Powered Trolleys .................................... pg. 168
Harrington Manual, Lever, Electric & Air Hoists ............. pg. 174
High Capacity Air & Wire Rope Hoists ........................... pg. 185
Hoist Hooks and Latch Kits ........................................... pg. 187
V
LAMCO TABLE OF CONTENTS
Overhead Cranes / Jibs / Winches

UESCO & Harrington Crane Systems ........................... pg. 197
Spanco Jib Cranes ........................................................ pg. 200
Spanco Gantry Cranes .................................................. pg. 206
Electrification, Remote Controls, & Crane Scales .......... pg. 216
Hand & Power WInches ................................................ pg. 223
Rigging Hardware
Swivel Hoist Rings & Eye Bolts ...................................... pg. 228
Turnbuckles ................................................................... pg. 234
Shackles - Carbon, Alloy, Wide Body, Long Reach ...... pg. 240
Lifting & Beam Clamps

Plate Clamps .................................................................. pg. 249
Beam Clamps ................................................................ pg. 256
Vacuum & Magnet Lifters
Permanent Lever Actuated Magnets ............................. pg. 259

Powered Lift Magnets .................................................... pg. 263
Vacuum Lifters ............................................................... pg. 266
Fall Restraint / Cargo Restraint / Fiber Rope

Harnesses, Lanyards & Anchors ................................... pg. 270
Manbaskets .................................................................... pg. 272
Forklift Work Platforms .................................................. pg. 273
Ratchet Tie Downs ......................................................... pg. 274
Binder Chains, Lever & Ratchet Binders ...................... pg. 277
Fiber Rope and Fiber Rope Slings ................................ pg. 280
Index
VI
Care, Use and Inspection
of
Synthetic Web Slings
Safety is the paramount consideration involved in the use of any web sling. This standard does not purport to
address all safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to
establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of the regulatory limitations prior
to use. The appropriate web sling shall be selected for the specific lift. Users of web slings shall have knowledge
on the proper method of lifting item(s), and how they will react under normal and emergency situations. Also, users
shall be knowledgeable about industry, local, state, federal and provincial regulations applicable to the item(s)
being lifted.
Chapter 5.0 Operating Practices for Web Slings

Section 5.1 Purpose
5.1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to provide guidelines for the qualified person responsible for web
sling selection, rigging, inspection and use.
Section 5.2 Mechanical Considerations
5.2.1 Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of
the web sling.
5.2.2 Select a web sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and
environment. (See hitch definitions below).
Hitch Definitions:
Hitch/Vertical - A method of rigging a sling in which the load is attached to the loop eye
or end fitting at one end of the sling and the loop eye or end fitting at the other end is
attached to the lifting device.
Hitch/Choker - A method of rigging a sling in which the sling is passed around the load,
then through one loop eye, end fitting, or device with the other loop eye or end fitting
attached to the lifting device. This hitch can be done with a sliding choker hook or simi-
lar device.
Hitch/Vertical Basket - A method of rigging a sling in which the web sling is passed
around the load, and both loop eyes or end fittings are attached to the lifting device.
Hitch/Angled Basket - Same as Basket Vertical hitch except that the attachment point
of the lifting device (over the load) forces an angled hitch.
Hitch/Vertical Hitch/Choker Hitch/Vertical Basket Hitch/Angled Basket
5.2.3 Web slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity shown on the attached
identification tag. Consideration shall be given to the sling to load angle which affects rated
capacity.
2
Sling Angle Table (Reduction of Sling Capacity)
Angles/Degrees Adjustment Angles/Degrees Adjustment
Horizontal Factor Horizontal Factor
90 1.000 55 0.819
85 0.996 50 0.766
80 0.985 45 0.707
75 0.966 40 0.643
70 0.940 35 0.574
65 0.906 30 0.500
60 0.866
Example: EE-291 Endless Web Sling with a 6,200 lbs. vertical basket rating.
Sling Rating x Adjustment Factor = Rated Capacity
6200 x .866 = 5369 rated capacity 6200 x .707 = 4383 rated capacity 6200 x .500 = 3100 rated capacity
For web slings used in a choker hitch, rated capacities are for an Special Considerations for Large
angle of choke 120 degrees or greater for the angle formed in the Hooks, Shackles, etc.
web sling body as it passes through the choking eye. (Below) The ratio of the length of a loop eye, to
the diameter of the object over which
the loop eye is to be placed, should be
Sling Rated capacity factor a minimum three-to-one relationship.
Angle of Choke
as percentage of single leg
(degrees)
choker hitch capacity
120 - 180 100%

90 - 120 87%
60 - 89 74%
30 - 59 62%
0 - 29 49%
5.2.4 Web slings with fittings, which are used in a choker hitch, shall be of sufficient length to assure
that the choking action is on the webbing, and should not be on the fitting, the base of the eye
or fitting, the load carrying splice and the sling tag.
5.2.5 Web slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load controlled to prevent slippage.
3
5.2.6 The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to ensure that the fitting will seat
properly on the hook or other attachments.
5.2.7 Web slings shall always be protected from being cut or damaged by corners, edges, protrusions
or abrasive surfaces with protection sufficient for the intended purpose.
5.2.8 Web slings should not be dragged on the floor or over abrasive surfaces.
5.2.9 Web slings shall not be twisted, shortened, lengthened, tied in knots or joined by knotting. Web
slings shall be shortened, lengthened, or adjusted only by methods approved by the
manufacturer.
5.2.10 Web slings should not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the web sling.
Loads resting on web slings could damage the sling.
5.2.11 Do not drop web slings equipped with metal fittings.
5.2.12 Web slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as
usable under Sections 5.3, 5.4, and 5.5.
5.2.13 The web sling shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load.
5.2.14 Personnel, including portions of the human body, shall be kept from between the sling and the
load, and from between the sling and the crane hook or hoist hook.
5.2.15 Personnel shall not stand under suspended loads. Personnel should stand clear of suspended
loads.
5.2.16 Personnel shall not ride the web sling or the load being lifted.
5.2.17 Shock loading should be avoided.
5.2.18 Twisting and kinking the legs (branches) shall be avoided.
5.2.19 Load applied to the hook shall be centered in the base (bowl) of hook to prevent point loading
on the hook.
5.2.20 During a lift, with or without the load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.
5.2.21 The web sling’s legs (branches) should contain or support the load from the sides above the
center of gravity when using a basket hitch.
5.2.22 Web slings shall be long enough so that the rated capacity (Working Load Limit) is adequate
when the sling to load angle is taken into consideration (See Sling Angle Table on top of page
3).
5.2.23 Only web slings with legible identification tags shall be used.
5.2.24 Tags and labels should be kept away from the load, hook and point of choke.
5.2.25 Web slings shall not be constricted or bunched between the ears of a clevis or shackle.
5.2.26 Place blocks under load prior to setting down the load to allow removal of the web sling, if appli-
cable.
5.2.27 Web slings shall not be used as bridles on suspended personnel platforms.
Section 5.3 Environmental Considerations
5.3.1 Web slings should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use to prevent loss of
strength through exposure to ultraviolet rays. Web slings shall not be stored in chemically active
environments.
4
5.3.2 Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying
degrees ranging from little to total degradation. the web sling manufacturer or qualified person
should be consulted before slings are used in chemically active environments.
5.3.2.1 Acids
5.3.2.1.1 Nylon is subject to degradation in acids, ranging from little to total degradation.
5.3.2.1.2 Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation, ranging from little to
moderate in some acids.
5.3.2.1.3 Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:
A. Type of acid
B. Exposure conditions
C. Concentration
D. Temperature
5.3.2.2 Alkalis
5.3.2.2.1 Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from little to total degradation.
5.3.2.2.2 Nylon is resistant to many alkalis, but is subject to degradation, ranging from little to
moderate in some alkalis.
5.3.2.2.3 Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:
A. Type of alkalis
B. Exposure conditions
C. Concentration
D. Temperature
5.3.3 Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used in contact with objects or at temperatures in excess
of 194°F (90°C) or below -40°F (-40°C).
5.3.4 Web slings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists
or liquids of alkalis and/or acids are present.
5.3.5 Environments in which synthetic web slings are continuously exposed to ultraviolet light can
affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying degrees ranging from slight to total
degradation.
CAUTION: Degradation can take place without visible indications.
A. Factors which affect the degree of strength loss are:

1. Length of time of continuous exposure
2. Web sling construction and design
3. Other environmental factors such as weather conditions and geographic
location.
B. Suggested procedure to minimize the affects of ultraviolet light is to store web slings in a
cool, dry and dark place when not being used for prolonged periods of time.
C. Some visual indications of sunlight or ultraviolet degradation are:
1. Bleaching out of web sling color

2. Increased stiffness of web sling material
3. Surface abrasion in area not normally in contact with the load
D. Proof Testing Warning: Slings used in environments where they are subject to continuous
exposure to sunlight or ultra-violet light shall be proof tested to twice the rated capacity semi-
annually, or more frequently depending on severity of exposure.
5
Section 5.4 Inspection
5.4.1 Type of Inspection
A. Initial Inspection - Before a new or repaired web sling is placed in service, it shall be
inspected by a designated person to ensure that the correct web sling is being used, as well
as to determine that the web sling meets the requirements of the specification.
B. Frequent Inspection - This inspection should be conducted by the person handling the sling
each time the sling is used.
C. Periodic Inspection - This inspection shall be conducted by designated personnel.

Frequency of inspection should be based on:
1. Frequency of web sling use

2. Severity of service conditions
3. Experience gained on the service life of web slings used in similar applications
4. Inspections should be conducted at least annually
Section 5.5 Removal from service
5.5.1 Treated and untreated nylon and polyester webbing, used to fabricate synthetic slings, per class
5 and class 7 rated capacity charts, may contain red yarn woven into the core of the webbing to
serve only as one of many aids in determining whether and when a sling should be removed
from service.
5.5.2 A web sling shall be removed from service if any of the following are visible:
A. If sling rated capacity or sling material identification is missing or not readable.

B. Acid or Alkali burns.
C. Melting, charring or weld spatter on any part of the web sling.
D. Holes, tears, cuts, snags or embedded particles.
E. Broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices.
F. Excessive abrasive wear.
G. Knots in any part of the web sling.
H. Excessive pitting, or corrosion, or cracked, or distorted, or broken fittings.
I. Any other visible damage that causes doubt as to the strength of the sling
Section 5.6 Inspection records
5.6.1 Written inspection records, utilizing the identification for each sling as established by the user,
should be kept on file for all web slings. These records should show a description of the sling
and its condition on each periodic inspection.
Section 5.7 Repair of web slings
5.7.1 Sling webbing with structural damage shall never be repaired. (See 5.5.2)
5.7.2 Type I and Type II web slings, and other web slings utilizing hardware, may be re-webbed utiliz-
ing existing fittings. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer repairing the web sling to
determine if the hardware is re-usable.
5.7.3 Slings shall be repaired only by a sling manufacturer or a qualified person. When repaired, a
sling shall be marked to identify the repair agent.
5.7.4 All re-webbed Type I and Type II, and other web slings utilizing fittings, shall be proof tested to
two (2) times their vertical rated capacity before being placed back into service. A certificate of
proof testing shall be provided.
5.7.5 Temporary repairs of webbing, fittings or stitching shall not be permitted.
5.7.6 Repaired slings shall be proof tested to two (2) times its assigned rated capacity before being
put back into service.
The preceding is an excerpt from the Recommended Standard Specification for Synthetic Web Slings. Permission for its use
has been given by the Web Sling & Tiedown Association.
6
LAMCO Manufactured by LAMCO - Same Day Emergency Service
CLASS 75 - EYE & EYE SLINGS

TYPE THREE - FLAT EYE
LAMCO SLINGS & RIGGING, INC.
TYPE FOUR - HALF TWIST EYE
Length or Reach
Class 75 eye & eye slings are available in widths up to 6”. Type three eye & eye slings have flat eyes at each
end and conform to all basic rigging hitches. The flat eye aids in sliding the sling in and out of narrow places.
The eyes may be buffered on the inside for longer life.
Type four eye & eye slings have eyes with a half twist to keep them open. The open eye makes for faster hitch-
ing in a choker and allows the operator to quickly slip the other eye onto the crane hook.
ALL CLASS 75 WEBBING CONTAINS RED WARNING YARNS THAT, WHEN EXPOSED,
INDICATE REMOVAL FROM SERVICE.
RATED CAPACITY IN LBS.
EYE EYE
STOCK NO. WIDTH VERTICAL
WIDTH LENGTH VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
CLASS 75 - ONE PLY

EE-171 1” 1” 9” 2,200 1,100 880
EE-172 2” 2” 9” 4,400 2,200 1,760
EE-173 3” 1 1/2” 12” 6,600 3,300 2,640
EE-174 4” 1 1/2” 12” 8,800 4,400 3,520
EE-175 5” 2” 12” 11,000 5,500 4,400
EE-176 6” 2” 14” 13,200 6,600 5,280
CLASS 75 - TWO PLY
EE-271 1” 1” 9” 4,400 2,200 1,760
EE-272 2” 2” 9” 8,800 4,400 3,520
EE-273 3” 1 1/2” 12” 13,200 6,600 5,280
EE-274 4” 1 1/2” 12” 16,400 8,200 6,560
EE-275 5” 2” 12” 20,500 10,250 8,200
EE-276 6” 2” 14” 24,600 12,300 9,840
CLASS 75 - FOUR PLY
EE-471 1” 1” 12” 8,800 4,400 3,520
EE-472 2” 2” 12” 17,600 8,800 7,040
EE-473 3” 1 1/2” 18” 26,400 13,200 10,560
EE-474 4” 2” 18” 32,800 16,400 13,120
EE-475 5” 2 1/2” 20” 41,000 20,500 16,400
EE-476 6” 3” 20” 49,200 24,600 19,680
Wear pads and sleeves are available. See page 18.
7
CLASS 98 - EYE & EYE SLINGS

TYPE THREE - FLAT EYE
TYPE FOUR - HALF TWIST EYE

Length or Reach
Class 98 eye & eye slings are available in widths up to 12”. Class 98 slings are made the same as class 75, but
are from stronger and slightly thicker webbing. Available in nylon or polyester.
EYE EYE
WIDTH LENGTH VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
CLASS 98 - ONE PLY

EE-191 1” 1” 9” 3,100 1,550 1,240
EE-1915 1 1/2” 1 1/2” 9” 4,650 2,325 1,860
EE-192 2” 2” 9” 6,200 3,100 2,480
EE-193 3” 1 1/2” 9” 9,300 4,650 3,720
EE-194 4” 1 1/2” 12” 12,400 6,200 4,960
EE-195 5” 2” 12” 15,400 7,700 6,130
EE-196 6” 2” 12” 18,600 9,300 7,440
EE-198 8” 3” 18” 24,800 12,400 9,920
EE-1910 10” 4” 22” 31,000 15,500 12,400
EE-1912 12” 5” 26” 37,200 18,600 14,880
CLASS 98 - TWO PLY
EE-291 1” 1” 9” 6,200 3,100 2,480
EE-2915 1 1/2” 1 1/2” 9” 9,300 4,650 3,720
EE-292 2” 2” 9” 12,400 6,200 4,960
EE-293 3” 1 1/2” 12” 18,600 9,300 7,440
EE-294 4” 1 1/2” 12” 22,000 11,000 8,800
EE-295 5” 2” 12” 27,500 13,700 10,900
EE-296 6” 2” 14” 33,000 16,500 13,200
EE-298 8” 3” 18” 44,000 22,000 17,600
EE-2910 10” 4” 22” 55,000 27,500 22,000
EE-2912 12” 5” 26” 66,000 33,000 26,400
CLASS 98 - FOUR PLY
EE-491 1” 1” 12” 12,400 6,200 4,960
EE-4915 1 1/2” 1 1/2” 12” 18,600 9,300 7,440
EE-492 2” 2” 12” 24,800 12,400 9,920
EE-493 3” 1 1/2” 18” 37,200 18,600 14,880
EE-494 4” 2” 18” 44,000 22,000 17,600
EE-495 5” 2 1/2” 18” 54,900 27,500 21,900
EE-496 6” 3” 20” 66,000 33,000 26,400
EE-498 8” 4” 24” 88,000 44,000 35,200
EE-4910 10” 5” 28” 110,000 55,000 44,000
EE-4912 12” 6” 32” 132,000 66,000 52,800
8
CLASS 75 ENDLESS SLINGS - TYPE FIVE
Length or Reach
Class 75 endless slings are available in widths up to 6”. Endless slings give the advantage of longer life
because the "wear point" revolves around the circumference as it is repeatedly used. Best used in lengths of
ten feet or less, endless slings are the real workhorse of the machine shop and maintenance group. Endless
slings with a width of three inches or more can be tapered at bearing points to fit crane hooks.

OPTIONAL
TAPER VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
CLASS 75 - ONE PLY

EN-171 1” N/A 4,400 2,200 1,760
EN-172 2” 1” 8,800 4,400 3,520
EN-173 3” 1 1/2” 13,200 6,600 5,280
EN-174 4” 1 1/2” 17,600 8,800 7,040
EN-175 5” 2” 22,000 11,000 8,800
EN-176 6” 2” 26,400 13,200 10,560
CLASS 75 - TWO PLY
EN-271 1” N/A 8,800 4,400 3,520
EN-272 2” 1” 17,600 8,800 7,040
EN-273 3” 1 1/2” 26,400 13,200 10,560
EN-274 4” 1 1/2” 32,800 16,400 13,120
EN-275 5” 2 1/2” 41,000 20,500 16,400
EN-276 6” 2” 49,200 24,600 19,680
CLASS 75 - THREE PLY
EN-371 1” N/A 13,200 6,600 5,200
EN-372 2” N/A 26,400 13,200 10,500
EN-373 3” 1 1/2” 39,600 19,800 15,800
EN-374 4” 2” 49,200 24,600 19,700
EN-375 5” 2 1/2” 61,500 30,700 24,600
EN-376 6” 3” 73,800 36,900 29,500
9
CLASS 98 ENDLESS SLINGS - TYPE FIVE
Length or Reach
Class 98 endless slings area available in widths up to 12”. Class 98 webbing is stronger than class 75 and not
quite as pliable. With slightly thicker fiber than class 75, these slings will withstand more wear. Available in
nylon or polyester webbing.

OPTIONAL
STOCK NO. WIDTH* VERTICAL
TAPER VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
CLASS 98 - ONE PLY
EN-191 1” N/A 6,200 3,100 2,480
EN-1915 1 1/2” N/A 9,300 4,650 3,720
EN-192 2” 1” 12,400 6,200 4,960
EN-193 3” 1 1/2” 18,600 9,300 7,440
EN-194 4” 1 1/2” 24,800 12,400 9,920
EN-195 5” 2” 30,900 15,450 12,350
EN-196 6” 2” 37,200 18,600 14,880
CLASS 98 - TWO PLY
EN-291 1” N/A 12,400 6,200 4,960
EN-2915 1 1/2” N/A 18,600 9,300 7,440
EN-292 2” 1” 24,800 12,400 9,920
EN-293 3” 1 1/2” 37,200 18,600 14,880
EN-294 4” 1 1/2” 44,000 22,000 17,600
EN-295 5” 2 1/2” 55,000 27,500 21,950
EN-296 6” 2” 66,000 33,000 26,400
CLASS 98 - THREE PLY
EN-391 1” N/A 18,600 9,300 7,440
EN-3915 1 1/2” N/A 27,900 13,950 11,160
EN-392 2” 1” 37,200 18,600 14,880
EN-393 3” 1 1/2” 55,800 27,900 22,320
EN-394 4” 1 1/2” 68,800 34,400 27,520
EN-395 5” 2 1/2” 85,900 42,950 34,300
EN-396 6” 3” 103,200 51,600 41,280
*Additional widths are available up to 12 inches. Call for Information.

10
REVERSE EYE SLINGS

TYPE SIX - REVERSIBLE EYE
TYPE SEVEN - FLAT EYE
Length or Reach
Reverse eye slings are built for rugged use. Both sides of the body and eyes are protected with abrasion resist-
ant nylon to give longer life in rough applications.
On type six slings, the eye can be turned inside out to give a new wear surface and extend the life of the sling.
Type seven slings have flat eyes to slide under loads or for tight clearance areas.
ALL CLASS 75 & 98 WEBBING CONTAINS RED WARNING YARNS THAT, WHEN EXPOSED,

STOCK EYE EYE
WIDTH VERTICAL
NO.* WIDTH LENGTH VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
RE-1712 2” 1” 9” 6,400 3,200 2,560

RE-1912 2” 1” 9” 9,200 4,600 3,680
RE-2712 2” 1” 12” 11,600 5,800 4,640
RE-2912 2” 1” 12” 15,000 7,500 6,000
RE-1953 3” 1 1/2” 12” 13,800 6,900 5,520
RE-2953 3” 1 1/2” 12” 20,000 10,000 8,000
RE-1724 4” 2” 12” 12,000 6,000 4,800
RE-1924 4” 2” 12” 15,600 7,800 6,240
RE-2724 4” 2” 15” 22,000 11,000 8,800
RE-2924 4” 2” 15” 27,600 13,800 11,000
RE-3924 4” 2” 15” 40,800 20,400 16,300
RE-4924 4” 2” 15” 46,000 23,000 18,400
RE-1736 6” 1 1/2” 14” 20,000 10,000 8,000
RE-1936 6” 1 1/2” 14” 24,000 12,000 9,600
RE-2736 6” 1 1/2” 18” 28,000 14,000 11,200
RE-2936 6” 1 1/2” 18” 34,800 17,400 13,920
RE-3936 6” 3” 20” 53,000 26,500 20,200
RE-4936 6” 3” 24” 68,000 34,000 27,200
*NOTE: Substitute the letter “F” for “R” if flat eyes required.
11
SLINGS WITH HARDWARE - TYPE ONE
Length or Reach
Type one slings with oblongs have alloy master links on each end. The oblongs have the ability to allow the
slings to be used in a choker hitch. The oblongs offer a greater capacity at a less expensive price than steel tri-
angles. If not damaged the hardware may be used after the webbing has worn. Available in nylon or polyester
webbing.

WEBBING OBLONG
STOCK NO. VERTICAL
WIDTH SIZE VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
LOO-171 1” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 2,200 1,100 880

LOO-191 1” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 3,100 1,550 1,240
LOO-271 1” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 4,400 2,200 1,760
LOO-291 1” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 6,200 3,100 2,480
LOO-1915 1 1/2” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 4,650 2,325 1,860
LOO-2915 1 1/2” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 9,300 4,650 3,720
LOO-172 2” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 4,400 2,200 1,760
LOO-192 2” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 6,200 3,100 2,480
LOO-272 2” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 8,800 4,400 3,520
LOO-292 2” 5/8 X 3 X 6 12,400 6,200 4,960
LOO-173 3” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 6,600 3,300 2,640
LOO-193 3” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 9,300 4,650 3,720
LOO-273 3” 3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2 13,200 6,600 5,280
LOO-293 3” 3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2 18,600 9,300 7,440
LOO-174 4” 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 5 8,800 4,400 3,520
LOO-194 4” 5/8 X 3 X 6 12,400 6,200 4,960
LOO-274 4” 3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2 16,400 8,200 6,560
LOO-294 4” 1 X 3 1/2 X 7 22,000 11,000 8,800
LOO-175 5” 5/8 X 3 X 6 11,000 5,500 4,400
LOO-195 5” 3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2 15,400 7,700 6,130
LOO-275 5” 1 X 3 1/2 X 7 20,500 10,250 8,200
LOO-295 5” 1 X 3 1/2 X 7 27,500 13,700 10,900
LOO-176 6” 3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2 13,200 6,600 5,280
LOO-196 6” 3/4 X 2 3/4 X 5 1/2 18,600 9,300 7,440
LOO-276 6” 1 X 3 1/2 X 7 24,600 12,300 9,840
LOO-296 6” 1 X 3 1/2 X 7 33,000 16,500 13,200
12
SLINGS WITH HARDWARE - TYPE ONE
Length or Reach
Type one slings have one triangle and one choker end and can be supplied in either aluminum or steel. Slings
with aluminum hardware are lighter in weight, but are made for one ply slings only. Steel hardware is available
for one and two ply slings. If not damaged, the hardware can be re-used to build a new sling many times after
the nylon has worn.

WEBBING
STOCK NO. VERTICAL
WIDTH VERTICAL CHOKER
BASKET
MFA-172 2” 4,400 2,200 1,760

MFA-192 2” 6,200 3,100 2,480
MFS-272 2” 8,800 4,400 3,520
MFS-292 2” 12,400 6,200 4,960
MFA-173 3” 6,600 3,300 2,640
MFA-193 3” 9,300 4,650 3,720
MFS-273 3” 13,200 6,600 5,280
MFS-293 3” 16,800 8,400 6,720
MFA-174 4” 8,800 4,400 3,520
MFA-194 4” 12,400 6,200 4,960
MFS-274 4” 16,400 8,200 6,560
MFS-294 4” 22,000 11,000 8,800
MFS-275 5” 20,500 10,250 8,200
MFS-295 5” 27,500 13,750 11,000
MFA-176 6” 13,200 6,600 5,280
MFA-196 6” 18,600 9,300 7,440
MFS-276 6” 24,600 12,300 9,840
MFS-296 6” 33,000 16,500 13,200
MFS-198 8” 24,800 12,400 9,920
MFS-298 8” 44,000 22,000 17,600
MFS-1910 10” 31,000 15,500 12,400
MFS-2910 10” 55,000 27,500 22,000
MFS-1912 12” 37,200 18,600 14,880
MFS-2912 12” 64,000 32,000 25,600
13
SLINGS WITH HARDWARE - TYPE TWO
Length or Reach
Type two slings have two triangle ends and can be supplied in either aluminum or steel. Slings with aluminum
hardware are lighter in weight, but are made for one ply slings only. Steel hardware is available for one and two
ply slings. If not damaged, the hardware can be re-used to build a new sling many times after the nylon has
been worn.

WEBBING
STOCK NO. VERTICAL
WIDTH VERTICAL
BASKET
MMA-172 2” 4,400 2,200
MMA-192 2” 6,200 3,100
MMS-272 2” 8,800 4,400
MMS-292 2” 12,400 6,200
MMA-173 3” 6,600 3,300
MMA-193 3” 9,300 4,650
MMS-273 3” 13,200 6,600
MMS-293 3” 16,800 8,400
MMA-174 4” 8,800 4,400
MMA-194 4” 12,400 6,200
MMS-274 4” 16,400 8,200
MMS-294 4” 22,000 11,000
MMS-275 5” 20,500 10,250
MMS-295 5” 27,500 13,750
MMA-176 6” 13,200 6,600
MMA-196 6” 18,600 9,300
MMS-276 6” 24,600 12,300
MMS-296 6” 33,000 16,500
MMS-198 8” 24,800 12,400
MMS-298 8” 44,000 22,000
MMS-1910 10” 31,000 15,500
MMS-2910 10” 55,000 27,500
MMS-1912 12” 37,200 18,600
MMS-2912 12” 64,000 32,000
14
TYPE NINE - BRIDLE EYE
Length or Reach
Bridle eye slings are light duty with wide bodies and narrow eyes to handle bulky loads and fit small crane
hooks.
DESIGNED FOR USE IN BASKET HITCH ONLY.
RATED CAPACITY
BODY EYE EYE IN LBS.
STOCK NO.
WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH VERTICAL
BASKET
BE-196 6” 1” 9” 8,000
BE-198 8” 1” 12” 8,000
BE-1910 10” 1” 15” 8,000
BE-1912 12” 1” 18” 10,000
BE-1916 16” 1” 24” 10,000
BE-1920 20” 1” 24” 10,000
BE-1924 24” 1” 24” 10,000
Additional sizes and capacities available on request.

15
WIDE BODY SLINGS
Wide body slings range from six inches to twenty four inches wide and are DESIGNED FOR USE IN A BASKET
HITCH ONLY. Wide body slings are used primarily in pairs from a spreader beam for heavy loads or for picking
large coils around their circumference.
RATED CAPACITY
BODY EYE EYE IN LBS.
STOCK NO.
WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH VERTICAL
BASKET
WB-176 6” 2” 12” 13,200
WB-196 6” 2” 12” 18,600
WB-276 6” 2” 15” 26,400
WB-296 6” 2” 15” 37,200
WB-178 8” 2” 16” 17,600
WB-198 8” 2” 16” 24,800
WB-278 8” 2” 16” 32,800
WB-298 8” 2” 16” 44,000
WB-1910 10” 2 1/2” 18” 31,000
WB-2910 10” 2 1/2” 18” 55,000
WB-1712 12” 2” 18” 26,400
WB-1912 12” 2” 18” 37,200
WB-2712 12” 3” 18” 49,200
WB-2912 12” 3” 18” 66,000
WB-1916 16” 3” 18” 44,000
WB-2916 16” 4” 18” 70,400
WB-1920 20” 3 1/2” 24” 55,000

WB-2920 20” 5” 24” 82,500
WB-1924 24” 4” 24” 66,000

WB-2924 24” 6” 24” 92,000
16
BRIDLE AND MULTI-LEG WEB SLINGS

WEB BRIDLE SLING ADVANTAGES
 Lightweight and easy to handle

 Do not conduct electricity
 Help absorb shock
 Fitting options include, but are not limited to: Rings, hooks, shackles and
choker hardware
 Available in 3 & 4 leg assemblies also.
 Can be made from either nylon or polyester webbing
CALL US FOR YOUR SPECIFIC NEEDS.
Single Leg (1L) Double Leg (2L)

O-H O-H
Sling to Load Angle

* Sling angles of less than 45° are not recommended
Crosby
SINGLE LEG VERTICAL DOUBLE LEG
WS-320A 75° 60° 45°
STOCK NO. CAPACITY STOCK NO.
Hook Size
1L-171-*-* 1,100 2L-171-*-* 2,120 1,900 1,550
1L-191-*-* 1,550 2L-191-*-* 3,000 2,680 2,190
1 1/2 Ton
1L-271-*-* 2,200 2L-271-*-* 4,250 3,810 3,110
1L-291-*-* 3,000 2L-291-*-* 5,790 5,190 4,240
1L-172-*-* 2,200 2L-172-*-* 4,250 3,810 3,110
1L-192-*-* 3,100 2L-192-*-* 5,980 5,370 4,380
3 Ton
1L-272-*-* 4,400 2L-272-*-* 8,500 7,620 6,220
1L-292-*-* 6,000 2L-292-*-* 11,580 10,400 8,480
1L-173-*-* 3,300 2L-173-*-* 6,370 5,720 4,660
1L-193-*-* 4,650 2L-193-*-* 8,980 8,060 6,570
5 Ton
1L-273-*-* 6,600 2L-273-*-* 12,750 11,440 9,330
1L-293-*-* 9,300 2L-293-*-* 17,800 16,000 13,150
* Code designates the top fitting and leg attachment.

O = Oblong Master R = Ring Master P = Pear Master
H = Hook J = J-Hook E = Sling Eye C = Choker Hook
17
WEAR PADS AND SLEEVES
Webbing wear pads and sleeves offer extra protection to a web sling at a point where it wears the most. They
can be used on any style of web sling and can be ordered in any length. Wear pads can be sewn anywhere on
the sling, on one or both sides. Sleeves cover both sides of the sling and do not stretch with the sling when the
lift is being made.
NYLON WEAR PADS

LEATHER WEAR PADS
SLEEVES
GLASS HANDLING SLEEVE
SLING WRAP
EYE BUFFER
COIL HANDLING SLEEVES

Coil Contact Side
COIL HANDLING SLEEVES COIL HANDLING SLEEVES

Buffer Back Side Loop Back Side
18
LAMCO synthetic barrel sling
utilizing Crosby S-377 barrel hooks.
SEE APPLICATION AND

WARNING INFORMATION
WS-320A
WEB SLING HOOK
* Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times the Working Load Limit.
Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown
in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association.
WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001)
Replacement Latches page 192.
19
20
21
• Connects Synthetic Web and Synthetic Round Slings to conventional Crosby
S-280 hardware including:
• 320N Eye Hook
• Additional Crosby Grade 8 Fittings
• Master Links
• Rings
• Shackles
• Makes a field assembled bridle quick and easy.
• Increased radius of spool gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an
increased area for load distribution, thus:
• Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency by at least 15% as compared to
standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks.
This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be
achieved.
• Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers.
22
CM web sling shackle
• Finish: hot dip galvanized.
• Klik pin (zinc plated) as shown
furnished as standard—cotter
or hair pin can be furnished
on special order.
• Shackle body: carbon steel,
heat treated.
• Shackle pin: alloy steel,
heat treated.
• Tolerances: ±1/32" unless
otherwise indicated.
• Design ultimate strength equals
4 times the working load limit.
Shackle Dimensions (inches)

Working Approx.
Webbing load KLIK weight
width limit Product UPC pin Radius each
(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- code W L D P R E (lbs.)
2 18,050 M702 40600 333001 2 2 1/4 5/8 3/4 1 5/8 5/8 1.70
3 13,050 M703 40603 333001 3 3 1/4 3/4 7/8 1 7/8 3/4 2.86
4 10,800 M704 40606 333001 4 3 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 7/8 7/8 3.15
5 18,000 M705 40609 333002 5 4 1/4 7/8 1 2 1/8 7/8 4.75
6 18,000 M706 40614 333002 6 4 3/4 1 11/8 2 3/8 1 6.75
6 23,850 M706H 40615 333002 6 4 3/4 11/8 11/4 2 5/8 1 9.80
heavy duty
WARNING
TO AVOID INJURY: MADE IN U.S.A.
Do not exceed working load limit
Web Round Sling Connector - SKR
23
Endless
Slings (ENR)
Liftex Endless-Type
Roundslings are the most
basic roundsling yet they
offer great versatility.
Endless roundslings may be
used in a vertical, choker or
basket type hitch.
• Sling life extended through rotation of • Tagged for easy identification

bearing points • Red Core Warning Fibers alert user to
• Soft and Pliable - conforms well to irreg- damage
ularly shaped loads • Elongation approximately 3% at Rated
• Offers tighter choke with easier release Capacity*
• Double Jacket protects load-bearing
fibers
Endless *Capacity in lbs.

(ENR)
Roundslings
Approx. Approx.
Part Color
Vertical Minimum Diameter Weight
Number Code
Vertical Choker Basket Length (No Load) per foot
ENR1 Purple 2600 2100 5200 3’ 0.625” 0.3 lb.
ENR2 Green 5300 4200 10600 3’ 0.875” 0.4 lb.
ENR3 Yellow 8400 6700 16800 3’ 1.125” 0.5 lb.
ENR4 Tan 10600 8500 21200 3’ 1.125” 0.6 lb. Bearing

ENR5 Red 13200 10600 26400 3’ 1.375” 0.8 lb. to Bearing
ENR6 White 16800 13400 33600 6’ 1.375” 0.9 lb. Length
ENR7 Blue 21200 17000 42400 6’ 1.625” 1.3 lb.
ENR8 Orange 25000 20000 50000 6’ 1.750” 1.6 lb.

ENR9 Orange 31000 24800 62000 6’ 2.125” 2.0 lb.
ENR10 Orange 40000 32000 80000 6’ 2.350” 2.6 lb.
ENR11 Orange 53000 42400 106000 8’ 3.150” 3.4 lb.

ENR12 Orange 66000 52800 132000 8’ 3.950” 4.3 lb.
ENR13 Orange 90000 72000 180000 8’ 4.800” 5.9 lb.
WARNING *DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY
24
Eye & Eye (EER)
Liftex Eye & Eye-Type
roundslings are ideal where
abrasion to the sling body is a
problem. A tough, abrasion-
resistant nylon sleeve is sewn
to the body forming a loop or
eye at each end. They may
be used in a vertical, choker
or basket hitch.
• Capacities are color coded

• Double Jacket under body cover protects load-bearing yarns
• Stretch is reduced to approximately 3% at rated capacity
• Red Core Warning Fibers alert user to damage
Eye & Eye *Capacity in lbs.

(EER)
Roundslings
Standard Approx.
Part Color
Vertical Minimum Eye Body Weight
Number Code
Vertical Choker Basket Length Length Width per foot
EER1 Purple 2600 2100 5200 3’ 10” 2.25” 0.4 lb.
Bearing EER2 Green 5300 4200 10600 3’ 10” 2.50” 0.5 lb.
to Bearing
EER3 Yellow 8400 6700 16800 4’ 12” 2.50” 0.6 lb.
Length
EER4 Tan 10600 8500 21200 4’ 12” 3.50” 0.7 lb.

EER5 Red 13200 10600 26400 5’ 14” 3.50” 1.0 lb.
EER6 White 16800 13400 33600 7’ 16” 3.50” 1.1 lb.
EER7 Blue 21200 17000 42400 7’ 16” 4.25” 1.6 lb.
25
Braided Roundup® Roundslings
Braided Roundslings provide greater security in handling high-capacity loads, while maintain-
ing the qualities our other roundslings offer. Braided Roundslings are constructed using 3 (6-
part) or 4 (8-part) Endless Roundup roundslings. Braided Roundslings offer superior perform-
ance in a vertical, choker or basket hitch.
• Eyes are covered with abrasion-resistant nylon.

• Soft, flexible and easy to handle
• Conform well to load
• Excellent strength-to-weight ratio
• Capacities are color coded
• Red Core Warning Fibers alert user to damage
• Each sling is tagged for easy identification
6-Part *Capacity in lbs.

Braided
Roundslings
Standard Approx. Width
Part Color
Vertical Minimum Eye Weight Under
Number Code
Vertical Choker Basket Length Length per foot Load
6BR1 Purple 6700 5300 13400 5’ 14” 1.1 lb. 3.25”
6BR2 Green 13500 10800 27000 5’ 15” 1.45 lb. 3.75”
6BR3 Yellow 21400 17100 42800 6’ 18” 1.9 lb. 4.25” Bearing
to Bearing
6BR4 Tan 27000 21600 54000 6’ 18” 2.25 lb. 4.50” Length
6BR5 Red 33600 26800 67200 7’ 25” 3.0 lb. 5.25”
6BR6 White 42800 34200 85600 7’ 25” 3.5 lb. 5.50”
6BR7 Blue 54000 43200 108000 9’ 30” 4.95 lb. 6.63”
6BR8 Orange 63700 50900 127400 10’ 33” 6.0 lb. 8.25”
6BR9 Orange 79000 63200 158000 10’ 38” 7.75 lb. 11.0”
8-Part *Capacity in lbs.

Braided
Roundslings
Standard Approx. Width
Part Color
Vertical Minimum Eye Weight Under
Number Code
Vertical Choker Basket Length Length per foot Load
8BR1 Purple 9000 7200 18000 5’ 14” 1.4 lb. 3.50”
8BR2 Green 18000 14400 36000 5’ 15” 1.85 lb. 4.00”
8BR3 Yellow 28500 22800 57000 6’ 18” 2.40 lb. 4.75”
8BR4 Tan 36000 28800 72000 6’ 18” 2.85 lb. 5.00” Bearing
8BR5 Red 44900 35900 89800 7’ 25” 3.8 lb. 6.00” to Bearing
Length
8BR6 White 57100 45600 114200 7’ 25” 4.4 lb. 6.25”
8BR7 Blue 72000 57600 144000 9’ 30” 6.25 lb. 7.50”
8BR8 Orange 85000 68000 170000 10’ 33” 7.6 lb. 9.50”
8BR9 Orange 105300 84200 210600 10’ 38” 9.75 lb. 13”
26
Twin-Path Extra Slings are constructed of high performance load carrying yarns. The load
carrying yarns are protected by two independent, seamless, color coded covers. The internal red cover is pro-
tected by the outer green covermax abrasion resistant cover.
The sling cover is fabricated in such a way that it is actually two complete and separate slings in one. Each
path makes its own separate connection between the lifting hook and the load. This unique backup system is
designed to provide the sling user with sufficient reaction time to maintain control of the load if damage to one of
the paths was undetected.
Tell Tails Tags are used to show when Twin-Path Extra Slings are loaded beyond rated capacity, the indicator
tails shrink until they finally disappear under the cover.
Protective Sleeves can be sewn on or float around the body of the sling so that they can be positioned to the
areas where they are needed. A Special tag contains required information--and the Flag Tag contains the
Vertical Capacity in large readable characters.
RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.)

APPROXIMATE
VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE
WEIGHT
(Horizontal Angles) BODY WIDTH
(lbs. Per Ft.)
60° 45° (inches)
(Bearing-Bearing)
CODE NO.
TPXC 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .31 3”

TPXC 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .40 3”
TPXC 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .55 4”
TPXC 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .65 4”

TPXC 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .80 4”
TPXC 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 1.12 5”
TPXC 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,139 70,700 1.50 5”

TPXC 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.60 6”
TPXC 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.68 6”
TPXC 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.85 6”

TPXC 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 2.20 8”
TPXC 12500 125,000 100,000 250,000 216,500 176,500 3.00 8”
TPXC 15000 150,000 120,000 300,000 259,800 212,100 3.36 8”

TPXC 17500 175,000 140,000 350,000 303,100 247,450 4.00 10”
TPXC 20000 200,000 160,000 400,000 346,400 282,800 4.37 10”
TPXC 25000 250,000 200,000 500,000 433,000 353,500 5.50 11”

TPXC 27500 275,000 220,000 550,000 476,300 388,850 6.90 11”
TPXC 30000 300,000 240,000 600,000 519,600 424,200 7.50 13”
US Patent 4,850,629
Canadian Patent 1,280,458
NOTE: Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Ratings based on
straight pin diameter one-half sling width.
Metric capacities available. Do not exceed rated capacity.
27
below Rated Capacity Tables are used, the rated
Care, Use and Inspection capacity of the sling must be decreased.
of
Wire Rope Slings
Courtesy of Wire Rope Corporation of America, Inc. How wire rope slings are used.
Hitches
The rated capacity of a sling and what it How wire rope slings are configured to lift a load is
means to you. called a hitch. Most lifts use one of three basic hitch-
The rated capacity of a sling varies depending upon es.
the type of sling, the size of the sling, and the type of
hitch. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Vertical Eye and Eye Hitch
(ASME) requires that all wire rope slings be tagged If one eye of the sling is attached to the lifting
with the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the hook and the other eye is attached to the load,
rated capacity for specific configurations and the diam- this is called a vertical eye and eye, or
eter or size of the sling. Under no circumstances shall straight, hitch. A tagline should be used to
a sling's rated capacity be exceeded. The user should prevent load rotation that may damage the
maintain this identification so that it is legible during sling.
the life of the sling. All persons using the sling should When two or more slings are attached Vertical
read the tag and understand the information on it. to the same lifting hook, the total hitch becomes, in
The rated capacity of a wire rope sling is based effect, a lifting bridle and the load is distributed equal-
upon the Minimum Breaking Force (MBF) of the wire ly among the individual slings.
rope used in the sling, and other factors that affect the Slings used at an angle have a lower rated capac-
overall strength of the sling, including ity than a sling used vertically.
- Attachment or splicing efficiency.
- Design factor (5 is standard). Choker Hitch
- Number of parts of rope in the sling. In the choker hitch, one eye of the sling is
- Type of hitch (straight pull, choker hitch or basket attached to the lifting hook, while the sling
hitch). itself is drawn through the other eye. The load
- Diameter around which the body of the sling is is placed inside the "choke" that is created
bent (D/d ratio). while the sling is drawn tight over the load
- Number of legs. through the eye.
- Diameter of the pin (or hook) over which the eye Choker hitches reduce the lifting capabil-
of the sling is rigged. ity of a sling since the wire rope compo-
- Angle at which the sling is used. nent's ability to adjust during the lift is
affected. You should only use a choker Choker
Design Factor hitch when the load will not be seriously damaged by
the sling body, or the sling damaged by the load, and
The rated capacities for wire rope slings are based on when the lift requires the sling to hug the load. Never
a design factor of 5 per ASME B30.9. The design fac- choke a load so that any part of one eye or splice is in
tor and other factors are used to calculate the rated the part of the sling that passes through the other eye
capacities Design factors have been established that to form the choke.
allow the sling to give efficient service to the user. Two notes of caution: Always pull a choker hitch tight
before the lift is made. It should never be pulled down
D/d Ratios during the lift. Also, never use only one choker hitch to
When a sling is rigged as a basket, the diameter of the lift a load that could shift or slide out of the
bend where the sling contacts the load can affect the choke.
sling's lifting capacity. How much the lifting
capacity is affected can be calculated by Basket Hitch
dividing the diameter of the bend where A basket hitch is formed when both
the rope contacts the load (represented eyes of the sling are placed on the lift-
by "D") by the diameter of the rope or ing hook, thereby forming a circular
the component rope diameter in a basket of the sling. This type of hitch dis-
multi-part sling (represented by "d"). tributes the load equally between the Basket
For example, if the diameter of the bend two legs of the sling, within limitations.
("D") Is 10 and the component rope diam-
eter ("d") is 1/2, the D/d Ratio is 10 = 1/2 or 20. When Lifting Bridles
D/d ratios smaller than those shown in the footnotes When you attach two or more slings to the same lifting
hook, or are connected to a link rigged onto the hook,
29
the total hitch becomes a lifting bridle, distributing the equal distance from all of the lifting points, and the
load among the individual slings. When using two or sling angles are the same. If not, more complicated
more slings as a lifting bridle, remember that the sling engineering calculations are needed.
angle affects the slings' rated capacities. Also, the
location of the lift's center of gravity will affect the load
on each sling leg. 1. Divide the weight of your total load by the num-
ber of legs you are using. This gives you the load
Sound lifting practices. per leg if the lift were being made with all legs lift-
ing vertically.
There are four primary factors to take into considera- 2. Measure the angle between the legs of the sling
tion when lifting a load. and the horizontal plane.
They are: (1) the physical parameters of the load; 3. Multiply the load per leg that you calculated in
(2) the number of legs and the angle they make with step 1 by the load factor for the leg angle you are
the horizontal; (3) the rated capacity of the sling; and using. Use the Load factor guidelines table on
(4) the condition of the sling. the next page to determine the load factor.
The result is the actual load on each leg of the sling for
Physical parameters of the load this lift and angle. The actual load must never exceed
The size of the object to be lifted, and particularly the the sling's vertical rated capacity.
location of lifting points, will affect sling selection. The
weight of the lift, while a critical component, is only a Examples:
part of the information. The location of the center of 1. Total load is 1,000 Ibs. divided by
gravity is also necessary to determine sling loadings. two legs - 500 Ibs. load per leg if
If the load has small diameter corners, protective vertical lift.
blocking or "softeners" must be used so that sling 2. Horizontal sling angle is 60
capacity isn't reduced. Also, if lifting a painted object or degrees.
an object with a finished surface, padding or softeners 3. Multiply 500 Ibs. by 1.154 load
may be needed between the sling and the load to pro- factor (from table) = 577 Ibs. actu-
tect the load. al load per leg.
Number of legs and angle with the horizontal 1. Total load is 1,000 Ibs. divided by
As the angle formed by the sling leg and the horizon- two legs - 500 Ibs. load per leg if
tal decreases, the rated capacity of the sling also vertical lift.
decreases. In other words, the smaller the angle 2. Horizontal sling angle is 45
between the sling leg and the horizontal, the greater degrees.
the load on the sling leg. The minimum angle allowed 3. Multiply 500 Ibs. by 1.414 load
is 30 degrees. factor (from table) = 707 Ibs. actu-
al load per leg
Rated capacity
The rated capacity of a sling must never be exceeded. 1. Total load is 1,000 Ibs. divided by
The rated capacity is based both on sling fabrication two legs - 500 Ibs. load per leg if
components (minimum breaking force of rope used, vertical lift.
splicing efficiency, number of parts of rope in sling and 2. Horizontal sling angle is 30
number of sling legs) and sling application compo- degrees.
nents (angle of legs, type of hitch, D/d ratios, etc.) 3. Multiply 500 Ibs. by 2 load factor
If you are using one wire rope sling in a vertical (from table) = 1000 Ibs. actual
hitch, you can utilize the full rated lifting capacity of the load per leg
sling, but you must not exceed that lifting capacity.
If you are using two wire rope slings in a vertical WARNING: Slings shall not be used with horizontal
hitch (called a 2-legged bridle hitch) in a straight lift, angles less than 30°.
the load on each leg increases as the angle between
the leg and the horizontal plane decreases. Condition of sling
Whenever you lift a load with the legs of a sling at Each sling must be inspected daily. If the sling does
an angle, you can calculate the actual load per leg by not pass inspection (See Page 32), do not use.
using the following three-step formula.
Three-step formula for calculating load

per sling leg
These calculations assume that the center of gravity is
30
Calculating the load of basket hitches and bridles.
When you're calculating the load of choker hitch. whenever you use a choker hitch to
basket hitches and bridles, remem- shift, turn or control a load, or when
ber that as the horizontal angle of a Due to the body of the sling being the pull is against the choke in a
sling decreases, the used in the choke, there is a reduc- multi-leg lift.
resultant load on each tion in rated capacity. This is reflect-
leg increases. The ed in the choker rated capacity As always, if more than one sling is
horizontal angle of tables. Another reduction that must used and the legs are not vertical, a
bridles with three be considered is due to the "angle" further reduction in rated capacity
or more legs is of the choke (not the angle of the leg must be made for the sling angle.
measured the of the sling). Warning: Choker hitches at angles
same way
as horizon- If the load is hanging free, the nor-
Angle of choke Rate Capacity
tal sling angles of two-legged hitch- mal choke angle is approximately
in degrees Percent*
es. If a bridle is designed with differ- 135 degrees. When lift-
ent leg lengths, it may result in dif- ing and turning a load Over 120 100%
ferent horizontal angles. The load on using a choker 90-120 87%
each leg must be calculated based hitch, it is not 60-89 74%
on the position of the slings and the uncommon to 30-59 62%
location of the lift's center of gravity. have a severe 0-29 49%
Adjusting the rated capacity of a bend at the *Percent of sling’s rated capacity in a choker hitch.
choke. When a
Load factor choker hitch is greater than 135 degrees are not
used at an angle recommended since they are unsta-
guidelines
of less than 120 degrees, you must ble. Extreme care should be taken
Leg angle Load factor to determine the angle of choke as
reduce the hitch's rated capacity as
90° 1.000 shown in the chart at right. You accurately as possible
85° 1.003 always must adjust the rated
80° 1.015 capacity of the wire rope sling
75° 1.035
70° 1.064
65° 1.103
60° 1.154 LAMCO is a Proud
55° 1.220 Member of
50° 1.305
45° 1.414
40° 1.555
35° 1.743
30° 2.000
Associated Wire Rope Fabricators
See next page for wire rope sling inspection and removal
from service criteria.
31
Care, Use and Inspection of Wire Rope Slings - Continued
ASME B30.9C-2000 Excerpt tings. Deterioration which would result in loss of origi-
nal strength shall be observed and determination made
Section 9-2.6: Effects of Environment whether further use of the sling would constitute a haz-
ard. Para. 9-2.8.3 (Replacement) can provide guid-
9-2.6.1 Fiber core wire rope slings of all grades shall ance in making such a determination.
not be exposed to temperatures in excess of 180°F
(82° C). 9-2.8.3 Replacement
9-2.6.2 When wire rope slings of any grade are to be (a) No precise rules can be given for determination
used at temperatures above 400°F (204°C) or below of the exact time for sling replacement, since
-60°F (-51°C), the sling manufacturer should be consult- many variable factors are involved. Once a
ed. sling reaches a specified removal criteria, it
may be allowed to operate to the end of the
9-2.6.3 The strength of slings can be affected by chem- work shift, based on the judgement of a quali-
ically active environments as sling materials may be fied person. The sling shall be replaced a f t e r
susceptible to damage from caustic or acid substances that work shift, at the end of the day, or at the
or fumes; strongly oxidizing environments attack all latest time prior to the next work shift.
common sling materials. The sling manufacturer should (b) Removal criteria for sling replacement shall be
therefore be consulted before slings are used in chemi- as follows:
cally active environments.
(1) missing or illegible sling identification
Section 9-2.8: Sling Inspection & Replacement (2) for strand laid and single part slings
ten randomly distributed broken wires
9-2.8.1 Frequent Inspection. All slings shall be visu- in one rope lay, or five broken wires in
ally inspected by the person handling the sling each day one strand in one rope lay. (See page
they are used. These visual observations should be 39 for a description of the component
concerned with discovering gross damage, such as list- parts of wire rope.)
ed below, which may be an immediate hazard: (3) severe localized abrasion or scraping;
(4) kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or any
(a) distortion of rope in the sling such as kinking, other damage resulting in distortion of
crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, main strand the rope structure;
displacement, or core protrusion. Loss of rope (5) evidence of heat damage;
diameter in short rope lengths or unevenness of (6) end attachments that are cracked,
outer strands should provide evidence the sling deformed, or worn to the extent that
or slings should be replaced. the strength of the sling is substantial-
(b) general corrosion; ly affected;
(c) broken or cut strands; (7) hooks should be inspected in accor-
(d) number, distribution, and type of visible broken dance with ASME B30.10;
wires. (8) severe corrosion of the rope or end
attachments;
See paras. 9-2.8.3(b)(1) and (8) for further guidance. (9) multipart removal criteria for cable laid
and braided slings.
9-2.8.2 Periodic Inspection. A periodic inspection
shall be performed by a designated person on a regular
basis with frequency of inspection based on: Allowable Broken Allowable Broken
Sling Body Wires per Lay Strands per Braid
(a) frequency of sling use; Length Length
(b) severity of service conditions;
(c) nature of lifts being made; Cable laid 20
(d) experience gained on the service life of slings
used in similar circumstances.
Less than 8
20
Inspection shall be made at least annually and shall part braid
include a record of the inspection or of apparent condi-
tions to provide the basis for a continuing evaluation. 8 part braid
40
Inspection shall be conducted on the entire length of and more
each sling including splices, end attachments, and fit-
32
LAMCO Manufactured Product - Same Day Emergency Service
SINGLE PART BODY MECHANICAL SPLICE
WIRE ROPE SLINGS
Flemish Eye Splice
In the standard flemish eye mechanical

splice, wire rope is separated into two
Hook latches
parts: three adjacent strands to one are available
part and three adjacent strands along upon request
with the core to the other part. The two
parts are then re - laid back in opposite
directions to form an eye and ends are
secured with a pressed metal sleeve.
R AT E D C A PA C I T Y – To n s * E-E
Basket Eye E-HT E-EH
Hitch Dimensions Thimble Hook
Rope Choker
Dia. Vert. Hitch WLL**
(in.) *** 60° 45° 30° A B A B Tons E R
1/4 0.65 0.48 1.3 1.1 0.91 0.65 2.0 4 .88 1.63 3/4 .89 3.34
5/16 1.0 0.74 2.0 1.7 1.4 1.0 2.5 5 1.06 1.88 1 .91 3.81
3/8 1.4 1.1 2.9 2.5 2.0 1.4 3.0 6 1.13 2.13 1-1/2 1.00 4.14
7/16 1.9 1.4 3.9 3.4 2.7 1.9 3.5 7 1.25 2.38 2 1.09 4.69
6 x 19 I W R C
1/2 2.5 1.9 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.5 4.0 8 1.50 2.75 3 1.36 5.77
9/16 3.2 2.4 6.4 5.5 4.5 3.2 4.5 9 1.50 2.75 5 1.61 7.37
5/8 3.9 2.9 7.8 6.8 5.5 3.9 5.0 10 1.75 3.25 5 1.61 7.37
3/4 5.6 4.1 11 9.7 7.9 5.6 6.0 12 2.00 3.75 7-1/2 2.08 9.07
7/8 7.6 5.6 15 13 11 7.6 7.0 14 2.25 4.25 10 2.27 10.08
1 9.8 7.2 20 17 14 9.8 8.0 16 2.50 4.50 10 2.27 10.08

1-1/8 12 9.1 24 21 17 12 9.0 18 2.88 5.13 15 3.02 12.53
1-1/4 15 11 30 26 21 15 10.0 20 2.88 5.13 15 3.02 12.53
1-3/8 18 13 36 31 25 18 11 22 3.50 6.25 AH-22 3.02 12.53

1-1/2 21 16 42 37 30 21 12 24 3.50 6.25 AH-22 3.02 12.53
1-5/8 24 18 49 42 35 24 13 26 4.00 8.00 AH-30 3.25 14.06
6 x 36 IWRC
1-3/4 28 21 57 49 40 28 14 28 4.50 9.00 AH-37 3.00 18.19

2 37 28 73 63 52 37 16 32 6.00 12.00 AH-45 3.38 20.12
2-1/4 44 35 89 77 63 44 18 36 7.00 14.00 AH-60 4.12 23.72
2-1/2 54 42 109 94 77 54 20 40
2-3/4 65 51 130 113 92 65 22 44
3 77 60 153 133 108 77 24 48
3-1/2 102 79 203 176 144 102 28 56

4 130 101 260 224 183 130 32 64
All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.
* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d Ratio of 25.
Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling diameter.
Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles less than 30° shall not be used.
** Working Load Limit, based on standard carbon f it tings unless noted otherwise.
*** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacit y Adjustment on page 31.
33
2 LEG BRIDLE
R AT E D C A PA C I T Y Alloy Oblong Link Hook
( To n s )
Rope
Dia. WLL**
(in.) 60° 45° 30° D L W Tons E R
1/4 1.1 0.91 0.65 .50 5.00 2.50 3/4 .89 3.34
5/16 1.7 1.4 1.0 .50 5.00 2.50 1 .91 3.81
3/8 2.5 2.0 1.4 .50 5.00 2.50 1-1/2 1.00 4.14
7/16 3.4 2.7 1.9 .75 5.50 2.75 2 1.09 4.69

1/2 4.4 3.6 2.5 .75 5.50 2.75 3 1.36 5.77
6 x 19 I W RC
9/16 5.5 4.5 3.2 1.00 8.00 4.00 3 1.36 5.77

5/8 6.8 5.5 3.9 1.00 8.00 4.00 5 1.61 7.37
3/4 9.7 7.9 5.6 1.00 8.00 4.00 5 1.61 7.37
7/8 13 11 7.6 1.25 8.75 4.38 7-1/2 2.08 9.07
1 17 14 9.8 1.25 8.75 4.38 10 2.27 10.08

1-1/8 21 17 12 1.50 12.00 6.00 10 2.27 10.08
1-1/4 26 21 15 1.75 12.00 6.00 15 3.02 12.53
1-3/8 31 25 18 1.75 12.00 6.00 15 3.02 12.53

6 x 36 IWRC
1-1/2 37 30 21 2.00 14.00 7.00 AH-22 3.02 12.53

1-5/8 42 35 24 2.00 14.00 7.00 AH-30 3.25 14.06 Hook latches
1-3/4 49 40 28 2.25 16.00 8.00 AH-37 3.00 18.19 are available
2 63 52 37 2.50 16.00 8.00 AH-45 3.38 20.12 upon request
Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than
the nominal sling diameter.
Rated Capacities based on design factor of 5.
Horizontal sling angles of less than 30° shall not be used unless noted otherwise.
** Working Load Limit, based on standard carbon fittings.
3 LEG BRIDLE* 4 LEG BRIDLE*

R AT E D C A PA C I T Y R AT E D C A PA C I T Y
( To n s ) ( To n s )
Rope Rope
Dia. Dia.
(in.) 60° 45° 30° (in.) 60° 45° 30°
1/4 1.7 1.4 0.97 5/16 3.5 2.8 2.0
5/16 2.6 2.1 1.5 3/8 5.0 4.1 2.9
3/8 3.7 3.0 2.2 7/16 6.7 5.5 3.9
6 x 19 IWRC
7/16 5.0 4.1 2.9 1/2 8.8 7.1 5.1

1/2 6.6 5.4 3.8 9/16 11 9.0 6.4
9/16 8.3 6.8 4.8 5/8 14 11 7.8
6 x 19 I W RC
5/8 10 8.3 5.9 3/4 19 16 11

3/4 15 12 8.4 7/8 26 21 15
7/8 20 16 11
1 34 28 20
1 26 21 15 1-1/8 42 34 24
1-1/8 31 26 18 1-1/4 51 42 30
6 x 36
1-1/4 38 31 22 1-3/8 62 50 36
1-3/8 46 38 27 1-1/2 73 60 42
6 x 36 IWRC
1-1/2 55 45 32
1-5/8 63 52 37
All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. Horizontal sling
1-3/4 74 60 42 angles of less than 30° shall not be used.
All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. Horizontal sling

angles of less than 30° shall not be used.
*See 2 Leg Bridle chart for hook size. All hook sizes correspond with rope diameter.
34
Cable Laid Wire Rope Slings

These smooth and very flexible slings are made from cut lengths of cable-laid fabric that is
machine formed by laying six wire ropes in a helical pattern around a core rope. Flemish eye
mechanical splices, secured by pressed metal sleeves, provide centerline pull at the eyes.
RATED CAPACITY - Tons*
Eye Slip
Basket Hitch Thru Heavy
Thimble Thimble
Body Vert. Choker

Dia. Hitch** 60° 45° 30° A B ST HT
1/4 .50 .34 1.0 .87 .71 .50 2 4 W-2 1/4
3/8 1.1 .74 2.2 1.9 1.5 1.1 3 6 W-2 3/8
7x7x7
1/2 1.9 1.3 3.7 3.2 2.6 1.9 4 8 W-3 1/2
5/8 2.8 1.9 5.5 4.8 3.9 2.8 5 10 W-4 5/8

3/4 4.1 2.8 8.1 7.0 5.8 4.1 6 12 W-4 3/4
7/8 5.4 3.7 11. 9.4 7.6 5.4 7 14 W-5 7/8
7x7x19
1 6.9 4.7 14. 12. 9.7 6.9 8 16 W-5 1

1 1/8 8.3 5.8 17. 14. 12. 8.3 9 18 W-6 1 1/8
1 1/4 9.9 7.0 20. 17. 14. 9.9 10 20 W-6 1 1/4
* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch Based on D/d of 10 or greater.
** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment on page 31.
Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling
diameter.
Sling angles less than 30 degrees shall not be used
615 Six- part f lat braided sling

R AT E D C A PA C I T Y – Tons* Eye
Dimensions Slip
Thru Heavy
Rope Thimble Thimble
Dia. Width Thick. Choker Basket
(in.) of Body of Body Vert. Hitch** Hitch A B ST HT
#3/32 7/16 1/4 0.42 0.37 0.84 2 4 W-2 1/4

1/8 9/16 3/8 0.84 0.74 1.7 3 6 W-2 5/16
3/16 13/16 1/2 1.6 1.4 3.2 4 8 W-3 1/2
1/4 1-1/8 11/16 2.9 2.5 5.7 5 10 W-4 5/8

5/16 1-3/8 7/8 4.4 3.9 8.9 6 12 W-4 3/4
X I P I W RC
3/8 1-11/16 1 6.3 5.5 13 7 14 W-5 7/8
7/16 2 1-3/16 8.6 7.5 17 8 16 W-5 1

1/2 2-1/4 1-5/16 11 9.8 22 9 18 W-6 1-1/8
9/16 2-1/2 1-1/2 14 12 28 10 20 W-6 1-3/8
5/8 2-13/16 1-11/16 17 15 35 11 22 W-7 1-1/2

3/4 3-3/8 2 25 22 49 12 24 W-8 1-5/8
7/8 4 2-5/16 33 29 67 14 28 W-9 2
1 4-1/2 2-11/16 43 38 87 16 32 W-10 -
# Made with 7 x 19 GAC component rope.

* Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d ratio of 25 times the component rope
diameter.
Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less
than the nominal sling diameter.
Horizontal sling angles less than 30° shall not be used.
All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.
35
815 Eight- part round braided sling
Rated Capacity – Tons* Eye
Dimensions Slip
Thru Heavy
Rope ThimbleThimble
Dia. Sling Choker Basket
(in.) Dia. Vert. Hitch** Hitch A B ST HT
#3/32 7/16 0.56 0.49 1.1 2 4 W-2 5/16

#1/8 9/16 1.1 0.98 2.2 3 6 W-2 3/8
3/16 13/16 2.2 1.9 4.3 4 8 W-3 1/2
1/4 1-1/8 3.8 3.3 7.6 5 10 W-4 3/4
5/16 1-3/8 5.9 5.2 12 6 12 W-5 1 # Made with 7 x 19 GAC component rope.
X I P I W RC
3/8 1-11/16 8.5 7.4 17 7 14 W-5 1-1/8 * Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d ratio of 20
7/16 2 11 10 23 8 16 W-6 1-1/4 times the component rope diameter. Rated Capacities
1/2 2-1/4 15 13 30 9 18 W-7 1-3/8 based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or
9/16 2-1/2 19 16 38 10 20 W-7 1-1/2 less than the nominal sling diameter. Rated Capacities
5/8 2-13/16 23 20 46 11 22 W-8 1-3/4 based on design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles less
than 30° shall not be used.
3/4 3-3/8 33 29 66 12 24 W-9 2
7/8 4 45 39 89 14 28 W-10 -
All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye and fitting
1 4-1/2 58 51 116 16 32 W-10 -
dimensions in inches.
915 Nine - part wire rope sling
R AT E D C A PA C I T Y I N TO N S O F 2 , 0 0 0 L B S *
X I P® Basket Hitch and 2-leg Bridle Eye Dimensions Weight
IWRC
Comp. Sling
Rope Body Eye Eye Lbs.
Dia. Dia. Choker Width Length per ft.
(inches) (inches) Vert. Hitch** Vert. 60° 45° 30° (inches) (inches) (approx)
1/4 1 4.3 3.7 8.6 7.4 6.1 4.3 6 12 1

5/16 1-1/4 6.6 5.8 13 12 9.4 6.6 6 12 2
3/8 1-1/2 9.5 8.3 19 16 13 9.5 7-1/2 13 3
7/16 1-3/4 13 11 26 22 18 13 9 18 4
1/2 2 17 15 34 29 24 17 10 20 5
9/16 2-3/16 21 19 42 37 30 21 12 24 6
5/8 2-1/2 26 23 52 45 37 26 12 24 8
3/4 3 37 32 74 64 52 37 15 30 11
7/8 3-1/2 50 44 100 87 71 50 17 34 15
1 4 65 57 130 113 92 65 20 40 20
1-1/8 4-1/2 82 72 164 142 116 82 22 44 25 * Rated Capacities Basket Hitch based on D/d
1-1/4 5 101 88 201 174 142 101 25 50 31 ratio of 25 times the component rope diameter.
1-3/8 5-1/2 121 106 242 210 171 121 27 54 38 Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no
1-1/2 6 144 126 287 249 203 144 30 60 45 larger than natural width or less than the
1-5/8 6-1/2 166 146 333 288 235 166 32 64 53 nominal diameter. Rated Capacities based on
design factor of 5. Horizontal sling angles of
1-3/4 7 193 169 386 334 273 193 35 70 61
less than 30° shall not be used.
1-7/8 7-1/2 219 192 438 380 310 219 37 74 70
** See Choker Hitch Rated Capacity Adjustment
2 8 249 218 499 432 353 249 40 80 80
on page 31. All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs.
2-1/4 9 311 272 622 539 440 311 45 90 101 All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.
2-1/2 10 381 333 761 659 538 381 50 100 125
2-3/4 11 455 398 910 788 643 455 55 110 151
3 12 536 469 1071 928 757 536 60 120 179

3-1/2 14 711 622 1421 1231 1005 711 70 140 244
36
Care, Use and Inspection of Wire Rope on Overhead and Gantry Cranes
ASME B30.2A - 1997 Excerpt sections of rapid deterioration, such as the fol-
lowing:
Section 2-2.4: Rope Inspection, Replacement, and (a) sections in contact with saddles,
Maintenance equalizer sheaves, or other sheaves
where rope travel is limited;
2-2.4.1 Rope Inspection (b) sections of the rope at or near terminal
(a) Frequent Inspection ends where corroded or broken wires
(1) All ropes should be visually inspected by the may protrude;
operator or other designated person at the start (c) sections subject to reverse bends;
of each shift. These visual observations (d) sections of rope that are normally hid-
should be concerned with discovering gross den during visual inspection, such as
damage, such as listed below, that may be a parts passing over sheaves.
hazard. (C) In order to establish data as a basis of judging
(a) distortion of the rope, such as kinking, the proper time for replacement, a continuing
crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, inspection record should be maintained. This
main strand displacement, or core pro- record should cover points of deterioration
trusion listed.
(b) general corrosion
(c) broken or cut strands 2-2.4.2 Rope Replacement
(d) number, distribution, and type of visible (a) No precise rules can be given for determination of
broken wires [see paras. 2-2.4.2(b)(1) the exact time for rope replacement, since many
and (2) for further guidance] variable factors are involved. Once a rope reach-
(2) When such damage is discovered, the rope es any one of the specified removal criteria, it
shall either be removed from service or given may be allowed to operate to the end of the work
an inspection as detailed in (b) below. shift, based on the judgement of a qualified per-
(b) Periodic Inspection son. The rope shall be replaced after that work
(1) The inspection frequency shall be determined shift, at the end of the day, or at the latest time
by a qualified person and shall be based on prior to the equipment being used by the next
such factors as expected rope life, as deter- work shift.
mined by experience on the particular installa- (b) Removal criteria for rope replacement shall be as
tion or similar installations; severity of environ- follows:
ment; percentage of capacity lifts; frequency (1) in running ropes, twelve randomly distributed
rates of operation; and exposure to shock broken wires in one lay or four broken wires in
loads. Inspections need not be at equal calen- one strand in one lay.
dar intervals and should be more frequent as (2) one outer wire broken at the contact point with
the rope approaches the end of its useful life. the core of the rope, which has worked its way
(2) Periodic inspections shall be performed by a out of the rope structure and protrudes or loops
designated person. This inspection shall cover out from the rope structure.
the entire length of rope. The individual outer (3) wear of one-third the original diameter of out-
wires in the strands of the rope shall be v i s i - side individual wires.
ble to this person during the inspection. A n y (4) kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or any other
deterioration resulting in appreciable loss of damage resulting in distortion of the rope struc-
original strength, such as described below, ture.
shall be noted and determination shall be (5) evidence of heat damage from any cause.
made as to whether further use of the rope (6) reductions from nominal diameter greater than
would constitute a hazard. those listed below.
(a) points listed in para. 2-2.4.1(a)
(b) reduction of rope diameter below nom- Maximum Allowable
inal diameter due to loss of core sup- Rope Diameter Reduction From
port, internal or external corrosion, or Nominal Diameter
wear of outside wires Up to 5/16 in. (8mm) 1/64 in. (0.4mm)
(c) severely corroded or broken wires at
Over 5/16 in. to 1/2 in. (13mm) 1/32 in. (0.8mm)
end connections
(d) severely corroded, cracked, bent, Over 1-2 in. to 3/4 in. (19mm) 3/64 in. (1.2mm)
worn, or improperly applied end con-
nections Over 3/4 in. to 1 1/8 in. (29mm) 1/16 in. (1.6mm)
(3) Special care should be taken when inspecting Over 1 1/8 in. to 1 1/2 in. (38mm) 3/32 in. (2.4mm)
37
(C) Broken wire removal criteria cited in this volume 2-2.4.3 Rope Maintenance
apply to wire rope operating on steel sheaves
and drums. The user shall contact the sheave, (A) Rope should be stored to prevent damage or
drum, or crane manufacturer, or a qualified per- deterioration.
son, for broken wire removal criteria for wire (B) Rope shall be unreeled or uncoiled in a manner
ropes operating on sheaves and drums made of to avoid inducing a twist in or kinking of the rope.
material other than steel. (C) Before cutting rope, means shall be used to pre-
(D) Attention shall be given to end connections. vent unlaying of the strands.
Upon development of two broken wires adjacent (D) During installation, care should be observed to
to a socketed end connection, the rope should be avoid dragging the rope in dirt or around objects
resocketed or replaced. Resocketing shall not be that will scrape, nick, crush, or induce sharp
attempted if the resulting rope length will be insuf- bends.
ficient for proper operation. (E) Rope should be maintained in a well-lubricated
(E) Replacement rope and connections shall have a condition. Lubricant applied as part of a mainte-
strength rating at least equal to the rating of the nance program shall be compatible with the orig-
original rope and connections specified by the inal lubricant. Lubricant applied shall be of the
hoist manufacturer. Any deviation from the origi- type that does not hinder visual inspection.
nal size, grade, or construction of the rope shall Those sections of rope that are located over
be specified by a rope manufacturer, the crane or sheaves or otherwise hidden during inspection
hoist manufacturer, or a qualified person. and maintenance procedures require special
attention when the rope is being lubricated. The
object of rope lubrication is to reduce internal fric-
tion and to prevent corrosion.
Core Chain & Cable Lubricant

Core is a penetration chain and cable lubricant. Core with F-11 moly, lubricates and protects
chains, cables and wire rope against friction and high temperature breakdown. It sprays on
as a penetrating foam, then cures to a semi-greasy oil that wraps each strand with a protec-
tive coating.
Core penetrates to displace water. Maximum penetration means complete lubrication and
rust prevention even on idle cables and chains. Cables stay flexible, last longer. Use core on
cranes, derricks, loading equipment, fork lifts and more.
• Penetrates cables, chains and wire ropes

• Protects against friction and wear
• Lubricates hard-to-reach areas
• Keeps cables flexible, reduces wear
• Will not sling off
38
STANDARD AND
EXTRA VALUE
WIRE ROPES
Wireco supplies the following wire ropes as part of their
standard product line. To help you with your wire rope GRADE OF ROPE is usually Improved Plow Steel (IPS) or
selection and ordering is the following basic explanation of Extra Improved Plow Steel (XIP)® which is about 15%
how ropes are made, strength and weight tables, and a stronger than IPS. There are other ropes that are available
brief description of some of the extra value products avail- in other grades and types of steel, but generally IPS and
able. XIP are standard. Ropes may be "Bright"–without special
Call for delivery and specifications on other rope, wire and finish for the wire–or Galvanized.
strand products ... or with any questions.
CORE is the member of a wire rope about which the
strands are laid. It may be fiber, or wire strand, or an inde-
pendent wire rope.
Uses of the Word "Lay."

The word "lay" has three uses in rope making: (1) The
direction strands "lay" in a rope-right or left. (2) The direc-
tion wires "lay" in strands-Regular or Lang. (3) A unit of
length measure, as one "lay." See illustrations below.
Some basics about wire rope.

Four primary factors affect strength of any wire rope, and
must be considered when specifying a rope for an applica-
tion. (1) DIAMETER. (2) TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION. (3)
GRADE OF ROPE. (4) CORE.
In REGULAR LAY, wires in each strand are
DIAMETER must fit the grooves of sheaves and hoisting laid opposite the direction the strand is laid
drums. in the rope—so exposed portions of wires
appear parallel to the axis of the rope.
Regular Lay ropes are more stable, resist-
CONSTRUCTION includes number of strands, number of ant to kinks and crushing than Lang Lay
wires per strand, and the arrangement of the wires in each ropes.
strand.
In LANG LAY, exposed wires appear at an
angle to the axis of the rope. Lang Lay
DESIGN FACTORS ropes are more fatigue resistant and resist
abrasion better than Regular Lay, but have
The nominal (or catalog) strength provided for any wire rope is not
less stability. Lang Lay ropes are used on
the working load for that wire rope. The nominal strength is for a new
applications where the rope is subjected to
and unused wire rope of a specific size, construction and grade and
repeated bending and both ends are
is used in conjunction with a design factor to determine the maximum
attached so that the rope does not rotate.
load allowed on the wire rope. The Design Factor must take into con-
sideration such things as type of service (fast or slow, rough or
smooth, sudden stops and starts, etc.), consequences of failure and
type of equipment.
WARRANTY
For applications where standards or specifications do not state other-
Any warranty, expressed or implied as to quality, performance, or fit-
wise, a design factor of 5 should be used. In certain applications,
ness for use of wire rope products is always premised on the condition
standards and specifications allow design factors of less than 5 to be
that the published strengths apply only to new, unused rope, that the
utilized. Wire rope removal criteria are often more stringent for these
mechanical equipment on which products are used is properly
applications. Other applications, because of the nature of the lift,
designed and maintained, that such products are stored, handled,
(such as nuclear lifts, hot ladle cranes, lifts involving personnel, etc.)
used, and maintained and properly inspected on a regular basis dur-
have requirements for design factors greater than 5. Consult stan-
ing the period of use.
dards and specifications for your specific application to determine the
design factor required.
Seller shall not be liable under any circumstances for consequential or
incidental damages or secondary charges including but not limited to
Tables for wire rope slings show Rated Capacity for new and unused
personal injury, labor costs, a loss of profits resulting from the use of
slings. This is the amount the sling can lift in the specified rigging
said products or from said products being incorporated in or becoming
configuration and normally employs a design factor of 5.
a component of any other product.
39
NOMINAL STRENGTH
AND WEIGHT CHART
FC—Fiber Core
WIRE ROPE
BOLDFACE TYPE—Nominal Strength-Tons (2000 lbs.)
IWRC—Independent Wire Rope Core LIGHTFACE TYPE—Approximate Weight Per Ft.-Pounds
IPS—Improved Plow Steel XIP—Extra Improved Plow Steel
XXIP—Extra Extra Improved Plow Steel
6 x 19 CLASSIFICATION 6 x 37 CLASSIFICATION
15-26 WIRES PER STRAND 27-49 WIRES PER STRAND
XXIP XIP IPS GALV. IPS XIP
DIA IWRC IWRC FC IWRC FC IWRC IWRC
3/16 1.55 1.40 1.50
.059 .059 .065
1/4 3.74 3.40 2.74 2.94 2.47 2.65
.116 .116 .105 .116 .105 .116
5/16 5.80 5.27 4.26 4.58 3.83 4.12
.180 .180 .164 .180 .164 .180
3/8 8.30 7.55 6.10 6.56 5.49 5.90
.260 .260 .236 .260 .236 .260
7/16 11.2 10.2 8.27 8.89 7.44 8.00
.354 .354 .322 .354 .322 .354
1/2 14.6 13.3 10.7 11.5 9.63 10.3
.462 .462 .420 .462 .420 .462
9/16 18.5 16.8 13.5 14.5 12.1 13.0
.585 .585 .532 .585 .532 .585
5/8 22.7 20.6 16.7 17.9 15.0 16.1 21.7
.722 .722 .656 .722 .656 .722 .74
3/4 32.4 29.4 23.8 25.6 21.4 23.0 31.0
1.04 1.04 .945 1.04 .945 1.04 1.06
7/8 43.8 39.8 32.2 34.6 29.0 31.1 41.9
1.42 1.42 1.29 1.42 1.29 1.42 1.46
1 56.9 51.7 41.8 44.9 37.6 40.4 54.4
1.85 1.85 1.68 1.85 1.68 1.85 1.89
1 1/8 71.5 65.0 52.6 56.5 47.3 50.8 68.5
2.34 2.34 2.13 2.34 2.13 2.34 2.39
1 1/4 87.9 79.9 64.6 69.4 58.1 62.5 84.0
2.89 2.89 2.63 2.89 2.63 2.89 2.95
1 3/8 106. 96.0 77.7 83.5 69.9 75.1 101.
3.50 3.50 3.18 3.50 3.18 3.50 3.57
1 1/2 125. 114. 92.0 98.9 82.8 89.0 119.
4.16 4.16 3.78 4.16 3.78 4.16 4.25
1 5/8 146. 132. 107. 115. 96.3 103. 140.
4.88 4.88 4.44 4.88 4.44 4.88 4.99
1 3/4 169. 153. 124. 133. 112. 120. 161.
5.67 5.67 5.15 5.67 5.15 5.67 5.79
1 7/8 192. 174. 141. 152. 127. 137.
6.50 6.50 5.91 6.50 5.91 6.50
2 217. 198. 160. 172. 144. 155.
7.39 7.39 6.72 7.39 6.72 7.39
2 1/8 244. 221. 179. 192. 161. 173.
8.35 8.35 7.59 8.35 7.59 8.35
2 1/4 272. 247. 200. 215. 180. 193.
9.36 9.36 8.51 9.36 8.51 9.36
40
NOMINAL STRENGTH
AND WEIGHT CHART
FC—Fiber Core
WIRE ROPE
BOLDFACE TYPE—Nominal Strength-Tons (2000 lbs.)
IWRC—Independent Wire Rope Core LIGHTFACE TYPE—Approximate Weight Per Ft.-Pounds
IPS—Improved Plow Steel XIP—Extra Improved Plow Steel
10X19* 19X17* FLEX-X 19*

6X7 TUF- 8X19 ROTATION 8X25* ROTATION ROTATION
CLASS KOTE CLASS RESISTANT RESISTWIST RESISTANT RESISTANT FLEX-X 6 FLEX-X 8
IPS XIP IPS XIP

DIA FC IWRC FC IWRC IPS XIP
1/4 2.64 2.35 2.51 2.77 +3.91 3.91
.094 .098 .113 .113 .127 .131
5/16 4.10 3.65 3.90 4.30 +6.06 6.06
.15 .153 .177 .177 .212 .218
3/8 5.86 7.55 5.24 6.63 5.59 6.15 +8.80 8.80
.21 .275 .220 .265 .25 .25 .307 .32
7/16 7.93 10.2 7.09 8.97 7.58 8.33 +11.9 11.9
.29 .375 .300 .360 .35 .35 .418 .41
1/2 10.3 13.3 9.23 13.3 11.6 9.85 10.8 15.3 15.3
.38 .490 .392 .48 .470 .45 .45 .546 .55
9/16 13.0 16.8 11.6 16.8 14.7 12.4 13.6 19.3 19.3
.48 .620 .496 .62 .595 .58 .58 .691 .70
5/8 15.9 20.6 14.3 20.6 18.1 15.3 16.8 22.7 22.7
.59 .765 .612 .76 .735 .71 .71 .853 .86
3/4 22.7 29.4 20.5 29.4 25.9 21.8 24.0 32.4 32.4
.84 1.10 .882 1.10 1.06 1.02 1.02 1.25 1.25
7/8 30.7 39.8 27.7 39.8 35.0 29.5 32.5 43.8 43.8
1.15 1.51 1.20 1.49 1.44 1.39 1.39 1.68 1.67
1 39.7 51.7 36.0 51.7 45.5 38.3 42.2 56.9 56.9
1.50 1.96 1.57 1.96 1.88 1.82 1.82 2.17 2.18
1 1/8 49.8 65.0 45.3 65.0 57.3 48.2 53.1 71.5 71.5
1.90 2.48 1.98 2.47 2.39 2.3 2.3 2.75 2.71
1 1/4 61.0 79.9 55.7 79.9 70.5 59.2 65.1 87.9 87.9
2.34 3.06 2.45 3.05 2.94 2.83 2.83 3.45 3.43
1 3/8 73.1 96.0 67.1 96.0 84.9 71.3 78.4 106. 106.
2.84 3.71 2.96 3.69 3.56 3.43 3.43 4.33 4.25
1 1/2 86.2 114. 794 114. 100. 84.4 92.8 125. 125. 125.
3.38 4.41 3.53 4.39 4.24 4.08 4.08 5.11 5.01 4.57
1 5/8 146.
5.37
1 3/4 169.
6.23
1 7/8 192.
7.15
2 217.
8.13
2 1/8 244.
9.18
2 1/4 272.
10.3
* These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use, the strength of
these ropes will be reduced if one end is free to rotate.
+ These sizes normally made in 19 x 7 construction. All other sizes normally made in 19 x 19 construction
41
Rotation-resistant ropes.
Rotation-resistant ropes can frequently provide the best superior fatigue resistance. These factors combine to
and most economical service in specific applications give you the maximum service life when you have long
when you choose, handle and use them block falls or load control is critical.
properly. Unlike other rotation-resistant ropes,
Contra-helically laid, rotation-resistant swivels can be used in your system with
ropes are different from standard ropes Flex-X 35.
because they're designed to reduce
rope torque. Modes of failure and wear Flex-X® 19.
for rotation-resistant ropes can differ
from those for standard rope Flex-X 19, a
constructions. The very nature of these Category 2
ropes requires special handling, rotation-resistant
selection and usage not encountered rope, is made from
with standard constructions. They are 19 strands. Six
susceptible to kinking, crushing and strands are laid
unbalancing in the form of "core pops" around a core
and "birdcages:" Use extreme care to Flex-X 19
strand in one
avoid operational practices that can direction, and then 12 strands are laid around this first
possibly lead to these conditions. operation in the opposite direction. Because of its tightly
There are different types of rotation-resistant ropes, compacted smooth design, Flex-X 19 offers more
categorized by their resistance to rotation. Category 1 crushing resistance than standard 19x7 rope, higher
rotation-resistant rope has at least 15 outer strands, has strength-to-diameter, resistance to bending fatigue,
three layers of strands (over a center) and has little or exceptional stability, reduced wear to sheaves and
no tendency to rotate, or, if guided, transmits little or no drums, and improved handling, operating and spooling
torque. Category 2 rotation-resistant rope has 10 or more characteristics.
outer strands, has two or more layers of strands (over Flex-X 19 has also demonstrated greater fatigue
a center) and has a significant resistance to rotation. resistance to substantially cut rope expense and extend
Category 3 rotation-resistant rope has no more than 9 service life. It's ideal for multi-part hoist lines wherever
outer strands, has two layers of strands (over a center) you encounter spooling problems, drum crushing, block
and has limited resistance to rotation. For best twisting or have fast line speeds.
performance, Category 2 and 3 rotation resistant ropes
should not be used with a swivel. Category 1 rotation-
resistant rope may be used with a swivel. 19 x 7 and 8 x 25 Resistwist® rope.
Because rotation-resistant ropes are special, there
are separate design, maintenance, inspection and In an application where a single-part
removal criteria established for them in many industry hoist rope is used to lift a free load
regulations and standards. Rotation-resistant ropes - or where rotation-resistant
must be replaced when you see two randomly distributed properties are essential for rope
crown wire breaks in six rope diameters - or four randomly performance - the 19x7 can be
distributed crown wire breaks in 30 rope diameters. If used. Its Category 2 rotation-
any significant reduction in diameter is found in a short resistant characteristic is achieved
length of a rotation-resistant rope, the rope needs to be by laying six strands around a core 19 x 17
replaced. Rotation-resistant ropes must be used with strand in one direction, then laying
a minimum design factor of 5.0. 12 strands around the first operation in the opposite
direction. When the rope is in
tension, opposing rotational forces
Flex-X® 35. are created between the inner and
outer layers.
Flex-X 35, a Category 1 rotation- In a multi-part wire rope system
resistant rope, features a unique where the blocks have a tendency
design that minimizes the torque to twist - but doesn't require the
and rotation of the rope at normal degree of rotation-resistant
load ranges of zero to 20% of the 8 x 25FW
Flex-X 35 properties found in a 19x7 rope - the
rope's minimum breaking force 8x25 Resistwist rope has found successful application.
(MBF). In addition, Flex-X 35 is engineered to give you It is a Category 3 rotation-resistant rope.
maximum strength per diameter while also achieving
42
Premium value ropes.
Flex-X® 6 wire ropes.
Most applications for wire rope are extremely demanding. While swaged ropes may develop internal broken wires
Wire rope must resist crushing, bending fatigue and before they do externally, Flex-X 9's design minimizes
abrasion. For example, clamshell internal stresses, making external wire breaks more likely
closing lines must resist bending to develop first.
fatigue and boom hoists are
subject to pressures that cause TUF-KOTE®/PFV® wire ropes.
crushing. Overhead hoists test the
stability and strength of a wire TUF-KOTE/PFV, the plastic-impregnated wire rope,
rope. All drum-related applications has proven in many applications to give you longer
demand a rope that will spool and service life and cleaner operation than conventional
Flex-X 6
operate smoothly and dependably. wire ropes. On the inside, you'll find our top-of-the-line
Flex-X 6 users receive superior performance and wire rope that effectively withstands the tough pressures
increased service life in many applications compared of your demanding jobs. On the outside, you'll see a
to the ropes they had previously employed. When specially engineered polymer plastic designed to
compared to conventional 6 strand ropes, Flex-X 6 overcome even harsher conditions. This polymer is
ropes provide greater surface area and more steel per applied at high pressure to force the material into the
given diameter, which increases rope stability and rope, filling the valleys of the strands. TUF-KOTE/PFV
strength, too. This results in longer service life and less cushions the strands, distributes internal stresses, keeps
sheave and drum wear. in wire rope lubricant and keeps out dirt and debris.
TUF-KOTE/PFV doesn't melt or soften from the
Flex-X vs. standard 6 x 26 WS. heat of your normal operating temperatures. It's also
virtually unaffected by sunlight and cold weather. The
Drum scrubbing result is longer service life from your wire rope.
between the lead line TUF-KOTE/PFV also helps shed water and dirt,
and the previous wrap giving you a clean, smooth surface to make it easy to
is reduced. The smooth pass over sheaves and onto drums. This smooth surface
contact creates less works to clean and polish as it extends the service life
interference, less metal of your sheaves and drums. That reduces your cleanup
loss and wire requirements and your maintenance costs.
deformation. (right)
The increased
surface area of Flex-X
can be seen in the comparison of the contact points of
a standard 6 x 26 WS (below left) and Flex-X (below
right).
With one strand and part of the polymer plastic removed,

you can see how deep the polymer penetrates into the
rope. You can also see how the polymer gives you uniform
and continuous support for all strands throughout the
length of the rope.
WRCA offers many other types of wire rope for tough

Flex-X® 9 wire ropes. applications. Contact LAMCO for more information on
the following WRCA products:
Designed to satisfy drum crushing challenges, Flex-X
9 features compacted strands and swaging for extra drum • 7-Flex® wire ropes • TUF-MAX® shovel ropes
crushing resistance and increased stability. Its high-
density strands deliver extra strength, surprising • Tuffy® 8 Hoist & Drag ropes
bendability and a stubborn resistance to abrasion. In
addition, the high-density, compacted strands minimize
nicking at strand-to-strand contact points. Contact LAMCO for more details
And Flex-X 9 makes inspection easier for you. 309-764-7400 • 800-447-1885
43
Specialty Small Ropes
This category includes wire rope sizes as small as 1/32” in diameter. They’re used in a vari-
ety of applications, including control cables, window and door closures, different kinds of
remote control systems, boat rigging and many others. They can be made of galvanized or
stainless steel aircraft wire.
These ropes are produced for the most common applications in the market. Utility grade is
made to RR-W-410. These cables have historically been called “aircraft” cable. Since most
applications do not require that designation, we are changing the name to “utility” cable. We
can provide these ropes to MIL-DTL-83420 “aircraft” specifications on request. They require
special lubrication, internal marking and fatigue testing.
GALVANIZED OR STAINLESS STEEL

7 x 19 APPROXIMATE NOMINAL
DIAMETER WEIGHT STRENGTH IN POUNDS
IN INCHES PER 100 FEET
IN POUNDS GALVANIZED STAINLESS
1/16 .75 480 480

3/32 1.71 1,000 920
7/64 2.21 1,400 1,260
1/8 2.91 2,000 1,760

5/32 4.51 2,800 2,400
3/16 6.51 4,200 3,700
7/32 8.61 5,600 5,000

1/4 11.01 7,000 6,400
9/32 13.91 8,000 7,800
5/16 17.31 9,800 9,000

11/32 20.71 12,500 —
3/8 24.31 14,400 12,000
GALVANIZED, TINNED, OR STAINLESS STEEL

APPROXIMATE NOMINAL
DIAMETER WEIGHT STRENGTH IN POUNDS
IN INCHES PER 100 FEET 7x7
GALVANIZED STAINLESS
IN POUNDS
1/32 * .16 110 110
3/64 .42 270 270
1/16 .75 480 480
5/64 1.1 650 650

3/32 1.6 920 920
7/64 2.2 1,260 1,260
1/8 2.8 1,700 1,700

5/32 4.3 2,600 2,400
3/16 6.2 3,700 3,700
7/32 8.3 4,800 4,800

1/4 10.6 6,100 6,100
9/32 13.4 7,600 7,600
5/16 16.7 9,200 9,000

3/8 23.6 13,100 12,000
* 1/32 is made in 3 x 7 construction
44
Mobile Crane Pendants - Mechanically Swaged

R AT E D
C A PA C I T Y Swaged Socket Assemblies
I N TO N S O F
2,000 LBS*
Rope
Dia.
(inches) XIP® XXIP®
1/4 0.68 0.74

5/16 1.1 1.2
3/8 1.5 1.7
6 x 19 and 6 x 36 XIP IWRC

7/16 2.0 2.2
1/2 2.7 2.9
9/16 3.4 3.7
5/8 4.1 4.5

3/4 5.9 6.5
7/8 8.0 8.8
1 10 11
1-1/8 13 14
1-1/4 16 18
1-3/8 19 21
1-1/2 23 25
1-3/4 31 34
2 40 43
* 2-1/4 49 54
* 2-1/2 60 66
Pin Dia.
E * These sockets are not interchangeable

with zinc-poured sockets.
All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs.
All eye and fitting dimensions in inches.
Open Swaged Socket Closed Swaged Socket
As Ls
As Ls
Max. Approx.
Max. Approx.
After After
After After
Rope Swage Swage
Rope Swage Swage
Dia. C D E F Pin Dia. Length
Dia. C D E Dia. Length
1/4 .69 .38 1.50 1.38 .69 .46 4.25
1/4 1.38 .75 .50 .46 3.75
5/16 .81 .47 1.75 1.62 .81 .71 5.50
5/16 1.62 .88 .67 .71 4.75
3/8 .81 .47 1.75 1.62 .81 .71 5.50
3/8 1.62 .88 .67 .71 4.75
7/16 1.00 .56 2.00 2.00 1.00 .91 7.00
7/16 2.00 1.06 .86 .91 6.00
1/2 1.00 .56 2.00 2.00 1.00 .91 7.00
1/2 2.00 1.06 .86 .91 6.00
9/16 1.25 .68 2.25 2.38 1.19 1.16 8.50
9/16 2.38 1.25 1.13 1.16 7.75
5/8 1.25 .68 2.25 2.38 1.19 1.16 8.50
5/8 2.38 1.25 1.13 1.16 7.75
3/4 1.50 .78 2.75 2.75 1.38 1.42 10.50
3/4 2.88 1.44 1.31 1.42 9.25
7/8 1.75 .94 3.25 3.13 1.62 1.55 12.25
7/8 3.12 1.69 1.50 1.55 10.75
1 2.00 1.06 3.75 3.69 2.00 1.80 14.00
1 3.63 2.06 1.75 1.80 12.25
1-1/8 2.25 1.19 4.25 4.06 2.25 2.05 15.75
1-1/8 4.00 2.31 2.00 2.05 13.50
1-1/4 2.50 1.22 4.75 4.50 2.50 2.30 17.25
1-1/4 4.50 2.56 2.25 2.30 15.25
1-3/8 2.50 1.38 5.25 5.00 2.50 2.56 19.00
1-3/8 5.00 2.56 2.25 2.56 16.75
1-1/2 3.00 1.69 5.75 5.50 2.75 2.81 20.75
1-1/2 5.50 2.81 2.50 2.81 18.00
1-3/4 3.50 2.11 6.75 6.69 3.50 3.06 24.25
1-3/4 6.25 3.56 3.00 3.06 21.25
2 4.00 2.37 8.00 8.00 3.75 3.56 28.25
2 7.25 3.81 3.25 3.56 24.25
45
HOW TO ORDER—
When ordering, please consider the following:
• The number of completed assemblies required.
• Diameter of the wire rope.
• Wire rope classification or construction.
• Rope material.
• Rated capacity required.
• Length as described by reference points
• Fitting material required.
• For threaded fittings, specify the type, length and hand of
thread.
• For terminals such as forks and eyes, please specify how
they should be positioned relative to each other.
How to measure reference points for specifying your
assemblies.
Here are several examples of various assemblies. The dotted
vertical lines indicate the reference points. Please specify
these reference points when you order. If you need a cus-
tomized assembly not shown here, please call us and we'll
supply what you need.
Tuf-Grip
WRCA
46
FIELD INSTALLED WIRE ROPE FITTINGS
QUICK AND EASY VERSATILE
• No special tools required for installation • Reusable components
• No heat, chemicals, or pressure involved in assembly • Various platings and finishes available
• On-site assembly can be accomplished in minutes • Large variety of designs
• Custom designs available
• For ropes from 1/16 to 1-1/2 inches in diameter
47
Dimensions in inches
48
49
WIRE ROPE PLUGS
50
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
51
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
52
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
53
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
54
55
THIMBLES
Slip-Thru Thimble
NEWCO SLIP-THRU THIMBLES are designed to allow passage
of an identical thimble through its eye. This is a necessity when
a regular sling is used as a choker sling. SLIP-THRU THIMBLES
also prevent the eye of the sling from mashing together and the
top of the eye wearing excessively. The generous inside dimensions
allow the thimbles to fit large crane hooks. Rope retention ears
are tapered so they can be bent or peened over wire rope.
DIMENSIONS & DATA

Newco SLING SIZE DIMENSIONS WT.
No. SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. A B C D E F G LBS.
W-2 5/16 - 3/8 3/32 - 1/8 3/32 - 1/8 2 1/8 4 1/8 7/16 13/16 9/16 3 1/4 5 1/4 1.3
W-3 1/2 - 9/16 3/16 3/16 2 3/8 4 3/8 5/8 1 5/8 4 6 1.5
W-4 5/8 - 3/4 1/4 1/4 - 5/16 3 3/8 6 5/8 13/16 1 5/16 5/8 5 3/8 8 1/2 3.4
W-5 7/8 - 1 5/16 3/8 3 3/4 7 1/8 1 1/8 1 5/8 7/8 6 1/4 9 3/8 5.5
W-6 1 1/8 - 1 1/4 3/8 7/16 4 3/8 8 3/8 1 3/8 1 7/8 1 7 1/8 11 8.6
W-7 1 3/8 - 1 1/2 7/16-1/2 1/2 5 9 1/2 1 5/8 2 1/8 1 1/4 8 1/8 12 1/2 10
W-8 1 5/8 - 1 3/4 9/16 5/8 6 3/4 11 3/4 1 13/16 2 9/16 1 7/16 9 3/8 14 3/4 17.6
W-9 1 7/8 - 2 5/8 3/4 8 14 1/2 2 1/8 3 1/4 1 7/8 13 19 1/4 53
W-10 2 1/8 - 2 1/4 3/4 7/8 - 1 8 1/2 15 1/2 2 1/2 3 3/4 2 13 20 3/8 65
W-11 2 1/2 - 3 7/8-1 1 1/8 9 18 1/2 3 3/16 4 11/16 2 1/2 15 3/4 24 3/4 126
Crescent Thimble
NEWCO CRESCENT THIMBLES are designed to protect
the bearing surface of a loop where a large dimension loop
is necessary. The ears are tapered so that they can be bent
or peened over wire rope. Standard-Laid Rope Size 3/8”
to 3”.
DIMENSIONS & DATA

Newco ROPE SIZE 8 PTS. BRAID 6 PTS. BRAID APPROX.
A B C D E F G H
No. SINGLE ROPE DIA. ROPE DIA. WT. LBS.
6C 3/8-7/16 3/32-1/8 1/8 2 1 27/32 15/32 2 1/16 3/8 1/2 3/8 .50
8C 1/2-9/16 3/16 3/16 2 1/4 1 1/8 1 5/8 2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 .75
9C 5/8 1/4 2 3/4 1 3/8 1 5/32 23/32 3 19/32 9/16 19/32 1.2
10C 3/4 1/4 5/16 3 1/4 1 5/8 1 5/16 13/16 3 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 2.0
14C 7/8 4 1/2 2 1/4 1 7/16 15/16 4 5/16 3/4 11/16 3/4 3.3
16C 1 5/16 3/8 4 1/2 2 1/4 1 9/16 1 1/16 4 19/32 13/16 3/4 7/8 3.75
18C 1 1/8 3/8 7/16 4 7/8 2 7/16 1 13/16 1 1/4 5 1/32 7/8 7/8 1 5.0
20C 1 1/4 7/16 1/2 5 1/2 2 3/4 2 1/16 1 7/16 5 3/4 15/16 15/16 1 1/8 6.75
22C 1 3/8-1 1/2 1/2 9/16 6 3 2 1/4 1 5/8 6 1/4 1 1/16 1 1/8 1 3/16 8.0
24C 1 5/8 9/16 5/8 6 1/2 3 1/4 2 1/2 1 3/4 6 11/16 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/4 12.0
28C 1 3/4-1 7/8 7 3 1/2 2 15/16 1 15/16 7 3/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2 16.6
32C 2 5/8 3/4 7 3 1/2 3 3/16 2 3/16 7 13/16 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 5/8 21.8
40C 2 1/4-2 1/2 3/4-7/8 1 8 1/2 4 1/4 4 1/8 2 7/8 9 5/8 1 5/8 1 7/8 2 39.0
48C 2 3/4-3 1 1 1/8 10 5 4 7/8 3 3/8 11 1/4 1 3/4 2 1/4 2 1/2 67.0
56
Slip- On Thimble
Flattening or pulling together of the eyes under heavy loads is
eliminated as is severe wear at the top of the eye. It is
particularly recommended to prevent abrasion when a choker sling
is used by slipping one eye through another. Easily installed.
DIMENSIONS & DATA (in.)

THIMBLE ROPE WT.
A B C D E F G
SIZE SIZE LBS.
3/8 3/8 3 2 27/32 1 7/16 7/16 13/16 7/16 5/8 0.6
1/2 1/2 3 1/2 3 3/8 1 5/8 9/16 1 1/16 19/32 3/4 1.0
5/8 5/8 3 3/4 3 13/16 1 3/4 11/16 1 3/16 3/4 15/16 1.5
3/4 3/4 4 1/8 4 3/16 1 7/8 13/16 1 5/16 7/8 1 1/16 2.0
7/8 7/8 4 3/4 4 13/16 2 1/8 15/16 1 9/16 1 1/16 1 1/4 3.2
1 1 5 7/16 5 3/8 2 3/8 1 1/8 1 13/16 1 3/16 1 3/8 4.7
Standard Choker Hooks

NEWCO STANDARD CHOKER HOOKS are
always clean and smooth castings to avoid
cutting and chafing of valuable wire rope
slings. NEWCO STANDARD CHOKER
HOOKS can be attached to the end of a sling
instead of the
main body. This
feature allows the
main part of the
sling to be free of
DIMENSIONS & DATA

PART ROPE WT.
A B C D E F G H J K W W.L.L.
NO. SIZE LBS.
302 3/8-1/2 2 3/8 3 3/4 2 1/8 2 1/4 5/8 1/2 7/8 1 13/16 2 1/8 2 5/8 2 1/4 3400
303 5/8 3 7/8 5 3/4 2 5/8 2 3/4 13/16 9/16 7/8 1 1/8 15/16 2 1/4 3 4 1/4 5100
304 3/4 4 7/8 6 3/4 2 5/8 3 15/16 11/16 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/16 3 3 1/2 5 3/8 8000
305 7/8 5 3/8 7 1/2 3 1/8 3 3/8 1 13/16 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 1/4 3 1/4 4 7 1/2 10000
306 1 5 5/8 8 3/8 3 1/2 3 7/8 1 1/8 7/8 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 3 1/2 4 1/8 12 15000
57
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
192-193)
58
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
59
60
Model PC – “Tea Cup” Pipe Carrier
FEATURES:
• An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes.
• The Caldwell “Tea Cup” Carrier will save you time and money.
• Three sizes available, to handle from 3/4” to 1-1/2” cable, and lift
up to 15 tons.
• Optional “Spoon” handle allows the “Tea Cup” to be guided into
small diameter pipes.
• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20 and B30.9.
SPECIFICATIONS - Model PC
Rated Dimensions in Inches
Model Capacity WT.
Number Tons A B C D E F G (lbs)
PC-3/4* 6.6 5 9/16 2 2 1/8 1 1/8 4 11/16 1 7/8 1 1/8 9

PC-1 13 6 2 1/2 2 5/8 1 3/8 5 5/8 2 1 3/8 12
PC-1 1/2 18 8 3 3 1/4 1 5/8 7 5/8 3 1 5/8 22
*Has standard “lip” for use with the “Spoon Handle”.
Tea Cup Lifting Sling Option - LS

SPECIFICATIONS - Model LS
For “Spoon”
Rated Sling Standard After Swage
handle please Use Model Capacity Dia. Length Dim. (in) WT.
order SH-3/4 With Number Tons (in) (ft) A B (lbs)
LS-3/4 4.9 3/4 5 3.25 1.55 9

PC-3/4
LS-7/8 6.6 7/8 5 3.86 1.80 14
LS-1 8.5 1 5 4.36 2.05 19
PC-1 LS-1 1/8 10 1 1/8 5 4.81 2.30 26
LS-1 1/4 13 1 1/4 5 5.42 2.56 33
PC-3/4 only, must PC-1 1/2 LS-1 1/2 18 1 1/2 5 6.52 3.00 52
Lip have lip on handle.
Operation
1. Drop pipe carrier 2. Align and insert “tea 3. Lift pipe

lifting sling through cup” pipe carrier
hole in pipe. into lifting sling.
61
LAMCO
62
63
64
65
Johnson Crane Blocks - Quick Reeve
STANDARD FEATURES
• Quick release, zinc plated, rope retention pin
meets OSHA requirements for rope retention.
Cannot be completely removed from block to
avoid pin loss.
• Johnson J-Latch™ heavy duty, steel, lockable,
spring loaded latch meets OSHA personnel lifting
requirements. (P. 195)
• The Johnson J-Latch™ provides a fast hook
deformation inspection point.
• Available tonnage capacities from 5-300 tons.
Larger capacities available upon request.
• Quick Reeve™ upright design rests on its own
hook for a stable base while reeving.
• No bulky, drop down, trap door to handle or
damage.
• Wire rope end fitting will pass through block with
out removal from wire rope.
Johnson WIRE ROPE SHEAVES

Available in sizes ranging
from 3” to 108”, and over 250
standard models, Johnson
STANDARD FEATURES
Wire Rope Sheaves
• 3 through 108 inch sheave diameters
are industry proven
• 1/4 through 3 inch wire rope sizes
with over
• 4 to 1 design factor
100,000 in use.
• Cast iron, ductile iron, cast steel, ForgeFab
Cost efficient
steel types
custom designs
are available
with no up front
tooling or
pattern charges
and no premium
for small order OPTIONAL FEATURES
quantities. (Price on Application)
16” to 108” • Custom designs to customer shaft, bearing
O.D. sheaves have mounting, hub, sheave O.D. or wire rope size
flame-hardened, requirement
precision grooves • Electroplate inorganic zinc compound and other
for slow, even wear corrosion resistant coatings available
and long rope life. • Hub-located grease fittings
(Less than 16” O.D. flame-hardened • Modifications as required to API and other applicable
upon request.) The industry standards
integrity of Johnson’s single • Special shafts
disc forged steel construction • AISE No. 6 specifications
provides a sheave with • Cold weather properties
superior strength.
66
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
(P. 192)
(P. 194)
67
(P. 192)
† US-422T Terminator Style
68
McKissick sheaves come in a variety of sizes to suit your specific applications. For applications that require unique specifications
Crosby can make minor modifications to many of the sheaves at a reasonable charge. Crosby can also custom design and manu-
facture sheaves to your exact requirements. For special requirements of custom designed sheaves, furnish the following important
information:
(A) How to check for worn sheaves
(C) (B)
(D)
150°
A B C
Using a gauge, A is correct.

B is too tight and C is too loose.
For more information contact LAMCO
69
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
70
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800 CHAIN SLINGS
A higher strength heat treated alloy steel chain, CM First symbol (basic type):
grade 80 Herc-Alloy 800 chain is primarily used as a S — Single chain sling.
sling component for overhead lifting, but can be used in C — Single choker chain sling with a standard end link
rigging and tie down applications where a lighter weight on each end, no hooks.
high strength chain is desirable. Recommended for over- D — Double branch chain sling.
head lifting by NACM, ANSI, & OSHA. T — Triple branch chain sling.
CM grade 80 Herc-Alloy 800 chain slings and attach- Q — Quadruple branch chain sling.
ments are manufactured from special analysis alloy Second symbol (type of master link or end link):
steel, engineered for a superior combination of O — Oblong master link of standard dimensions.
strength, lightness and durability. P — Pear shaped master link (available on request,
All Herc-Alloy 800 chain and attachments are black not
finish and/or color coded orange for easy, permanent a standard item).
identification. The chain is embossed with the grade Third symbol (type of hook):
(HA-800) and trace code.
S — Sling hook F — Foundry hook
Chain slings are used primarily for overhead lifting and G — Grab hook L — Latchlok
are generally used in conjunction with a crane or some
type of lifting device. Standard sling configurations con- Sling tags are coded with numerals 1 through 4 to reflect
sist of chain branches which are affixed on one end number of branches in sling. Additional coding is defined
to a master link or ring with some type of attachment, as follows:
usually a hook, affixed to the opposite end. AS — Adjustable single SB — Single basket
ES — Endless single ED — Endless double
SAL — Single adjustable loop DAL — Double
Types of chain slings adjustable
In describing the type, the following symbols should be AD — Adjustable double loop
used. If attachments are other than standard, give DB — Double basket
detailed specifications.
CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain sizes and working load limits

Nominal
dimensions (inch-
Approx. Approx. Foot Drum
es)
Chain size no. weight Feet
Inside Inside links per 100 ft. Product UPC Product UPC per
( in.) (mm) length width per ft. (lbs.) code 43927- code 43927- drum
7/32 15.5 1.671 1.296 17 .9 11,44.7 607020 20038 677010 20040 800
9/32 17.0 1.868 1.395 13.8 11,74.2 607028 20246 677011 20254 500
5/16 18.0 1.05 1.4540 11.4100 ,1..90.6 607031 20551 — — —
3/8 10.0 1.222 1.572 19.8 1,145.9 607037 20717 677013 20725 500
1/2 13.0 1.404 1.720 18.5 1,257.7 607050 21038 677015 21045 300
5/8 16.0 1.733 1.854 16.9 1,387.3 607062 21271 677016 21279 200
3/4 20.0 2.160 1.052 15.5 1,622.0 607075 21437 677017 21441 100
7/8 22.0 2.250 1.137 15.3 1,776.4 607087 21551 677018 21554 100
1 26.0 2.664 1.348 14.5 1,995.4 607101 21626 677019 21630 100
11/4 32.0 3.250 1.656 13 .7 1,570.9 607128 21692 677070 21695 190
Working load limits (lbs.)

Chain size Single Double Triple & quad
( in.) (mm) 90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°
7/32 15.5 12,100 113,600 113,000 12,100 115,450 114,450 113,150
9/32 17.0 13,500 116,100 114,900 13,500 119,100 117,400 115,200
5/16 18.00 04,500 117,800 116,300 14,500 111,700 119,450 116,750
3/8 10.0 17,100 112,300 110,000 17,100 118,400 115,100 110,600
1/2 13.0 12,000 120,800 117,000 12,000 131,200 125,500 118,000
5/8 16.0 18,100 131,300 125,600 18,100 147,000 138,400 127,100
3/4 20.0 28,300 149,000 140,000 28,300 173,500 160,000 142,400
7/8 22.0 34,200 159,200 148,400 34,200 188,900 172,500 151,300
1 26.0 47,700 182,600 167,400 47,700 123,900 101,200 171,500
11/4 32.0 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300 187,800 153,400 108,400
MADE IN U.S.A.
72
GRADE
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY
80 HERC-ALLOY 800 CHAIN SLINGS
800®_—WELDED CHAIN SLINGS
How to select and order the proper chain sling

1. Determine the weight and configuration of the load(s) If chain slings are to be used in pairs and are to be
to be lifted. matched for reach, please indicate when ordering.
2. Determine the type of chain sling required according to 5. Be sure to specify type, size
weight and configuration. and reach when ordering chain
3. Determine the size of the body chain according to slings. For specifications on
the working load limits. Be sure to take into considera- additional hooks, attachments
tion the effect of the required angle. and accessories, see the follow-
ing pages.
*Working load limit: The working load limit is the maxi-
mum load in pounds which should ever be applied 6. Product UPC code represents
to chain, even when chain is new, and when load is the last five digits of the com-
uniformly applied in direct tension to a straight length plete UPC code. Each product
of chain. UPC code must be preceded by
CM Identification No. 43927 in
4. Determine the reach required to give the desired
order to obtain complete UPC
angle. The reach is measured from the upper bearing
code number. Example: 43927-
surface of the master link to the bearing surface of the
00000.
lower attachment.
CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain and attachments conversion table

Chain size Hook size designation and markings
Fraction (in.) Decimal (in.) Metric (mm) Sling Grab Foundry Latchlok
7/32 1.218 15.5 HA22 10M — —
9/32 1.281 17.0 HA220 HA1 HA498 9/32
3/8 1.394 10.0 HA250 HA3 HA499 3/8
1/2 1.512 13.0 HA280 HA5 HA500 1/2
5/8 1.630 16.0 HA290 HA6 HA501 5/8
3/4 1.787 20.0 HA300 HA7 HA502 3/4
7/8 1.875 22.0 HA320 HA8 HA503 —

1 1.024 26.0 HA330 HA9 HA504 —
11/4 1.260 32.0 HA350 HA11 HA505 —
Care, use and inspection • Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering.
• Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads.
The life and strength of CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain slings • Use pads around sharp corners.
depend on proper inspection, maintenance and use. For • Do not drop load on chains.
additional information, refer to ANSI B30.9 and OSHA
• Match the size and working load limit of attachments
1910.184.
such as hooks or rings to the size and working load
Care limit of the chain.
Chain requires careful storage and regular maintenance. • For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain and attach-
• Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place. ments.
• To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage. Inspection
• Do not heat CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain; this will alter its It is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and
thermal treatment. to keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow this
• Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact guide for such an inspection system.
LAMCO for special requirements. • Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/non-
caustic solvent so that marks, nicks, wear and other
Use
defects are visible.
To protect both operators and materials, observe these
• Inspect each link for these conditions:
precautions when using chain slings:
• Twists or bends.
• Before use, inspect chain and attachments following
the instructions under “Inspection” below. • Nicks or gouges.
• Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors • Excessive wear at bearing points.
listed here can reduce the load the chain will hold: • Stretch.
• Acceleration in rate of load application—can produce • Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links or
dangerous overloading. attachments, especially spread in throat opening of
• Variation in the angle of the load to the sling—as hooks.
the angle decreases, the working load of the sling • Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment showing
will increase. any of the conditions listed here to indicate rejection;
• Twisting, knotting or kinking— subjects links to unusu- remove from service until properly repaired.
al loading, decreasing the working load of the sling.
• Use for purposes other than those for which slings
are intended— can reduce the working load of the
sling.
* WARNING
• Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks. • Do not exceed working load limit.
• Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not support • Use only alloy chain and attach-
load. ments for overhead lifting.
73
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800 CHAIN SLINGS
Care, use and inspection (continued)
Wear allowances of CM Herc-Alloy 800 chain Use of chain under extreme temperature conditions
Measure cross section at When the chain itself is subjected to temperatures shown
link ends to determine wear. here, working load limits should be reduced as indicated.
If chain is worn to less than Permanent
the minimum allowable Temperature Working load limit reduction in
thickness, remove from of chain (°F) while at temperature1 working load limit2
service.
<-40 not recommended none
-40 to 400 100% none
Chain size Minimum allowable thickness (T) >400 to 600 0.9 none
Inches mm Inches mm >600 to 750 75% 10%
7/32 15.5 0.185 14.7 >750 not recommended Contact LAMCO
9/32 17.0 0.239 16.1 1 While chain is at temperature shown in first column.
2 When chain is used at room temperature after having been
3/8 10.0 0.335 18.5 subjected to temperatures shown in first column.
1/2 13.0 0.435 11.1
NOTE: HAMMERLOK COUPLING LINKS MUST NOT BE
5/8 16.0 0.536 13.6 SUBJECTED TO TEMPERATURES EXCEEDING 300o F.
3/4 20.0 0.669 17.0
7/8 22.0 0.744 18.9 Identification
The identification tag found on the master coupling link
1 26.0 0.870 22.1
of each chain sling contains this information:
11/4 32.0 1.071 27.2 • Grade • Size • Reach
Note: For sizes not listed, the Minimum Allowable Thickness • Type • Serial number
can be calculated as 85% of the original material diameter.
• Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift)
CM single chain slings - Grade 80
Product code
Hooks
Working
Chain load Oblong Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle
size limit master coupling Cradle Clevlok Grab Sling Foundry
(in.) (lbs.)* link link Grab sling** Latchlok (eye) (eye)** (eye)
7/32 82,100 554931 664220 — — — 559318 458544 —
9/32 83,500 554932 664228 659222 658338 674514 559325 458722 474498
3/8 87,100 554935 664241 659225 658339 674518 559337 458725 474499
1/2 12,000 554938 664250 659228 658340 674524 559350 458728 474500
5/8 18,100 554938 664262 659229 658341 674530 559362 458729 474501
3/4 28,300 554940 664275 659430 658342 674530 559575 458730 474502
7/8 34,200 554943 664287 — — — 559387 458732 474503
1 47,700 554946 664300 — — — 559100 458733 474504
11/4 72,300 554949 664325 — — — 559124 458735 474505
**Latch is available as an option. See page 87.
* WARNING
• Do not exceed working load limit.
• Use only alloy chain and attach-
ments for overhead lifting.
74
CM double chain slings - Grade 80
Product code
Hooks
Chain Working load limit (lbs.)* Oblong Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle
size master coupling Cradle Clevlok Grab Sling Foundry
(in.) 60° 45° 30° link link Grab sling** Latchlok (eye) (eye)** (eye)
7/32 113,600 113,000 12,100 554931 664220 — — — 559318 458544 —
9/32 116,100 114,900 13,500 554932 664228 659222 658338 674514 559325 458722 474498
3/8 112,300 110,000 17,100 554935 664241 659225 658339 674518 559337 458725 474499
1/2 120,800 117,000 12,000 554938 664250 659228 658340 674524 559350 458728 474500
5/8 131,300 125,600 18,100 554940 664262 659229 658341 674530 559362 458729 474501
3/4 149,000 140,000 28,300 554943 664275 659430 658342 674530 559575 458730 474502
7/8 159,200 148,400 34,200 554946 664287 — — — 559387 458732 474503
1 182,600 167,400 47,700 554949 664300 — — — 559100 458733 474504
11/4 125,200 102,200 72,300 554951 664325 — — — 559124 458735 474505
CM triple & quad chain slings - Grade 80
Product code
Hooks
Oblong
Chain Working load limit (lbs.)* master Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle
size link sub- coupling Cradle Clevlok Grab Sling Foundry
(in.) 60° 45° 30° assembly link Grab sling** Latchlok (eye) (eye)** (eye)
7/32 115,450 114,450 113,150 554974 664220 — — — 559318 458544 —
9/32 119,100 117,400 115,200 554975 664228 659222 658338 674514 559325 458722 474498
3/8 118,400 115,100 110,600 554976 664241 659225 658339 674518 559337 458725 474499
1/2 131,200 125,500 118,000 554977 664250 659228 658340 674524 559350 458728 474500
5/8 147,000 138,400 127,100 554978 664262 659229 658341 674530 559362 458729 474501
3/4 173,500 160,000 142,400 554979 664275 659430 658342 674530 559575 458730 474502
7/8 188,900 172,500 151,300 554980 664287 — — — 559387 458732 474503
1 123,900 101,200 171,500 554981 664300 — — — 559100 458733 474504
11/4 187,800 153,400 108,400 554983 664325 — — — 559124 458735 474505

* WARNING
MADE IN U.S.A. • Use only alloy chain and attach-
75
CM adjustable single &

double loop chain slings
Product code Product code

Single Hooks Double Hooks
Working Working Oblong
Chain load limit Oblong Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle load limit master Hammerlok Clevlok Cradle
size (lbs.)* master coupling Cradle Grab (lbs.)* link sub- coupling Cradle Grab
(in.) 60° link link Grab (eye) 60° assembly link Grab (eye)
7/32 113,600 554931 664220 — 559318 115,450 554974 664221 — 559318
9/32 116,100 554932 664228 659222 559325 119,100 554975 664228 659222 559325
3/8 112,300 554935 664241 659225 559337 118,400 554976 664241 659225 559337
1/2 120,800 554938 664250 659228 559350 131,200 554977 664250 659228 559350
5/8 131,300 554940 664262 659229 559362 147,000 554978 664262 659229 559362
3/4 149,000 554943 664275 659430 559575 173,500 554979 664275 659430 559575
7/8 159,200 554946 664287 — 559387 188,900 554980 664287 — 559387
1 182,600 554949 664300 — 559100 123,900 554981 664300 — 559100
11/4 125,200 554951 664325 — 559124 187,800 554983 664325 — 559124
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—WELDED CHAIN SLINGS

CM welded endless basket chain sling
single & double
Oblong master link

Working load
limit (lbs.)* Single basket Double basket
Chain size 90° 60° Master Diameter Inside Inside Sub- Diameter Inside Inside
link material width length assembly material width length
(in.) (mm) Single Double number A B C number A B C
7/32 15.5 12,100 13,600 HA40 15/32 11/2 13 HA50 1/2 2 1/2 15
9/32 17 13,500 16,100 HA50 1/2 2 1/2 15 HA75 3/4 2 3/4 15 1/2
3/8 10 17,100 12,300 HA75 3/4 2 3/4 15 1/2 HA100 1 3 1/2 17
1/2 13 12,000 20,800 HA100 1 3 1/2 17 HA125 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4
5/8 16 18,100 31,300 HA125 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 HA150 11/2 5 1/4 10 1/2
3/4 20 28,300 49,000 HA150 11/2 5 1/4 10 1/2 HA175 13/4 6 12
7/8 22 34,200 59,200 HA175 13/4 6 12 HA200 2 7 14
* WARNING
76
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—LINKS & RINGS
CM oblong master link— proof tested

Type & size of chain sling
Link size (inches) on which used
Working Diameter Inside Inside Single Double Triple Quad Weight
Link Product UPC load limit material width length type type type type each
no. code 43927- (lbs.)*† A B C S&C D T Q (lbs.)
HA40 554931 23327 113,600 13/32 11/2 13 7/32 7/32 — — 11.33
HA50 554932 23328 116,100 1/2 21/2 15 9/32 9/32 7/32 7/32 11.8
HA75 554935 23329 112,300 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 3/8 3/8 9/32 9/32 12.1
HA100 554938 23330 120,800 1 3 1/2 17 1/2 or 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/8 14.6
HA125 554940 23331 131,300 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 3/4 5/8 1/2 1/2 19.2
HA150 554943 23333 149,000 11/2 5 1/4 101/2 7/8 3/4 5/8 5/8 15.7
HA175 554946 23335 173,500 1 3/4 6 12 1 7/8 3/4 3/4 24.5
HA200 554949 23337 188,900 2 7 14 11/4 1 7/8 7/8 37.3
HA225 554951 23339 125,200 21/4 8 16 — 11/4 1 1 54.0
HA275 554957 23342 187,800 2 3/4 9 16 — — 11/4 11/4 84.8
†Working load limit of master link only. For sling WLL see pages 74-76.
CM oblong master link— special sizes — proof tested

• Heat treated
Approx.
Working Dimensions (inches) weight
Diameter Product UPC load limit each
(in.) code 43927- (lbs.)*† A B C (lbs.)
1 554969 23345 118,200 1 14 18 115.3
11/4 554942 23332 122,800 11/4 16 12 112.1
11/2 554970 23346 142,900 11/2 16 12 117.6
11/2 554944 23334 136,700 11/2 17 14 120.1
13/4 554945 23359 163,000 13/4 17 14 127.9
2 554952 23340 177,800 2 18 16 141.9
21/2 554954 23341 147,300 21/2 18 16 167.0
3 554958 — 228,000 3 19 18 111.0
31/4 554959 — 262,200 31/4 10 20 144.0
31/2 554960 — 279,000 31/2 12 24 197.0
CM oblong master link sub-assembly**— proof tested

for triple and quad branch chain slings
Oblong master Master coupling
link size link size
HA Sub- (inches) (inches)
chain assembly Product UPC Weight
(in.) number code 43927- A B 1C D E F (lbs.)
7/32 HA50-SA 554974 23575 1/2 2 1/2 15 11/32 5/8 11/8 111.0
9/32 HA75-SA 554975 23576 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 15/32 7/8 1 9/16 112.6
3/8 HA100-SA 554976 23577 1 3 1/2 17 21/32 11/4 2 1/4 116.1
1/2 HA125-SA 554977 23578 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 29/32 13/4 3 1/8 113.3
5/8 HA150-SA 554978 23579 1 1/2 5 1/4 101/2 15/32 21/4 4 124.3
3/4 HA175-SA 554979 23580 1 3/4 6 12 19/32 2 3/8 4 3/8 136.1
7/8 HA200-SA 554980 23581 2 7 14 117/32 2 3/4 51/4 157.4
1 HA225-SA 554981 23582 2 1/4 8 16 1 25/32 3 6 183.9
11/4 HA275-SA 554983 23583 2 3/4 9 16 2 1/32 31/2 7 129.7
**Consisting of oblong master link and two welded master coupling links.
* WARNING
77
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—LINKS & RINGS
CM master ring — proof tested

Type & size of chain sling
Ring size (inches) on which used
Working Diameter Inside Single Double Triple Quad Weight
Product UPC load limit material dia. of ring type type type type each
code 43927- (lbs.)*† K L S&C D T Q (lbs.)
554611 23494 13,500 1/2 21/2 9/32 — — — 11.5
554613 23495 16,100 5/8 3 — 9/32 — — 11.0
554615 23496 19,100 3/4 4 3/8 — 9/32 9/32 11.8
554617 23497 12,300 7/8 4 — 3/8 — — 12.6
554619 23499 18,400 1 4 1/2 — 3/8 3/8 13.4
554623 23502 20,800 11/4 5 5/8 or 3/4 1/2 — — 16.9
554627 23504 31,300 11/2 6 7/8 5/8 1/2 1/2 11.7
554630 23506 49,000 1 3/4 7 1 3/4 5/8 5/8 18.6
554635 23509 73,500 2 8 — 7/8 3/4 3/4 27.9
554636 23510 88,900 21/4 9 11/4 1 7/8 7/8 39.9
CM pear-shaped master link— proof tested

Type & size of
chain sling on
Link size (inches) which used
Working
load Diameter Inside Single Double Weight
Link limit Product UPC material Inside widths length type type each
no. (lbs.)*† code 43927- G H I J S&C D (lbs.)
HA51 116,100 554702 23403 1/2 11/4 21/2 15 5/16 9/32 9/32 11.8
HA79 112,300 554706 23405 3/4 2 2 3/4 15 5/8 3/8 3/8 12.1
HA103 120,800 554710 23408 1 2 5/8 31/2 171/4 1/2 or 5/8 1/2 14.6
HA129 131,300 554714 23410 11/4 31/4 4 5/8 18 3/4 3/4 5/8 19.2
HA153 149,000 554719 23413 11/2 3 7/8 51/4 10 1/2 7/8 3/4 15.3
HA179 159,200 554723 23414 1 3/4 4 1/2 6 12 1 7/8 23.9
HA201 182,600 554726 23415 2 3 1/2 7 14 11/4 1 35.9
HA229 125,200 554731 23416 2 1/4 6 8 16 — 11/4 52.8
CM grab link— proof tested

Working
Chain load Weight
size limit Product UPC each
(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- A 1B C D (lbs.)
9/32 13,500 554320 23782 1/2 15 1/2 21/2 37/64 10.79
3/8 17,100 554326 23783 3/4 16 1/16 2 3/4 5/8 12.1
1/2 12,000 554332 23785 1 17 5/8 31/2 3/4 14.6
5/8 18,100 554337 23786 11/4 19 1/4 4 3/8 1 19.2
3/4 28,300 554342 23787 1 3/8 111/4 6 11/8 14.3
7/8 34,200 554347 20291 11/2 11 3/4 5 1/4 1 3/8 16.8
1 47,700 554352 23788 1 3/4 13 3/4 7 11/2 26.7
11/4 72,300 554362 20292 2 1/4 17 1/2 9 2 1/4 57.2
NOTE: Although CM can supply these types of master links and rings, the oblong link is recommended for general use.
* WARNING
78
WARNING
See warning and use limitations prior to use.
79
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—ATTACHMENTS
CM Hammerlok coupling link— proof tested
Dependable and easy to use for fast * WARNING

assembly on the job, for attaching chain to
master links and eye type hooks and for • Do not exceed working
installing new body chain in old slings. load limit.
C.V.S.A. approved. • Use only alloy chain and
attachments for overhead
lifting.
Dimensions (inches)
Working Diameter
Chain load hole to Weight
size limit Product UPC Max. accept each
(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- A B C E† width male leg (lbs.)
7/32 12,100 664220 23087 1/4 1 13/32 31/64 13/32 1 5/16 1/2 11.12
9/32 13,500 664228 23097 5/16 1 13/16 5/8 1/2 111/16 35/64 11.23
3/8 17,100 664241 23107 1/2 2 13/32 53/64 3/4 2 7/32 47/64 11.65
1/2 12,000 664250 23118 11/16 3 3/8 17/32 1 3 1/8 59/64 11.5
5/8 18,100 664262 23130 13/16 4 1/16 11/2 11/4 3 11/16 11/16 12.6
3/4 28,300 664275 23142 15/16 4 25/32 151/64 1 1/2 4 5/16 11/4 13.8
7/8 34,200 664287 23152 1 3/64 5 1/8 1 29/32 1 3/4 5 5/16 111/32 16.3
1 47,700 664300 23163 11/4 5 3/4 2 3/16 2 6 3/16 1 9/16 19.3
11/4 72,300 664325 23173 1 17/32 6 13/16 2 5/8 2 1/4 7 3/4 2 17.3
†Diameter of stock of largest master link intended to be used with Hammerlok.
80
KUPLERS
Kuplers act as a connection device between Master Links and
Chain on all multiple leg Kuplex II Chain Slings. On single
leg assemblies they can be used in lieu of the popular Kuplex
II Kuplink. Resembling a shackle in appearance the Kuplers
provide a high strength, high integrity connection when used
to connect a special attachment to the alloy chain assembly.
Specifications
Accoloy
Size of Chain Working
Load
Stock Kupler Limits A B C D E G H I J Weight
Number No. In. mm. Lbs. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. Lbs.
5981-00020 K-20 9/32 7 3,500 7/16 13/16 1-5/16 5/16 1/8 23/32 13/32 11/32 5/8 .2
5981-00021 K-21 3/8 10 7,100 19/32 1-1/16 1-7/8 7/16 5/32 15/16 9/16 15/32 7/8 .5
5981-00022 K-22 1/2 13 12,000 3/4 1-5/16 2-9/16 9/16 3/16 1-3/32 3/4 21/32 1-1/8 1.1
5981-00023 K-23 5/8 16 18,100 15/16 1-5/8 3 11/16 1/4 1-11/32 15/16 13/16 1-1/2 2.0
5981-00024 K-24 3/4 20 28,300 1 1-15/16 3-13/32 13/16 5/16 1-19/32 1-7/32 1 1-3/4 3.2
5981-00025 K-25 7/8 22 34,200 1-1/8 2-1/4 3-7/8 15/16 3/8 1-27/32 1-9/32 1-1/16 2 4.7
5991-00026 K-26 1 26 35,900† 1-1/4 2-3/4 4-3/8 1-1/32 NA 2 1-1/4 1-1/8 2-3/8 6.6
5991-00028 K-28 1-1/4 32 56,100† 1-1/2 3-1/2 5-1/8 1-5/16 NA 2-9/32 1-1/2 1-7/16 2-7/8 11.6
† Values shown for these sizes are grade 63.
Fits:
Safety Hooks
OF & OTF Master
Links
Eye Hooks
81
GRADE 80 HERC-ALLOY 800—HOOKS
CM Cradle Grab hook—

100% proof tested
Working
Chain size load Dimensions (inches) Weight
limit Product UPC each
(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B D 1E 1G 1H I 1K 1.L 1M 1P (lbs.)
7/32 15.5 12,100 559318 45060 1.19 1.75 0.36 12.69 0.38 1.19 0.96 0.63 11.63 1.70 10.35
9/32 17 13,500 559325 44959 1.38 1.81 0.36 13.44 0.38 1.19 0.99 0.63 12.36 1.70 10.40
3/8 10 17,100 559337 44922 1.78 2.63 0.45 14.67 0.50 1.75 1.48 0.78 13.11 1.06 11.06
1/2 13 12,000 559350 45265 2.28 3.34 0.59 15.86 0.63 1.88 1.98 1.03 13.94 1.30 12.26
5/8 16 18,100 559362 44917 2.75 4.08 0.75 17.13 0.75 2.25 2.63 1.25 14.78 1.59 14.36
3/4 20 28,300 559575 45063 3.19 5.23 0.88 18.99 0.88 2.88 3.50 1.44 16.25 1.88 18.82
7/8 22 34,200 559387 42060 3.75 5.69 1.00 19.63 1.00 3.00 3.75 1.75 16.50 2.12 10.40
1 26 47,700 559100 44989 4.31 7.00 1.19 12.44 1.22 3.88 4.31 1.88 18.09 3.12 20.90
11/4† 32 72,300 559124 42052 5.38 8.50 1.50 15.56 1.56 3.50 5.50 2.25 10.50 3.50 40.00
†Not cradle type
CM Clevlok Cradle Grab hook—

100% proof tested
Combines CM’s unique Cradle
Grab design with a simple, depend-
able clevis device for do-it-yourself
hook attachment. Replacement
load pins and retainer pins avail-
able.
Dimensions (inches)
Chain size Working E L Weight
load limit Product UPC Pin each
(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B D Dim. Tol. G .H 1.K Dia. M 1.P T (lbs.)
9/32 17 13,500 659222 42108 1.250 1.781 .359 ±.016 3.000 .328 1.984 .357 1.625 1.718 1.187 1.46
3/8 10 17,100 659225 42111 1.812 2 .562 .468 ±.031 4.078 .453 1.406 .507 2.109 1.062 1.750 1.23
1/2 13 12,000 659228 42114 2.156 3 .250 .594 ±.031 5.266 .593 1.875 .625 2.875 1.281 2.125 2.40
5/8 16 18,100 659229 42117 2.687 4 .078 .750 ±.031 6.531 .750 2.375 .750 3.562 1.593 2.500 4.17
3/4 20 28,300 659430 42120 3.125 5.234 .875 ±.031 9.083 .875 3.503 .906 5.500 1.867 2.875 9.56
PROOF TESTED
* WARNING
82
CLEVIS Shortening Hook XK
Code Work Load Code Work Load

For Chain G80 4:1 G80 G100 4:1 e b d1 d2
Alloy Alloy Alloy G100 Alloy Weight
lb/pc.
7/32 XK 5.5 2100 XK 5.50 2700 3.58 1.33 .82 .31 .60
9/32 XK 7 3500 XK 70 4300 4.84 2.08 .94 .43 1.50
5/16 XK 8 4500 XK 80 5700 4.80 2.08 .94 .43 1.50
3/8 XK 10 7100 XK 100 8800 6.26 2.73 1.22 .55 2.70
1/2 XK 13 12000 XK 130 15000 8.03 3.62 1.53 .66 6.00
5/8 XK 16 18100 XK 160 22600 8.70 4.01 1.57 .78 8.80
CM plate hook — proof tested
* WARNING
Chain Working Dimensions (inches) Weight

size load limit Product UPC each
(in.) (lbs.)* code 43927- A B C D L 1M N T R W (lbs.)
9/32 13,600 462528 23675 2 13/4 2 1/2 15/16 1 13 11/16 1/8 5/8 5/16 2 1/2 12.8
3/8 17,050 462537 23676 2 5/8 3 4 5/16 1 3/16 11/8 16 3/8 3/16 3/4 3/8 2 3/4 15.7
1/2 11,400 462550 23677 3 1/2 4 4 3/8 1 1/2 11/2 17 3/8 1/4 1 1/2 3 1/2 13.0
5/8 17,800 462562 23678 4 3/8 5 5 7/16 17/8 17/8 19 1/4 5/16 11/4 5/8 5 26.5
3/4 25,600 462575 23679 5 3/16 6 6 1/2 2 3/8 2 1/4 10 7/8 3/8 11/2 3/4 5 3/4 42.0
7/8 34,900 462587 23680 6 7 7 5/8 2 1/2 2 5/8 13 1/16 7/16 1 3/4 1 6 65.0
NOTE: For mechanical assembled slings, next larger size Hammerlok coupling link is required in addition to regular size Hammerlok
coupling link.
CM hook latch kits

Kit includes all hardware for easy installation on CM eye and Clevlok sling hooks.
Current style latch Old style latch
Chain
size Product UPC Product UPC
(in.) code 43927- code 43927-
7/32 — — 595461 42087
9/32 595523 44919 595461 42087
3/8 595525 45260 595463 42088
1/2 595528 35990 595474 42095
5/8 595529 44975 595465 42090
3/4 595530 44984 595466 42091
7/8 595532 45081 595467 42092
1 595533 45082 595468 42093 Current Style Old Style
11/4 595535 44988 595469 42094 Latch Latch
83
CLEVIS TYPE FOUNDRY HOOKS
Kuplex II Foundry Hooks when properly used are designed for
maximum service such as those applications encountered in
foundry work. The throat of the hook is designed to accommo-
date standard trunnions. The tip of the hook is designed for ease
of insertion into holes in the casting.
Specifications
Accoloy
Size of Chain Working
Load
Stock Kupler Limits* A B C D E F G H I J Weight
Number No. In. mm. Lbs. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. In. Lbs.
5982-00498 K-498 9/32 7 3,500 1-1/8 1-9/16 4-3/8 4-7/8 2-1/2 1/8 3/8 13/32 11/32 7/8 2.1
5982-00499 K-499 3/8 10 7,100 1-3/8 1-7/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3 5/32 1/2 9/16 15/32 1-1/8 3.9
5982-00500 K-500 1/2 13 12,000 1-5/8 2-1/4 6-5/8 7 3-1/2 3/16 5/8 3/4 21/32 1-1/2 7.6
5982-00501 K-501 5/8 16 18,100 2-3/16 2-5/8 7-3/4 8-9/32 4 1/4 3/4 15/16 13/16 1-3/4 13.5
5982-00502 K-502 3/4 20 28,300 2-5/8 3-1/8 8-7/8 9-5/8 4-5/8 5/16 7/8 1-7/32 1 2 23.2
5982-00503 K-503 7/8 22 34,200 2-7/8 3-1/2 10-1/16 10-3/4 5-1/4 3/8 1 1-9/32 1-1/16 2-1/4 32.1
5992-00504 K-504 1 26 47,700 2.8 3.8 11.6 11.0 5.6 - 1.4 1.2 1.1 2.5 35.0
* Working load limits should not be exceeded. Do not point load hooks.
CM foundry hook—
100% proof tested
Working
(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B 1D E 1G 1H I K 1L 1M N O R (lbs.)
9/32 17 13,500 474498 42073 1.56 14.75 2.50 16.45 0.47 1.00 1.56 0.63 14.75 2.50 1.23 .25 12.4
3/8 10 17,100 474499 42074 2.00 15.75 3.00 17.88 0.63 1.27 1.88 0.75 15.75 3.00 1.50 .31 14.5
1/2 13 12,000 474500 42075 2.50 16.75 3.50 19.38 0.75 1.50 2.22 1.00 16.88 3.50 1.75 .37 17.1
5/8 16 18,100 474501 42076 3.00 17.81 4.00 10.97 0.88 1.81 2.63 1.25 18.06 4.00 2.03 .43 11.6
3/4 20 28,300 474502 42077 3.50 19.13 4.50 12.81 1.00 2.20 3.00 1.50 19.25 4.50 2.56 .50 20.0
7/8 22 34,200 474503 42078 4.00 10.14 5.00 14.23 1.13 2.25 3.38 1.75 10.38 5.00 2.78 .56 26.0
1 26 47,700 474504 42079 4.50 11.13 5.50 15.84 1.25 2.59 3.75 2.13 11.56 5.50 3.03 .62 36.8
1 1/4 32 72,300 474505 42080 5.13 12.84 6.00 18.03 1.38 3.17 4.25 2.38 12.88 6.00 3.81 .75 58.4
* WARNING
• Use only alloy chain and attach- MADE IN U.S.A.
84
CM sling hook** without latch —

100% proof tested
Working
(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- B 1D E 1G 1H 1I K 1L 1M N O 1P (lbs.)
7/32 15.5 12,100 458544 42023 — 13.31 1.44 14.30 0.38 0.78 1.25 0.75 13.06 1.25 1.00 0.86 10.7
9/32 17 13,500 458722 42000 1.62 13.50 1.50 15.25 0.44 0.73 1.59 0.75 13.75 1.19 1.20 1.05 11.1
3/8 10 17,100 458725 44887 2.06 14.34 1.88 16.64 0.56 0.95 2.19 0.94 14.78 1.44 1.45 1.28 11.9
1/2 13 12,000 458728 45259 2.63 15.50 2.25 18.16 0.75 1.17 2.56 1.13 15.69 1.78 1.94 1.66 14.5
5/8 16 18,100 458729 44951 3.06 16.34 2.63 19.66 0.88 1.44 2.63 1.31 16.50 2.03 2.38 2.19 17.3
3/4 20 28,300 458730 44992 3.50 17.83 3.00 11.38 1.00 1.69 3.44 1.50 17.81 2.50 2.83 2.51 11.4
7/8 22 34,200 458732 44994 3.88 18.59 3.38 12.72 1.09 1.94 3.88 1.69 18.75 2.78 3.22 2.84 18.1
1 26 47,700 458733 45079 4.31 19.59 4.00 14.23 1.22 2.14 4.25 1.88 19.88 3.13 3.55 3.09 22.6
11/4 32 72,300 458735 45103 5.31 11.56 4.66 17.00 1.50 2.62 4.64 2.31 11.50 3.88 4.25 3.89 36.0
**Available from stock with/without latch. Replacement latch kits are also available, see page 87. User must determine if latch is required
on the hook.
CM Clevlok sling hook without latch**—

100% proof tested
Chain size Working Dimensions (inches) Weight

load limit Product UPC each
(in.) (mm) (lbs.)* code 43927- D E 1G H 1I K L M N O P (lbs.)
9/32 17 13,500 658338 45077 3.500 1.500 15.156 .328 0.734 1.594 .357 3.437 1.187 1.203 1.051 10.64
3/8 10 17,100 658339 45100 4.343 1.875 16.672 .453 0.953 2.187 .507 4.468 1.437 1.453 1.281 11.91
1/2 13 12,000 658340 45070 5.500 2.250 18.000 .593 1.172 2.562 .625 5.265 1.781 1.938 1.656 14.33
5/8 16 18,100 658341 45147 6.281 2.625 19.687 .750 1.438 2.281 .750 6.078 2.031 2.375 2.188 15.20
3/4 20 28,300 658342 45177 7.827 3.000 11.688 .875 1.688 3.437 .906 7.344 2.500 2.828 2.563 11.40
**Latches available either as an option or in kit form, see page 87. User must determine whether latch is required on the hook.
Replacement load pins and retainer pins available.
* WARNING
PROOF TESTED • Use only alloy chain and attach-
85
ALLOY CHAIN - GRADE 100
ØD
Chain Working Weight
Size Load Limit 100 ft.
Model Inches *(Lbs) OD E H (Lbs)
KLA-8-10 5/16” 5,700 0.32 0.95 0.45 97
KLA-10-10 3/8” 8,800 0.40 1.2 0.58 151
KLA-13-10 1/2” 15,000 0.52 1.5 0.72 253
E
KLA-16-10 5/8” 22,600 0.63 1.9 0.87 450
*Design factor 4 H
MASTER GRAB TYPE MG B
An all in one fitting, combining master link, connector and shortening function for single leg sling.
H
Size Load Limit Each
A
Model Inches *(Lbs) L (In) A B H (Lbs)
MG-8-10 5/16” 5,700 6.7 3.7 2.4 0.71 2.2
L
MG-10-10 3/8” 8,800 8.3 4.6 3.0 0.87 4.0
MG-13-10 1/2” 15,000 10.3 5.6 3.5 1.0 7.7
MG-16-10 5/8” 22,600 12.2 6.4 4.1 1.2 12.8
*Design factor 4
MASTER GRAB DUAL TYPE MGD B
H
An all in one fitting, combining master link, connector and shortening function for a two leg sling.
A
Model Inches *(Lbs) at 60° L (In) A B H (Lbs)
L
MGD-8-10 5/16” 9,900 6.7 3.9 3.0 0.83 3.1
MGD-10-10 3/8” 15,200 8.3 4.9 3.5 0.95 5.5
MGD-13-10 1/2” 26,000 10.3 5.8 4.1 1.1 11.0
MGD-16-10 5/8” 39,100 12.2 6.9 4.7 1.4 19.6
*Design factor 4
OBLONG MASTER LINK - MF

For 1, 2, 3, or 4 leg chain slings when used with C-Grab and C-Lok connectors B
ØD
Trade Working Working Working Weight

Size 1-Leg Load Limit 2-Legs Load Limit 3-4 Legs Load Limit Each
Model Inches 90° *(Lbs) 60° *(Lbs) 60° *(Lbs) L B D (Lbs)
MF-86-10 1/2” 5/16” 5,700 - - - - 4.7 2.8 0.55 0.9
MF-108-10 5/8” 3/8” 8,800 5/16” 9,900 - - 5.5 3.2 0.67 1.5
L
MF-1310-10 7/8” 1/2” 15,000 3/8” 15,200 5/16” 14,800 6.3 3.7 0.87 3.3
MF-1613-10 1” 5/8” 22,600 1/2” 26,000 3/8” 22,900 7.5 4.3 0.99 4.8
MF-2016-10 1 3/8” - - 5/8” 39,100 1/2” 39,000 9.4 5.5 1.3 11.2
MF-2220-10 1 1/2” - - - - 5/8” 58,700 9.8 5.9 1.5 15.9
*Design factor 4
WA R N IN G
SEE WARNINGS AND USE LIMITATIONS
86
B
ØD
OBLONG MASTER LINK - MFX
OVERSIZED FOR LARGE CRANE HOOKS
For 1 or 2 leg chain slings when used with C-Grab and C-Lok connectors
Trade Working Working Weight
Size 1-Leg Load Limit 2-Legs Load Limit Each
Model Inches 90° *(Lbs) 60° *(Lbs) L B D (Lbs)
L
MFX-108-10 1” 5/16” 5,700 - - 13.4 7.1 0.99 8.2

MFX-108-10 1” 3/8” 8,800 5/16” 9,900 13.4 7.1 0.99 8.2
MFX-1310-10 1 1/8” 1/2” 15,000 3/8” 15,200 13.4 7.1 1.1 10.4
MFX-1613-10 1 3/8” 5/8” 22,600 1/2” 26,000 13.4 7.1 1.3 15.4
MFX-1916-10 1 1/2” - - 5/8” 39,100 13.4 7.1 1.5 19.6
*Design factor 4
ØD
OBLONG MASTER LINK - MTX

OVERSIZED FOR LARGE CRANE HOOKS
For 3 or 4 leg chain slings when used with C-Grab and C-Lok connectors
L
Trade Working Weight

Size 3-4 Legs Load Limit Each
Model Inches 60° *(Lbs) L B D I b d (Lbs)
MTX-8-10 1 1/8” 5/16” 14,800 13.4 7.1 1.1 6.3 3.7 0.87 13.7
Ød
MTX-10-10 1 3/8” 3/8” 22,900 13.4 7.1 1.3 7.9 4.7 1.2 23.1
MTX-13-10 1 1/2” 1/2” 39,000 13.4 7.1 1.5 7.9 4.7 1.3 28.4
MTX-16-10** 1 3/4” 5/8” 58,700 13.4 7.1 1.8 - - - 30.2
l
*Design factor 4
**Does not require sub assembly
b
E
C-GRAB TYPE CG
A connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach one leg of chain.
H
Can also be used as an adjustable sliding choker.

Fitting includes built-in chain pocket for shortening or creating leg loops
B
L
Model Inches *(Lbs) at 90° L B E H (Lbs)

CG-8-10 5/16” 5,700 4.2 0.47 1.3 0.95 1.8
CG-10-10 3/8” 8,800 5.2 0.59 1.6 1.1 3.3
CG-13-10 1/2” 15,000 6.8 0.71 2.0 1.5 7.1
CG-16-10 5/8” 22,600 8.5 0.87 2.5 1.9 13.4
*Design factor 4
E
C-GRAB DUAL TYPE CGD
A connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach two legs of chain.
H
Fitting includes built-in chain pockets for shortening or creating leg loops.
B
L
CGD-8-10 5/16” 9,900 4.2 0.47 1.3 1.1 2.9

CGD-10-10 3/8” 15,200 5.2 0.59 1.6 1.5 5.5
CGD-13-10 1/2” 26,000 6.8 0.71 2.0 1.8 12.1
CGD-16-10 5/8” 39,100 8.5 0.87 2.5 2.2 22.5
*Design factor 4
WA R N IN G
87
C-LOK TYPE CL E
A connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach one leg of chain.
The C-Lok can also be used at the bottom of a sling as a sliding choker.
H
CL-8-10 5/16” 5,700 2.3 0.47 1.3 0.95 1.1
L
CL-10-10 3/8” 8,800 2.9 0.59 1.6 1.1 2.0 B
CL-13-10 1/2” 15,000 3.8 0.71 2.0 1.5 4.4
CL-16-10 5/8” 22,600 4.7 0.87 2.5 1.9 8.4
*Design factor 4
C-LOK DUAL TYPE CLD E
A connecting link used with MF, MFX, or MTX master links to attach two legs
H
CLD-8-10 5/16” 9,900 2.2 0.47 1.3 1.1 1.8
CLD-10-10 3/8” 15,200 2.8 0.59 1.6 1.5 3.3
L
B
CLD-13-10 1/2” 26,000 3.7 0.71 2.0 1.8 7.3

CLD-16-10 5/8” 39,100 4.5 0.99 2.5 2.2 13.2
*Design factor 4
EGKN SLING HOOK

Size Load Limit Each B
Model Inches *(Lbs) at 90° L B G H (Lbs)
L
EGKN-8-10 5/16” 5,700 3.7 1.2 0.67 0.87 1.1

EGKN-10-10 3/8” 8,800 4.8 1.6 0.9 1.2 2.2
EGKN-13-10 1/2” 15,000 5.7 1.9 1.1 1.5 4.4
H
EGKN-16-10 5/8” 22,600 6.7 2.3 1.4 1.8 8.4

*Design factor 4 G
GG GRAB HOOK (CLEVIS CRADLE TYPE)

B
Model Inches *(Lbs) L B (Lbs)
L
GG-8-10 5/16” 5,700 2.2 0.41 0.88
GG-10-10 3/8” 8,800 3.3 0.47 1.8
GG-13-10 1/2” 15,000 3.8 0.63 3.7
GG-16-10 5/8” 22,600 4.9 0.79 6.8
*Design factor 4:1
WA R N IN G
88
F
OKE FOUNDRY HOOK (EYE TYPE)
E
Model Inches *(Lbs) L B E F G H (Lbs)
L OKE-7/8-10 5/16” 5,700 4.8 2.5 1.1 0.45 0.79 1.0 1.5
B
OKE-10-10 3/8” 8,800 5.9 3.0 1.3 0.6 1.0 1.1 2.9
OKE-13-10 1/2” 15,000 7.2 3.5 1.7 0.7 1.3 1.5 6.2
OKE-16-10 5/8” 22,600 8.5 4.0 2.2 0.9 1.6 1.8 10.8
H
*Design factor 4:1
G
G ALLOY COUPLING LINKS

E Chain Working Weight
Model Inches *(Lbs) L B G E (Lbs)
L
G-8-10 5/16” 5,700 2.2 0.71 0.35 0.87 0.44
G-10-10 3/8” 8,800 2.7 0.98 0.47 1.0 0.66
G-13-10 1/2” 15,000 3.5 1.1 0.59 1.3 1.5
G-16-10 5/8” 22,600 4.1 1.4 0.75 1.6 2.6
*Design factor 4:1
B
GBK SELF LOCKING HOOK

B *(Lbs) at 90° L B G H
Model Inches (Lbs)
GBK-8-10 5/16” 5,700 4.7 1.5 0.79 0.87 1.8
L
GBK-10-10 3/8” 8,800 5.9 1.9 0.94 1.1 2.9

GBK-13-10 1/2” 15,000 6.8 2.1 1.1 1.4 5.3
GBK-16-10 5/8” 22,600 8.5 2.4 1.5 2.0 12.3
H
*Design factor 4
G
LBK SWIVEL EYE GRIP LATCH SELF-LOCKING HOOK (WITH BRONZE BUSHING)
C

Model Inches *(Lbs) L B C E F G H (Lbs)
B
L
LBK-7/8-10 5/16” 5,700 6.9 1.5 1.1 1.5 0.47 0.79 0.87 1.8
LBK-10-10 3/8” 8,800 8.4 1.9 1.4 1.7 0.59 0.87 1.1 4.0
LBK-13-10 1/2” 15,000 9.3 2.1 1.9 1.9 0.75 1.1 1.4 8.4
*Design factor 4:1
H
WA R N IN G
89
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
90
HERC-ALLOY 1000—CARE, USE AND INSPECTION
The life and strength of Herc-Alloy 1000 chain slings depend on WEAR ALLOWANCES OF HERC-ALLOY 1000 CHAIN
proper inspection, maintenance and use. For additional informa- Measure cross section at
tion, refer to ANSI B30.9 and OSHA 1910.184. link ends to determine wear.
If chain is worn to less than
CARE the minimum allowable
Chain requires careful storage and regular maintenance. thickness, remove from
service.
• Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place.
• To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage. CHAIN SIZE MINIMUM ALLOWABLE THICKNESS (T)
• Do not heat Herc-Alloy 1000 chain; this will alter its INCHES mm INCHES mm
thermal treatment. 7/32 15.5 0.185 14.7
• Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact 9/32 17.0 0.239 16.1
LAMCO for special requirements.
3/8 10.0 0.335 18.5
USE 1/2 13.0 0.435 11.1
To protect both operators and materials, observe these 5/8 16.0 0.536 13.6
precautions when using chain slings: 3/4 20.0 0.669 17.0
• Before use, inspect chain and attachments following the
7/8 22.0 0.744 18.9
instructions under “Inspection” below.
• Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors listed 1 26.0 0.870 22.1
here can reduce the load the chain will hold: 11/4 32.0 1.071 27.2
• Acceleration in rate of load application—can produce Note: For sizes not listed, the Minimum Allowable Thickness can be
dangerous overloading. calculated as 85% of the original material diameter.
• Variation in the angle of the load to the sling—as the angle
decreases, the working load of the sling will increase. USE OF CHAIN UNDER EXTREME
• Twisting, knotting or kinking— subjects links to unusual TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS
loading, decreasing the working load of the sling. When the chain itself is subjected to temperatures shown here,
• Use for purposes other than those for which slings are working load limits should be reduced as indicated.
intended— can reduce the working load of the sling.
GRADE 100
• Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks.
REDUCTION OF
• Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not support load. REDUCTION OF WORKING LOAD
• Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering. TEMPERATURE WORKING LOAD LIMIT AFTER
LIMIT WHILE AT EXPOSURE TO
• Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads. (°F) (°C) TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
• Use pads around sharp corners. Below 400 Below 204 None None
• Do not drop load on chains. 1400 204 15% None
• Match the size and working load limit of attachments such as 1500 260 25% 5%
hooks or rings to the size and working load limit of the chain.
1600 316 30% 15%
• For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain and attachments.
1700 371 40% 20%
INSPECTION 1800 427 50% 25%
It is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and 1900 482 60% 30%
to keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow this guide for 1000 538 70% 35%
such an inspection system.
• Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/non-caustic
solvent so that marks, nicks, wear and other defects are visi- The identification tag found on the master coupling link of each
ble. chain sling contains this information:
• Inspect each link for these conditions: • Grade • Size
• Twists or bends. • Reach • Type
• Nicks or gouges. • Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift)
• Excessive wear at bearing points. • Serial number
• Stretch.
• Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links or NOTE: HAMMERLOK COUPLING LINKS MUST NOT BE
SUBJECTED TO TEMPERATURES EXCEEDING 300o F.
attachments, especially spread in throat opening of hooks.
• Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment showing any
of the conditions listed here to indicate rejection; remove from
service until properly repaired.
* WARNING
91
HERC-ALLOY 1000—CHAIN SLINGS
HERC-ALLOY 1000 CHAIN SIZES AND WORKING LOAD LIMITS
NOMINAL
DIMENSIONS
(INCHES) APPROX. APPROX.
CHAIN SIZE NO. WEIGHT PER FOOT DRUM FEET
INSIDE INSIDE LINKS PER 100 FT. PRODUCT PRODUCT PER
( IN.) (mm) LENGTH WIDTH PER FT. (LBS.) CODE CODE DRUM
7/32 15.5 1.670 1.284 17 .9 11144.7 607321 677310 800
9/32 17.0 1.868 1.380 13.8 11173.1 607328 677311 5001
3/8 10.0 1.181 1.512 19.8 11148.0 607339 677313 5001
1/2 13.0 1.535 1.688 18.5 11255.0 607351 677315 3001
5/8 16.0 1.890 1.819 16.9 11383.0 607363 677316 2001
3/4 20.0 2.362 1.024 15.5 11625.0 607378 677317 1001
WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS.)*

CHAIN SIZE SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE & QUAD
( IN.) (mm) 90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°
7/32 15.5 12,700 14,700 13,800 12,700 17,000 15,700 14,000
9/32 17.0 14,300 17,400 16,100 14,300 11,200 19,100 16,400
3/8 10.0 18,800 15,200 12,400 18,800 22,900 18,700 13,200
1/2 13.0 15,000 26,000 21,200 15,000 39,000 31,800 22,500
5/8 16.0 22,600 39,100 32,000 22,600 58,700 47,900 33,900
3/4 20.0 35,300 61,100 49,900 35,300 91,700 74,900 53,000
LAMCO Manufactured Product
SINGLE CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C Made in U.S.A.
OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX.

DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WEIGHT
(LBS.)
CHAIN SIZE WORKING DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE
LOAD LIMIT MATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH TYPE SOS
(IN.) (mm) (LBS.)* A B C 5 FT. REACH
7/32 15.5 12,700 13/32 11/2 13 114
9/32 17 14,300 1/2 2 1/2 15 115
* WARNING
3/8 10 18,800 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 110 DO NOT EXCEED
1/2 13 15,000 1 3 1/2 17 118 WORKING LOAD LIMIT.
USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH
5/8 16 22,600 1 3 1/2 17 125 COMPATIBLE COMPONENTS
3/4 20 35,300 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 138 OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD
LIMIT FOR OVERHEAD LIFTING.
92
DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D - GRADE 100 Made in U.S.A.
OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX.

WEIGHT
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) (LBS.)
WORKING LOAD LIMIT
CHAIN SIZE (LBS.)* DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE TYPE
MATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH DOS
(IN.) (mm) 60° 45° 30° A B C 5' REACH
7/32 15.5 114,700 113,800 12,700 13/32 11/2 13 28 * WARNING
9/32 17 117,400 116,100 14,300 1/2 2 1/2 15 19 DO NOT EXCEED
3/8 10 115,200 112,400 18,800 3/4 2 3/4 15 1/2 18 WORKING LOAD LIMIT.
1/2 USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH
13 126,000 121,200 15,000 1 3 1/2 17 31
COMPATIBLE COMPONENTS
5/8 16 139,100 132,000 22,600 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 49 OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD
3/4
20 161,100 149,900 35,300 11/2 5 1/4 10 1/2 71
TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q Made in U.S.A.
OBLONG MASTER LINK SUB-

ASSEMBLY APPROX.
WEIGHT
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) (LBS.)
WORKING LOAD LIMIT
CHAIN SIZE (LBS.)* DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE TYPE TYPE
MATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH TOS QOS
(IN.) (mm) 60° 45° 30° A B C 5' REACH 5' REACH
7/32 15.5 117,000 115,700 114,000 1/2 21/2 15 112 116
9/32 17 111,200 119,100 116,400 3/4 2 3/4 15 1/2 114 118
3/8 10 122,900 118,700 113,200 1 3 1/2 17 128 136
1/2 13 139,000 131,800 122,500 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 150 162
5/8 16 158,700 147,900 133,900 11/2 51/4 10 1/2 179 197
3/4 20 191,700 174,900 153,000 13/4 6 12 112 137
93
HERC-ALLOY 1000—ATTACHMENTS
OBLONG MASTER LINK— PROOF TESTED
TYPE & SIZE OF CHAIN SLING

LINK SIZE (INCHES) ON WHICH USED
WORKING DIAMETER INSIDE INSIDE SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE QUAD WEIGHT
PRODUCT LOAD LIMIT MATERIAL WIDTH LENGTH TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE EACH
CODE (LBS.)*† A B C S&C D T Q (LBS.)
555231 115,400 13/32 (.406) 11/2 13 7/32 7/32 — — 11.33
555232 118,600 1/2 (.512) 21/2 15 9/32 9/32 7/32 7/32 11.8 11
555235 117,600 3/4 (.750) 2 3/4 151/2 3/8 3/8 9/32 9/32 12.1 11
555238 130,000 1 (1.024) 3 1/2 17 1/2 or 5/8 1/2 3/8 3/8 14.6 11
555240 145,200 11/4 (1.260) 4 3/8 18 3/4 3/4 5/8 1/2 1/2 19.2 11
555243 170,600 11/2 (1.500) 5 1/4 101/2 — 3/4 5/8 5/8 15.7 1
555246 105,900 1 3/4 (1.750) 6 12 — — 3/4 3/4 24.5 1
† Working load limit of master link only. For sling WLL see pages 92-93.
OBLONG MASTER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY**— PROOF TESTED

for triple and quad branch chain slings
OBLONG MASTER MASTER COUPLING

HA LINK SIZE LINK SIZE
CHAIN PRODUCT (INCHES) (INCHES) WEIGHT
(IN.) CODE A B C D E F (LBS.)
7/32 555274 1/2 2 1/2 15 11/32 5/8 1 1/8 12.0
9/32 555275 3/4 2 3/4 151/2 1.468 7/8 1 9/16 12.0
11 * WARNING
3/8 555276 1 3 1/2 17 1.656 11/4 2 1/4 14.5 1
DO NOT EXCEED
1/2 555277 11/4 4 3/8 18 3/4 1.906 13/4 3 1/8 19.0 1 WORKING LOAD LIMIT.
5/8 555278 1 1/2 5 1/4 101/2 1.156 21/4 4 16.0 1 USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH
COMPATIBLE COMPONENTS
3/4 555279 1 3/4 6 12 1.260 2 3/8 4 3/8 25.0 1 OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD
**Consisting of oblong master link and two welded master coupling links. LIMIT FOR OVERHEAD LIFTING.
94
GRADE 100 HAMMERLOK COUPLING LINKS
LOAD PIN LOAD PIN DIMENSIONS

BODY LOAD PIN BUSHING RETAINER MAXIMUM WEIGHT
HAMMERLOK PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT A B E WLL APPROX.
C F
SIZE IN. (mm) CODE CODE (2 REQ’D) CODE (1 REQ’D) CODE(1 REQ’D) CODE(1 REQ’D) MAX MAX D MIN 4:1 (lb) (lb)
9/32 (7) 667028 467025 596028 597028 598028 .365 .435 1.978 .708 .541 1.688 4,300 0.276
3/8 (10) 667038 467038 596038 597038 598038 .502 .591 3.002 1.157 .910 2.500 8,800 0.836
1/2 (13) 667050 467050 596050 597050 598050 .678 .780 3.795 1.429 1.097 3.188 15,000 1.867
5/8 (16) 667062 467062 596062 597062 598062 .804 .905 4.539 1.738 1.317 3.875 22,600 3.133
3/4 (20) 667075 467075 596075 597075 598075 .973 1.071 5.357 2.085 1.516 4.688 35,300 5.746
CRADLE GRAB HOOK— 100% PROOF TESTED
Made in U.S.A.
WORKING
CHAIN SIZE LOAD DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WEIGHT
LIMIT PRODUCT EACH PRICE
(IN.) (mm) (LBS.)* CODE B D E G H I K L M P (LBS.) EACH
7/32 15.5 12,700 Use 9/32” Hook
9/32 17 14,300 559725 1.38 1.91 0.36 13.70 0.38 1.06 1.04 0.63 12.56 1.76 10.55
3/8 10 18,800 559737 1.78 2.78 0.47 14.81 0.50 1.38 1.49 0.78 13.28 1.04 11.39
1/2 13 15,000 559750 2.28 3.63 0.59 16.19 0.63 1.81 1.98 1.03 14.22 1.51 13.05
5/8 16 22,600 559762 2.75 4.08 0.75 17.13 0.75 2.25 2.63 1.25 14.78 1.59 14.36
3/4 20 35,300 559775 3.19 5.23 0.88 18.99 0.88 2.88 3.50 1.44 16.25 1.88 18.82
* WARNING
DO NOT EXCEED
WORKING LOAD LIMIT.
USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH COMPATIBLE
COMPONENTS OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD
95
SLING HOOK** WITHOUT LATCH —

100% PROOF TESTED
WORKING
LIMIT PRODUCT EACH
(IN.) (MM) (LBS.)* CODE B D E G H I K L M N O P (LBS.)
7/32 15.5 12,700 Use 9/32” Hook
9/32 17 15,700 458622 1.62 3.50 1.50 15.25 0.44 0.73 1.59 0.75 3.75 1.19 1.20 1.05 11.1
3/8 10 18,800 458625 2.06 4.34 1.88 16.64 0.56 0.95 2.19 0.94 4.78 1.44 1.45 1.28 11.9
1/2 13 15,000 458628 2.63 5.50 2.25 18.16 0.75 1.17 2.56 1.13 5.69 1.78 1.94 1.66 14.5
5/8 16 22,600 458629 3.06 6.34 2.63 19.66 0.88 1.44 2.63 1.31 6.50 2.03 2.38 2.19 17.3
3/4 20 35,300 458630 3.50 7.83 3.00 11.38 1.00 1.69 3.44 1.50 7.81 2.50 2.83 2.51 11.4
**Available from stock with/without latch. Replacement latch kits are also available. User must determine if latch is required on the hook.
SLING HOOK WITH LATCH —

100% PROOF TESTED HOOK LATCH KITS
CURRENT STYLE LATCH

CHAIN
SIZE PRODUCT
(IN.) CODE
L 7/32 —
9/32 595523
3/8 595525
1/2 595528
5/8 595529
3/4 595530
Kit includes all hardware for easy
Current Style installation on CM eye and Clevlok
sling hooks.
Latch
WORKING
LIMIT PRODUCT EACH
(IN.) (mm) (LBS.)* CODE B D G H I L M O P R S (LBS.)
7/32 15.5 12,700 Use 9/32” Hook
9/32 17 15,700 558622 1.63 3.50 15.25 0.44 0.73 0.75 3.75 1.20 1.05 1.06 1.06 11.1
3/8 10 18,800 558625 2.06 4.34 06.64 0.56 0.95 0.94 4.78 1.45 1.28 1.31 1.31 11.91
1/2 13 15,000 558628 2.63 5.50 18.16 0.75 1.17 1.13 5.69 1.94 1.66 1.56 1.63 14.51
5/8 16 22,600 558629 3.06 6.34 19.66 0.88 1.44 1.31 6.50 2.38 2.19 1.75 1.75 17.31
3/4 20 35,300 558630 3.50 7.83 11.38 1.00 1.69 1.50 7.81 2.83 2.51 2.19 2.19 11.4
* WARNING
DO NOT EXCEED WORKING LOAD LIMIT.
USE ONLY ALLOY CHAIN WITH COMPATIBLE
COMPONENTS OF EQUAL WORKING LOAD
Made in U.S.A.
96
The new generation of high performance overhead
lifting equipment - Pewag Grade 120
The key advantages of Grade 120 are:
• Higher Work Load LImits - up to 50% higher compared to G80
• Weight Reduction
• Higher Safety Factors
• Improved Wear Resistance
• For Severe Applications
The goals were achieved by:

• New design concept of a profile lifting chain
• Redesign of all components
• Optimized heat-treatment methods
• Use of the highest-quality alloys
Code 1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg
4:1
angle at 90° at 30° at 45° at 60° at 30° at 45° at 60°
Code dim. WLL
NI 720 9/32” 5200 5200 7400 9000 7800 11000 13500
NI 1020 3/8” 10600 10600 15000 18400 15900 22500 27500
NI 1320 1/2” 17900 17900 25300 31000 26900 38000 46500
For asymmetrical load
distribution use single leg
value for all angles of 2 leg
sling use 2 leg values for 3
and 4 leg sling
Angle 30° 45° 60° 30° 45° 60°

Load factor with symmetrical load distribution 1 1.4 1.7 1.5 2.1 2.6
Load factor with asymmetrical load distribution 1 1 1 1 1.4 1.7
R larger than 2x chain dim. R larger than chain dim. R smaller than chain dim.
Reduction factor 1 0.7 0.5
Grade 120 Attachments: Enlarged Master Link Eye Sling Hook
Assemblies VM-G120 HS-G120
Master link assembly for General purpose hook
multi leg slings with forged safety latch.
Enlarged Master
Links M-G120
Master link for single
leg slings or end link.
Connex-Connecting Link C-G120 Grab Hook P-G120
General connecting link for connection of May be used as a shortening
Master links to chain or chain to components device.
97
CARBON — WELDED CHAIN
Chain specifications
Working Weight
load limit per 100 ft.
Inches Decimal (lbs.)* Length Width (lbs.)
3/16 1.218 11,800 1.95 1.40 1,038
1/4 1.276 11,300 1.00 1.47 1,066
5/16 1.327 11,900 1.10 1.50 1,098
CM 3/8 1.390 12,650 1.23 1.62 1,144
GRADE 30
PROOF 7/16 1.468 13,700 1.37 1.75 1,210
COIL
CHAIN 1/2 1.531 14,500 1.50 1.81 1,278
5/8 1.656 16,900 1.87 1.00 1,422
3/4 1.787 10,600 2.12 1.12 1,628
1 1.031 17,900 2.75 1.50 1,069
1/4 1.281 12,600 1.00 1.47 1,071
5/16 1.327 13,900 1.10 1.50 1,098
3/8 1.390 15,400 1.23 1.62 1,144
CM 7/16 1.468 17,200 1.37 1.75 1,210
GRADE 43 1/2
HIGH TEST 1.531 19,200 1.50 1.81 1,278
CHAIN 5/8 1.656 13,000 1.87 1.00 1,422
3/4 1.781 20,200 2.12 1.12 1,606
7/8 1.875 24,500 2.25 1.14 1,776
1 1.000 34,100 2.75 1.50 1,050
1/4 1.281 13,150 1.84 1.47 1,074
CM 5/16 1.327 14,700 1.98 1.46 1,100
GRADE 70
TRANSPORT 3/8 1.406 16,600 1.14 1.54 1,156
(BINDING)
7/16 1.468 18,750 1.33 1.62 1,204
CHAIN
1/2 1.531 11,300 1.43 1.72 1,259
Dimensions and weights are approximate and subject to variations.
MADE IN U.S.A.
CM Welded graded chain

Welded graded chain is an industrial grade chain used and 80 for alloy steel chain. The grade number relates to
extensively in rigging, towing and overhead lifting applica- the strength level of the chain, with the grade number
tions. increasing as the strength of the chain increases.
CM graded chains are manufactured in accordance with Only Herc-Alloy 800 and Herc-Alloy 63 chain is designed
the NACM Specification for chain, ASTM Standard A391 for overhead lifting. The other grade designated chains
and ASTM Standard A413. The standardized grade desig- are not made from alloy steel and should not be used for
nations are 30, 43 and 70 for carbon steel chain, and 63 overhead lifting.
LETELLIER - Stainless Steel Chain - Grade 316L
Catalog Size Inside Inside Weight Per Working

Number Inches Width Length Foot Limit Load Limit
CHS012WS 0.13 0.29 0.89 0.22 375
CHS019WS 0.19 0.40 0.95 0.40 1200
CHS025WS 0.25 0.50 1.00 0.71 2000
CHS031WS 0.31 0.50 1.10 1.05 2850
CHS038WS 0.38 0.63 1.23 1.50 3550
• All stainless chain slings and stainless rigging CHS050WS 0.50 0.81 1.50 2.70 6500
components are also available. CHS063WS 0.63 1.00 1.87 3.71 9500
• Specialty chain is also available in some 304, CHS075WS 0.75 1.13 2.12 5.80 15000
Nitronic 50 (UNS S20910), Monel, Incalloy, CHS100WS 1.00 1.37 3.58 8.53 22500
Hanes 230, Alloy 20.
* WARNING
98
ALLOY GRADE 63 CHAIN SLINGS
Paint System Chains
Grade 63 alloy chain fills a niche for paint line systems

that require a higher working load limit chain and that
utilize acidic solutions in the painting process. Acidic
solutions can cause physical changes to Grade 80 or
higher alloy chain which severely weakens the chain.
Due to the manufacturing processes used for Grade 63
alloy chain, this chain resists these physical changes.
Every link embossed AS – Matte Grey Finish with Rust
Inhibiter.
Contact Lamco to discuss the details of your painting

process to ensure the safety of your employees.
Working Load Limits* - Pounds

Double Chain Slings/Lbs. – Type D Triple and Quad Chain Slings/Lbs.
Size of Single Chain Type T and Type Q
Chain In. at 90° Lbs.
9/32 2,800 4,800 4,000 2,800 7,300 5,900 4,200

3/8 5,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 13,000 10,600 7,500
1/2 9,000 15,600 12,700 9,000 23,400 19,100 13,500
5/8 14,000 24,250 19,800 14,000 36,400 29,700 21,000
3/4 20,200 35,000 28,600 20,200 52,500 42,850 30,300
7/8 27,500 47,600 38,900 27,500 71,400 58,300 41,300
1 35,900 62,200 50,800 35,900 93,300 76,200 53,900
1-1/4 56,100 97,200 79,300 56,100 145,800 119,000 84,200
1-1/2 80,000 138,600 113,100 80,000 207,800 169,700 120,000
1-3/4 100,000 173,200 141,400 100,000 259,800 212,100 150,000
2 130,000 225,200 183,800 130,000 337,700 275,800 195,000
* Working Load Limits should not be exceeded.
99
Liftex PAC-FLEX® Alloy Chain Mesh Slings are specified for
multiple lifting uses in metalworking and other applications
where the loads are abrasive, hot or will ten to cut other types
of slings. PAC-FLEX fills a niche that web slings cannot fill.
PAC-FLEX is vastly superior in many respects to the wire
mesh sling.
Pac-Flex Slings Feature
• Flat, smoother bearing surfaces
• High tensile strength alloy steel chain
• Flexibility to conform to irregular shapes
• Withstands temperatures to 550°F.
• Excellent resistance to abrasion and cutting
• Easy to inspect – use the same inspection criteria used
for other alloy sling chains
Compare Liftex Pac-Flex Alloy Chain Mesh
Slings To Wire Mesh Slings
• More capacity per sling width
• Our 2” wide sling is 260% stronger than 2” wide wire
mesh slings.
• Our 4” wide sling is 200% stronger than 4” wide wire
mesh slings.
• BI-DIRECTIONAL FLEXIBILITY
Pac-Flex Materials Of Construction

PAC-FLEX is a uniquely engineered and patented arrangement of
alloy steel chain and 1/8” wire rope. End fittings are heat treated
alloy steel.
Pac-Flex Fitting Dimensions (in inches)

A-1 A-2 B D Thickness
PAC-4 6.88 4.75 3.50 2.25 .75
PAC-7 8.50 6.25 4.25 3.25 .75
PAC-5HD 12.00 9.19 7.13 3.63 1.00
PAC-8HD 12.75 9.75 6.82 4.75 1.00
Pac-Flex Chain Mesh Sling Specifications

Nominal *Rated Capacity (lbs.) Approx. Weight
Sling Part sling Choker Vertical Basket (lbs.)
Type No. width hitch hitch hitch 3’ sling 1’body
Type II PAC-4B 2” - 6000 12000 7.9 1.8
Type I PAC-4C 2” 6000 6000 12000 9.4 1.8
Type II PAC-7B 4” - 10000 20000 13.1 3.2
Type I PAC-7C 4” 10000 10000 20000 15.2 3.2
Type II PAC-5B/HD 4” - 18000 36000 18.6 4.3
Type I PAC-5C/HD 4” 18000 18000 36000 22.1 4.3
Type II PAC-8B/HD 6” - 30000 60000 26.8 6.3
Type I PAC-8C/HD 6” 30000 30000 60000 31.9 6.3
* Do not exceed rated capacity
To Order Specify:
• Sling Width • Sling Length • Part Number
100
NOTHING OUT-GRABS A
GRIPPER® SLING
®
Cambridge metal mesh GRIPPER Slings out-tough the
toughest loads, outwear any other sling.
Cambridge GRIPPER Slings are
strong enough to handle any-
thing you can wrap them around
and their flexible, woven wire
fabric gives you absolute grip.
They are simple to rig in either
choke or basket hitch. Rigging
and unhitching time are
reduced...there’s no need for a
two legged sling.
Lengths and widths are available

for handling a variety of loads
with a design factor of 5. GRIP-
PER Slings out-tough heavy
loads, sharp edges, rugged use.
Sunlight won’t kill them. Most
chemicals won’t touch them. Nominal
Width of
Flat, flexible metal mesh weave Sling Vertical
resists kinking, tangling and (inches) Choker (lbs.) Basket (lbs.)
twisting, and the broad bearing 2 1,600 3,200
surface is ideal for single sling 3 3,000 6,000
balance loads.
4 4,400 8,800
GRIPPER Slings conform to 6 6,600 13,200
contours of loads. Machined or 8 8,800 17,600
polished surfaces can be further 10 11,000 22,000
protected with urethane coat- 12 13,200 26,400
ings. 14 15,400 30,800
16 17,600 35,200
18 19,800 39,600
20 22,000 44,000
101
Ergonomic & Custom Lifting Devices
LAMCO Ergonomic & Custom Lifting Devices
LAMCO ERGONOMIC
&
CUSTOM LIFTING DEVICES
At LAMCO we can design and fabricate standard and special lifting

devices to meet your specific needs. We have over 20 years experi-
ence in the design and manufacture of ergonomic lifting devices. All
lifting devices are made to OSHA and ASME/ANSI specifications.
All standard hooks are made from alloy steel that is heat treated for
extra strength and durability. Heat treating is also available for other
specially designed lifting devices.
The following pages contain specifications on the standard fabricated

items that we offer. If you do not see an item that meets your specific
need, drawings are included that can be copied and used to design
lifting devices that can be specifically matched to your application.
We also offer Structural Engineering services for larger overhead lift-

ing projects such as bridge cranes or for exceptional lifting devices.
In addition to the standard fabricated products, we have included new

ergonomically designed items that are manufactured by other compa-
nies to assist you in lifting applications. These items range from job
specific lifting and positioning equipment to enclosed track bridge
crane systems and are valuable in protecting your employees from
risks due to repetitive or awkward lifts.
Our capabilities are not limited to these items only. Any time that you
have a lifting need that can not be satisfied by a standard lifting
device give us a call and together we will develop a solution to your
needs.
Thanks for your trust in LAMCO!

103
LAMCO Manufactured by LAMCO
LAMCO SPREADER BEAMS

• Ideal where headroom is not limited • Available with chain or wire rope
• Alloy swivel hooks w/latches standard • Designed/manufactured to ANSI B30.20
• Available with alternative rigging angles
for varying headroom
Crane Hook Dimensions
SPAN IN FEET
RATED CAPACITY OTHER ALLOY HOOK
3 4 6 8 10 12
(TONS)* DIMENSIONS SIZE
HEAD A = 1/2”
1
1/2 ROOM 29” 35” 47” 59” 71” 83” B = 2 1/2”
TON
@45° C = 5”
HEAD A = 1/2”
1
1 ROOM 29” 35” 47” 59” 71” 83” B = 2 1/2”
TON
@45° C = 5”
HEAD A = 1/2”
1 1/2
2 ROOM 29” 35” 47” 59” 71” 83” B = 2 1/2”
TON
@45° C = 5”
HEAD A = 3/4”
2
3 ROOM 30” 36” 48” 60” 72” 84” B = 2 3/4”
TON
@45° C = 5 1/2”
HEAD A = 3/4”
3
5 ROOM 31” 37” 49” 61” 73” 85” B = 2 3/4”
TON
@45° C = 5 1/2”
HEAD A = 1”
4 1/2
7 1/2 ROOM 33” 39” 51” 63” 76” 88” B = 3 1/2”
TON
@45° C = 7”
HEAD A = 1 1/4”
7
10 ROOM 36” 42” 54” 67” 80” 92” B = 4 3/8”
TON
@45° C = 8 3/4”
* Larger sizes available upon request
104
LAMCO MODEL LMX

LOW HEADROOM LIFTING BEAM
• Ideal where headroom is limited • Designed and manufactured to ANSI B30.20
• Alloy swivel hooks with latches • Wide range of sizes and capacities available
• Available with various bottom hooks • Structurally designed for up to 500,000 stress
cycles
Optional Ultra Low

Headroom
SPAN IN FEET
RATED CAPACITY OTHER ALLOY HOOK

3 4 6 8 10 12
(TONS)* DIMENSIONS SIZE
A = 1 1/2”
1/2
HEAD 1
12” 12” 12” 12” 13” 14” B = 3”
ROOM TON
C = 5”
A = 1 1/2”
HEAD 1
1 12” 12” 13” 14” 15” 16” B = 3”
ROOM TON
C = 5”
A = 1 1/2”
HEAD 1 1/2
2 13” 13” 14” 15” 17” 18” B = 3”
ROOM TON
C = 5”
A = 1 1/2”
HEAD 2
3 14” 15” 16” 18” 19” 20” B = 3”
ROOM TON
C = 5”
A = 1 1/2”
HEAD 3
5 18” 18” 20” 22” 22” 27” B = 4”
ROOM TON
C = 7”
A = 2”
HEAD 5
7 1/2 19” 20” 22” 23” 25” 28” B = 4”
ROOM TON
C = 7”
A = 2”
HEAD 7
10 22” 23” 25” 27” 30” 30” B = 4”
ROOM TON
C = 7”
* Larger sizes available upon request
105
HEAT TREATED ALLOY J-HOOKS
STANDARD DIMENSIONS (in.)

MATERIAL RATED
CATALOG
DIAMETER (B) (C) (D) (E) CAPACITY
NUMBER
(A) (lbs.)
1/4 LMXJH025 5 .75 1.25 .88 150

5/16 LMXJH031 5 .75 1.25 .88 250
3/8 LMXJH038 6 .75 1.50 1.13 350
1/2 LMXJH050 8 .75 2.00 1.50 650

5/8 LMXJH063 9 1.00 2.50 1.88 850
3/4 LMXJH075 10 1.00 3.00 2.25 1,000
7/8 LMXJH088 12 1.00 3.50 2.63 1,500 Special coatings and latches
1 LMXJH100 14 1.25 4.00 3.00 2,000 available
SPECIAL APPLICATION DIMENSIONS
A: DEGREES:
B:
RATED CAPACITY :
C:
RADIUS:
D:
E: STYLE:
106
HEAT TREATED ALLOY S-HOOKS
STANDARD DIMENSIONS (in.)

MATERIAL RATED
CATALOG
DIAMETER (B) (C) (D) CAPACITY
NUMBER
(A) (lbs.)
1/4 LMXSH025 2.75 .75 .75 100

5/16 LMXSH031 2.75 .75 .75 225
3/8 LMXSH038 4.13 1.13 1.13 450
1/2 LMXSH050 5.50 1.50 1.50 900

5/8 LMXSH063 7.00 1.88 1.88 1,350
3/4 LMXSH075 8.25 2.25 2.25 1,800
7/8 LMXSH088 9.50 2.63 2.63 2,400

1 LMXSH100 11.00 3.00 3.00 2,900
SPECIAL APPLICATION DIMENSIONS
A: RATED CAPACITY:
B: NOTES:
C:
D:
107
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
R1:
R2: NOTES:
W:
DIA:
ANGLE 1:
ANGLE 2:
STYLE:
RATED CAPACITY:
108
PLATE HOOK
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
W:
THK:
ANGLE 1:
ANGLE 2:
ANGLE 3:
RATED CAPACITY:
NOTES:
109
Model 82-NC – Narrow Coil “C” Hook
PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Handles narrow coils with less coil edge damage.

• More durable than web slings.
• Light weight for easier handling.
• Built in guide handle for ease of coil positioning.
• Available with optional curved coil saddle.
• Inside radius on hooks avoid coil edge contact.
• Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.
*Will not hang level when empty.
THROAT
CAUTION: Center of gravity must be
centered under crane hook to prevent
tilting of the lifter and load.
NOTE:”E” dimension equals one-half the dimension of “L”.
SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions in Inches

CAPACITY COIL LIFTING ARM PLATE BAIL DIMENSIONS
CATALOG IN WIDTH THROAT LENGTH DEPTH THK. HDRM THK. OPENING WGT.
NO. TONS MAX. L D T H A B C (LBS.)
82NC-1/2-8 1/2 8 14-1/2 8 2-1/4 1/2 18-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 14
82NC-1/2-12 12 14-1/2 12 2-5/8 1/2 18-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 17
82NC-1-8 1 8 17-1/2 8 2 1/2 21-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 15
82NC-1-16 16 17-1/2 16 2-1/2 1/2 21-1/2 13/16 2 3-1/4 20
82NC-2-8 2 8 19-1/2 8 2-1/8 3/4 24-9/16 1 2-9/16 4-1/16 22
82NC-2-16 16 19-1/2 16 3 3/4 24-9/16 1 2-9/16 4-1/16 40
82NC-3 1/2-12 12 21-1/2 12 2-7/8 1 28-1/8 1-3/16 3-5/8 5-5/16 50
3-1/2
82NC-3 1/2-16 16 21-1/2 16 3-3/8 1 28-1/8 1-3/16 3-5/8 5-5/16 63
82NC-5-16 16 25-1/2 16 3-1/2 1-1/4 32-13/16 1-1/2 4 5-13/16 94
5
82NC-5-20 20 25-1/2 20 4 1-1/4 32-13/16 1-1/2 4 5-13/16 110
110
Model 80H – Dixon Coil Hook with Pivoting Wedge
PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Easy horizontal to vertical up-ending of coils.
• Pivoting wedge for easy tilting of stacked coils.
• Wedge acts as retainer.
• Efficient and easy to use.
• Popular for use with small, light weight coils.
• For use where overhead clearance is limited.
• Specially designed heat treated pivoting wedge.
Pivot Wedge
SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions in inches

Capacity Weight
Catalog In Max. Max. Min. A B C D T W (Lbs.)
No. Tons Width Radial I.D.
80H-1/2-6/13 1/2 6 13 9 1 2 3-1/2 6 1/2 3-1/2 10
80H-1/2-12/13 1/2 12 13 13 1 2 3-1/2 6 1/2 3-1/2 20
80H-1-8/16 1 8 16 10 1 2 3-1/2 6 1/2 3-1/2 22
80H-2-10/18 2 10 18 12-1/2 1 2-1/2 4 6-3/4 3/4 2 45
80H-3.5-12/20 3-1/2 12 20 14-1/2 1-1/2 3-1/4 5-1/4 7-3/4 1 2-1/2 65
Other sizes available, contact LAMCO.
EASY HORIZONTAL TO VERTICAL MOVEMENT. DO NOT USE FOR VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT.
Providing spacer blocks With the hook in place, the Coil is in vertical position after Coil being loaded on a stock
between stacked coils permits wedge pivots as the lift is start- being lifted from its pallet. The reel. Hook is easily removed
easy insertion of the wedge. ed, and the coil begins to turn weight of the coil holds the piv- from the coil after releasing the
Light weight and pivoting to a vertical position for trans- oting wedge in the vertical posi- hoist.
wedge makes it easy to posi- porting it. tion during transportation.
tion the hook.
111
Model 82-RC – Close Stacking “C” Hook
PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Recessed Counterweight allows for close stacking of coils
which maximizes floor space.
• Handles a wide range of coil widths.
• Designed for heavy duty application.
• High tensile alloy steel plate reduces physical size and weight.
• Counter balanced to hang level.
• Inside radius on hooks avoid coil edge contact.
• Curved coil saddle is standard.
• Guide handle for ease of coil positioning.
• Available with optional padding for additional coil protection.

SPECIFICATIONS NOTE:”E” dimension is always one-half of maximum coil width.
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
CAP. LIFTING ARM BAIL DIMENSIONS
CATALOG IN COIL WIDTH THROAT LENGTH DEPTH WIDTH HDRM OPENING THK. WGT.
NO. TONS MAX. MIN. L D W H A B C T (LBS.)
82RC-5-36 36 24 24 30 5-5/16 4 37-1/4 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/4 550
82RC-5-48 5 48 30 24 39 6-1/8 4 38-1/16 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/4 707
82RC-5-60 60 36 24 48 6-15/16 4 38-15/16 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/4 853
82RC-7 1/2-36 36 24 24 30 5-5/8 4 37-1/2 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/2 750
82RC-7 1/2-48 7-1/2 48 30 24 39 6-3/8 4 38-1/4 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/2 996
82RC-7 1/2-60 60 36 24 48 6-15/16 4 39 1-1/2 4 7 1-1/2 1161
82RC-10-48 48 30 24 39 7-3/16 4 41-1/4 2 5 9 1-3/4 1200
82RC-10-60 10 60 36 24 48 7-5/8 4 41-1/2 2 5 9 1-3/4 1645
82RC-10-72 72 42 24 57 7-1/4 4 41-1/8 2 5 9 1-3/4 2100
82RC-15-48 48 30 30 39 7-1/4 4 47-7/8 2-1/4 5 9 1-3/4 2054
82RC-15-60 15 60 36 30 48 8 4 48 2-1/4 5 9 1-3/4 2410
82RC-15-72 72 42 30 57 8-3/4 4 48-3/4 2-1/4 5 9 1-3/4 2814
82RC-20-60 60 36 30 48 9-1/8 4 52-1/8 2-1/4 6 12 2 2864
82RC-20-72 20 72 42 30 57 9-3/4 4 52-1/2 2-1/4 6 12 2 2951
82RC-25-60 60 36 34 48 9 4 57-3/4 2-1/2 6 14 2-1/4 3077
82RC-25-72 25 72 42 34 57 9-3/4 4 58-3/4 2-1/2 6 14 2-1/4 3570
82RC-30-60 60 36 34 48 9-7/8 4 58-3/4 2-3/4 6 14 2-1/2 3480
82RC-30-72 30 72 42 34 57 10-5/8 4 59-3/8 2-3/4 6 14 2-1/2 4260
82RC-40-72 40 72 42 38 57 11 5 68 3-1/4 7 18 3 6100
Counter weight extends beyond arm one-half of the counter weight width, in capacities 25 Ton and Greater.
112
Model 90 – Standard Fixed Forks Pallet Lifter
PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Converts overhead crane to lift truck.
• Maintenance free.
• Allows for ease of loading/unloading in not easily accessi-
ble areas.
Cap. Dimensions in Inches

Catalog In Forks Bail Reach Wgt.
No. Tons A B C D E F G H J K (Lbs.)
90-1-36 1 36 2 2 25 18 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 370
90-1-42 1 42 2 2 25 21 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 392
90-1-48 1 48 2 2 25 24 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 405
90-1 1/2-36 1-1/2 36 3 2 25 18 1 3 5 48 60-1/2 410
90-1 1/2-42 1-1/2 42 3 2 25 21 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 601
90-1 1/2-48 1-1/2 48 3 2 25 24 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 628
90-2-36 2 36 3 2 25 18 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 564
90-2-42 2 42 4 2 25 21 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 661
90-2-48 2 48 4 2 25 24 1 3 5 48 61-1/2 692
90-3-42 3 42 4-1/2 2-1/2 25 21 1-1/2 4 7 48 64 725
90-3-48 3 48 4-1/2 2-1/2 27 24 1-1/2 4 7 48 65 910
90-3-54 3 54 4-1/2 2-1/2 30 27 1-1/2 4 7 48 65 965
90-4-48 4 48 5 3 27 24 1-1/2 4 7 48 66-1/2 1186
90-4-60 4 60 5 3 30 30 1-1/2 4 7 60 78-1/2 1580
90-5-48 5 48 5 3 30 24 1-1/2 4 7 48 68-1/2 1522
90-5-60 5 60 4-1/2 2-1/2 38 30 1-1/2 4 7 60 80-1/2 2094
Model 95 – Heavy Duty Fixed Forks Pallet Lifter

PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Double frame design for heavy capacities.

• Maintenance free.
SPECIFICATIONS
Cap. Dimensions in Inches
Catalog In Forks Bail Reach
Wgt.
No. Tons A B C D E F G H J K (Lbs.)
95-7 1/2-48 7-1/2 48 6 2-1/2 30 24 2 5 9 48 65 1910
95-7 1/2-60 7-1/2 60 10 3 38 30 2 5 9 60 79 2000
95-10-48 10 48 10 3 30 24 2 5 9 48 69 1950
95-10-60 10 60 12 3 38 30 2 5 9 60 81 2500
95-15-48 15 48 7-1/4 3 38 24 2 6 12 60 84 2250
95-15-60 15 60 10 3 38 30 2 6 12 60 75 3800
95-20-60 20 60 7 4 38 30 2-1/4 6 12 60 88 4300

113
Model 88 – Heavy Duty Coil Upender
PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Fast and convenient way to upend coils to 90°.

• Heavy Duty disc brake will stop load in any position.
• Reversing magnetic starter with 115 volt pendant control.
• Stop travel/over travel limit switches.
PRODUCT OPTIONS:
• Larger platforms available.

• V Block, either standard or faced.
• 180° horizontal rotation which permits loading, and unload-
ing from same side.
• Fork lift truck pick-up pockets.
Shown with V Block Option
NOTE: If load is not

a coil, specify cen-
Overall Height:
ter of gravity of load A+C=D
being rotated.
SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

CAPACITY PLATFORM HEIGHT BASE
CATALOG IN LENGTH WIDTH PLATFORM OVERALL LENGTH WIDTH OVERALL WGT
NO. TONS A B C D E F G (LBS.)
88-1-36 1 36 36 24* 60 48 36 51 1,500
88-2-36 2 36 36 24* 60 48 36 51 1,600
88-3-42 3 42 42 24* 66 56 42 60 2,000
88-4-42 4 42 42 24* 66 56 42 60 2,200
88-5-48 5 48 48 30 78 61 48 66 2,750
88-7 1/2-48 7-1/2 48 48 30 78 61 48 66 2,900
88-10-54 10 54 54 30 84 60 55 74 3,700
88-12 1/2-54 12-1/2 54 54 36 90 69 55 74 4,000
88-15-60 15 60 60 36 96 73 60 80 4,500
88-20-60 20 60 60 36 96 73 60 80 6,200
88-25-72 25 72 72 43 115 88 72 96 10,000
88-30-72 30 72 72 48 120 88 72 96 12,000
* Platform over 42” x 42” will have height of 30”. Pallets must not extend over platform sides.
114
Model 60 – Heavy Duty Sheet Lifters
PRODUCT FEATURES:
• Versatile handling of bundled, sheets, plates and other
materials stacked horizontally.
• Low headroom design for optimum lifting capabilities.
• One person operation minimizes handling cost.
• Self-locking worm-gear for leg adjustment drive is stan-
dard.
• Easy adjustment for different sheet widths.
• Rack and pinion leg drive.
• Designed for ease of maintenance.
B T • Designed for greater sheet width range.
A • Designed and manufactured to ASME B30.20.
PRODUCT OPTIONS:
• Hand Wheel lockout.
C • Motorized leg adjustment.
• Chain-wheel leg adjustment.
• Extended length hand wheel leg adjustment.
• End chains with plate hooks (recommended for all widths
72” and greater).
• Extended grabshoe lengths available.
• Additional bundle clearance available (longer legs).
SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions in Inches

Catalog Cap. In Bundle Width Hdrm. Shoe Min. Bail Opening (in.) Wt.
No. Tons Min. Max. H D Aisle A B C T (Lbs.)
60-3-48 16 48 975
60-3-60 3 16 60 28 2.63 9 1.5 3 5 .75 1010
60-3-72 16 72 1040
60-5-48 16 48 1125
60-5-60 16 60 1170
60-5-72 5 16 72 29 2.63 9 2 4 6 1 1220
60-5-84 16 84 1270
60-5-96 16 96 1550
60-10-48 16 48 1510
60-10-60 16 60 1570
60-10-72 10 16 72 30 3.5 11 2 4 7 1.5 1640
60-10-84 16 84 1700
60-10-96 16 96 1770
60-15-48 16 48 1570
60-15-60 16 60 1640
60-15-72 15 16 72 32 3.5 12 2.5 5 9 1.5 1700
60-15-84 38 84 1960
60-15-96 38 96 2030
60-15-94 38 94 32 3.5 12 2.5 5 9 1.5 1960
CAUTION: Exceptionally thin or oiled sheets could pose a handling problem. Other sizes available, contact LAMCO.
115
The Custom Source
Positech builds the largest selection of lifting and positioning equipment in the industry. All models are
available in floor mount or space-saving overhead mount. Each can be hydraulically, electrically or
pneumatically powered. If our standard models don't meet your needs, customized manipulators can be
built to your specifications.
• Taurus™ • SAM™ (Simple Air

Designed to emulate the human
• LodeArm™ and
arm, Positech's high-capacity
Manipulator) LodeArm™ II
Taurus positioning arm (TPA) For jobs that require the compliance
Our LodeArm and LodeArm II
handles the heaviest loads with and float of a pneumatic manipulator,
lightweight manipulators provide
precision - up to 1,500 pounds. this machine gives the highest level
excellent maneuverability of pay-
of feel to position the payload..
loads up to 225 pounds, increas-
Positech's SAM uses pneumatic
ing employees' capacity to per-
power to provide quick response and
form physically stressful, repeti-
superior maneuverability with loads
tive lifting tasks.
up to 900 pounds.
• Transfer Arm™
Incorporates the low headroom
flexibility of the Articulated Jib
Boom combined with the straight
vertical lift of the Vertical Lift
Cylinder. Positech's low-profile • AJB (Articulated Jib
Transfer Arm allows placement in
areas too confined to accommo-
Boom)
date larger material handling equip-
Designed for low headroom • Vertical Lift Cylinder
operations and to maneuver With up to 6,000-pounds capaci-
ment and handles loads up to 500
around work-area obstructions, ty, Positech's Vertical Lift Cylinder
pounds.
our standard models support up is ideal for straight line transfer,
to 2,000 pounds and allow 360° over-the-assembly line handling
rotation around the main post. and reach-in operations when
combined with overhead rail sys-
tem or a Positech Articulated Jib
Boom.
The World Manipulator combines the strength

• ReactionArm® of the Taurus and the agility of the SAM while
Positech's ReactionArm absorbs incorporating metric specifications for easy
shock, torsional forces, and impact service anywhere in the world. Designed for low
force from power tools; therefore • World headroom applications that require extended
reducing carpal tunnel injury and reach. Handles loads up to 200 kilograms
cumulative trauma disorders. Manipulator™ (440bs).
117
GCI
“Lifting Solutions”
Leading the Industry in Design Flexibility
• Manipulator Arms • Jib Cranes • End of Hook Handling Devices • Roll Handlers
• Custom Engineered End Effectors • Anti-torque Arms • Tool Balancing Arms
GCI Manipulator Arms have virtually unlimited applications with ends specifically designed
to your needs. Use for off center loads, reaching in or under and to keep work pieces square
and stable.
Manual, Air or Electric Powered Arms
Expanding Probes
Low profile roll handler with

expanding probe to handle
Overhead mounted roll 3” or 6” cores.
handler on lightweight Expanding probes for roll
aluminum bridge crane handling or other ID gripper
for large work areas. applications. Optional 3”/6”
probe shown with power tilt
Power Grippers Vacuum Ends
High overhead clearance

Optional stainless steel Multi-cup vacuum with arm with vacuum head and
power gripper for wash power tilt. Non-tilting 180° power flip to allow full
Overhead fixed or track down application. inspection and secondary
vacuum applications are
mounted drum lifter. work. Tilt ranges from 0° to
also quite common with
With or without rotation 180° can be easily attained.
both venturi and blower
for controlled content Tilts beyond 180° can also
vacuum sources.
emptying. Floor mount- be designed.
ing also available.
Torque Balancers and Anti-Torque Arms

Other Options:
Heavy Duty Free
• Parking Brakes
Standing or • Balance Control
Overhead Mount • 360° Manifold
Optional Portable Base
118
119
Max air balancer
CM offers precise positioning or repetitive transferring of loads as heavy
as 600 pounds. With up to 8" of float, the operator can position the load
easily and precisely by hand.
• Limitless start/stop cycles for reliable performance and productivity

• Exclusive lost load protection system
• Extra safety with exclusive lock out-tag out device that makes the
balancer inoperable in the event of damage or required maintenance
• Unique pressure compensated flow control maintains lifting speed
Pendant
regardless of fluctuations in plant air pressure
control
• Chain lift eliminates spinning or fraying plus delivers long wear life
• 18 pocket liftwheel for smooth balancer operation
• True vertical chain travel (80" max.)
• Ergonomic pendant control station
• Forged steel latch type lower hook with bearing
for free rotation
• Supplied complete with chain container for loose end chain
• Optional Series 0980 low headroom trolley to operate 25/8" through 55/8"
flange beams
• Optional Latchlok hook
• Optional balance control for full 8 feet float capabilities
• Operates on 90 P.S.I. plant air, not 100 P.S.I.
like comparable units
• Standard pendant drop 9'-6"
• Made in U.S.A.
CM Max balancer specifications

Product Rated capacity* Control Working range Reach Net weight
code (lbs.) options (in.)** (in.)† (lbs.)††
0950 120 Pendant control 80 144 60
0953 120 Balance control 80 144 60
0947 120 Dual balance 80 144 60
0948 200 Dual balance 80 144 68
0949 300 Dual balance 80 144 86
** Working range: Vertical lift from the hook in the lowest position to the hook in the highest position.
† Reach: Vertical distance from the bottom of the balancer to the hook in the lowest position. Actual reach may be adjusted at installation
and under no circumstances should it be less than 84 inches.
†† Weights listed are for units with pendant controls and do not include the low headroom trolley or suspension plate.
For units with balance control, reduce the listed weights by 4 lbs.
120
Max air balancer
5.00
3.94 6.50
.88
3.12 dia.
.06 minimum with wheel tread Low headroom
a S4 x 7.7 lb. trolley (optional)
beam.
Clearance will be
50
greater for larger
to bottom
S-beams.
of slot .37 min.
2.00
A**** 3/8 NPT air inlet port
B 3.62 1.00
D 8.00 dia. M10 x 1.5-6g socket
head cap screw &
*81 up
lockwasher. Two of
161 down 10.69 each are furnished.
Suspension slot
1.06 deep, .51 wide.
*72 up
152 down
3/8 NPT auxiliary port
1.00
.62
10.38
.84 2.69
C
Max clearance dimensions (in.)

Rated A**** D
Latchlok
capacity**
(lbs.)
headroom
(in.)
B
(in.)
C
(in.)
diameter
(in.)
hook
120 18.85 2.00 20.33 7.75
(optional)
1.37
200 18.85 1.38 20.33 9.63
300 18.85 .38 20.45 11.63
500 18.85 .38 31.00 11.63
120 extended lift*** 18.85 2.00 26.70 7.75
200 extended lift*** 18.85 1.38 26.70 9.63
300 extended lift*** 18.85 .38 27.70 11.63
Note: Dimensions are in inches. Double reeved units available in all models except 500 lb. Double
reeving does not change down dimension as supplied; it doubles the capacity of the unit, and
decreases vertical travel by half.
* Nominal dimension based on the standard length of chain supplied with the
CM Max. The chain may be shortened by the customer.
** 90 psi air input is required to operate at the rated capacity.
*** Extended lift provides 130" of lift.
**** Headroom with chain shortened to minimum allowed in up position and with optional low
headroom trolley as shown. Headroom will be 2.5" longer with optional double reeve. To get
the down dimension add 80" to the up dimension for the standard max and 130" for the
extended lift (add half of this dimension for double reeved). Headroom may vary depending
on mounting bracket and truck used.
* WARNING
Overloading and improper use can result in injury.
To avoid injury:
• Do not exceed working load limit, load rating capacity
• Do not use to lift people or loads over people.
• use only alloy chain for overhead lifting.
• Read and follow all instructions.
121
• Swivel Hook
Tool Balancers • Push Button
Tool Balancers are the economical choice for balancing heavy • Safety Cable
tools. The molded plastic housing has a smooth exterior with Provision
rounded edges for maximum ergonomic convenience. Hand- • Rotate Clockwise
windable spring tension adjustment knob is flush with the to Increase Tension
housing. Push-button tension release simplifies decrease in
tension. Adjustment screw adds drag to spool for fine tuning • Adjustable Safety
of tension. Rugged steel upper swivel hook. Oversized cable Stop
opening with direct in-line pull to reduce cable wear.
Adjustable cable stop and lower safety snap hook. Spring
operation - no electricity needed.
• Snap Hook
Load Arrestor
3700300
Protect valuable equipment and materials with DBI/SALA's sturdy, self-con-

tained backup load arrestors. They are designed and engineered to com-
pletely stop a dropping load if it breaks free from the main support unit.
#3700300 Load Arrestor’s maximum load is 660 lbs., length of cable is 40 ft.
Other models are available for loads up to 2,200 lbs. and lengths of 8 ft. to 99 ft.
All models have the following features:
• Inertia activated brake with brake indicator button
• Shock absorbing system
• 3/16" self retracting steel cable
• Meets or exceeds all applicable industry standards including OSHA and ANSI
Similar Models:
3700400 : 880 lb. capacity, 26' of cable

3700801 : 1,760 lb. capacity, 13' of cable
3700501 : 1,100 lb. capacity, 17' of cable
122
TMM-140
Air Manipulator Hoist
300 Lb./140Kg Air Manipulator Hoist Ideal Applications Include:
The CM TMM-140 is ideal for workstation applications. • Assembly lines

Lightweight and portable, the unit weighs less than 20
pounds and operates at 100% (A5) duty cycle. • Machine shops
• Smooth operator - Efficient rotary vane motor provides
high uniform torque for quick response, and smooth, • Cleaning and/or dipping
quiet operation. operations
• Easy to use - Handle-mounted pendant control for • Manufacturing plants

one-handed operation and load positioning.
• Power generating stations
• Variable speeds - Precise and infinite speed control
for accurate load spotting.
• Shipping departments
• Wire rope design - Self-winding lifting cable stores
conveniently inside unit. • Chemical facilities
• Suspension - Swivel top and bottom hooks with hook
• Fabricating shops
latches standard, for portability and quick installation.
• Disc brake - Secures load and eliminates drift when • Repetitive lifting applications
pendant is released.
• Auto and truck repair
• Note - A 3/8" NPT air filter-regulator-lubricator is needed for
effective operation. Spark resistant features are not available.
• Handling fixtures and dies
Specifications:
Lift speeds (FPM)

Std. Air consumption Housing dimen. (in.) Max air Net
Capacity Model Product lift Load No load Headroom pres. wt.
(lb.) number code (ft.) (up) (Down) (up) (Down) (m /min)
3
(ft /min) (in.)
3
D W L (psi) (lb.)
300 TMM-140 17050W 6' 6" 36 59 49 39 0.6 21/ 2 223/ 4 72/ 3 77/ 8 233/ 4 70-95 18.7
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
123
124
®
Posi-Turner Load Rotation Systems
Suspends and rotates objects 360 degrees or more with controlled rotation.
PRODUCT FEATURES:
Applications for the Posi-Turner® are endless.
Some common applications are:
• Composite Molds
• Fabrication & Assembly
• Materials/Metal Handling
• Machining
• Die & Mold Maintenance
• Assembly Line
• Mold Production Removal
• Inspection & Repair
125
FREE STANDING
WORKSTATION
JIB CRANES Cost-effective Solutions
For Lifting and Moving
Heavy Material
ENCLOSED TRACK WORKSTATION JIB CRANES
FREESTANDING
• SPANCO can custom design and manufacture

jib cranes for any application.
• SPANCO freestanding 360° rotation
workstation jib cranes are an ideal,
lightweight ergonomic solution for
smaller capacity loads up to 1,000 lbs.,
spans to 16 ft. Lightweight boom
design makes the jib easier to rotate
and position.
Counterweight Bases
Portable counterweight bases are available for freestanding
workstation jibs, which allows the jib to be moved by fork lift
anywhere in the facility.
• Available in capacities to 500 lbs.
and spans to 16 ft., depending on combination of span and capacity.
• Portable cranes eliminate the need for unnecessary hoisting
equipment. One unit can service multiple areas.
126
WORKSTATION
JIB CRANES
WALL MOUNTED
WALL MOUNTED
• SPANCO’s
wall mounted
200° rotation
enclosed track
workstation jib
cranes can be tie rod
supported for the lowest cost or
compression braced for maximum
head room.
• Tie rod supported models can be
fabricated with trussed track for spans
up to 34 ft.
WARNING:
Jib cranes should not be hung from any existing building structure without first consulting a qualified architect or engi-
neer for the purpose of determining if the structure is adequate. Severe bodily injury and property damage can result
if this procedure is not followed.
127
CEILING MOUNTED
WORKSTATION
BRIDGE CRANES
SOLVING YOUR MATERIAL HANDLING PROBLEMS WITH
CEILING MOUNTED WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES
standard bridge lengths to 34' Available

custom designs available
Capacities (lbs)
250
500
1,000
2,000
4,000
Pre-engineered
trolley clevis height above floor
determined by ceiling structure system kit.
Everything
supplied except
standard runway lengths to 103'
hoist and sway
bracing.
standard capacities to 2 tons
SPANCO ceiling mounted workstation bridge cranes provide ideal, cost effective
material handling solutions…
• If work floor space is limited: Ceiling mounted systems provide infinite coverage without interfering support
columns. Systems can be linked to a monorail or another bridge crane using crane interlock sections.
• Easy, ergonomic movement: An operator pushing a 1000 lb. load, will experience a force of approximately 10 lb.
to begin moving the load and 8 lb. to continue moving the load (100 to 1 ratio). Manual cranes also operate
more quickly than motorized cranes making them ideal for fast paced work environments.
However, if the application requires moving heavier loads up to two tons or bridge travel over an inaccessible area,
then a motorized system can be used efficiently. SPANCO can provide motorized systems in 1,000, 2,000
and 4,000 lb. capacities.
Ceiling mounted systems are supported by the building structure. A qualified architect or engineer should be consult-
ed to determine the adequacy of the building structure intended to support the crane system.
128
DETERMINING CAPACITY,
WIDTH, LENGTH, AND HEIGHT
• Capacity: Load weights should be predetermined in order to avoid buying extra, unneeded capacity. Bridge
dead weight will add more weight to the load the operator will be moving.
• Width: Bridge span is the length of a bridge between centers of two runways. SPANCO’s standard design pro-
vides a standard bridge overhang of 12 in. on each end beyond the runway centerline. Bridge length is the
overall length.
• Length: Runway length is determined by the length of a specific area requiring coverage. Runways are support-
ed on maximum 20, 25, or 30 ft. support centers. Plain track runways are supported every 6 ft. for 400, 500,
600, and 900 series and every 9 ft. for 700 series.
• Height: In order to attain minimal resistance, it is recommended that the trolley clevis height be kept as low as
possible, with practical consideration given to minimum headroom requirements. Height is measured from the
floor to the trolley clevis from which a hoist is suspended.
DESIGN FACTORS
• Nameplate bridge capacity represents the rated load on the hoist hook. The load rating of a hoist shall not exceed
the bridge rating. SPANCO’s design includes an allowance of 15% of nameplate capacity for dead weight of the trol-
ley and hoist. An additional allowance of 25% of nameplate capacity is also included for impact.
SERVICE FACTOR
All SPANCO workstation cranes are designed for frequent usage (heavy service) as defined:
• System or equipment is used where operational time is up to 100% of the work period and lifted load is at 50% or
below rated capacity.
• System or equipment is used where operational time is less than 50% of work period and lifted load is greater than
50% of rated capacity.
• Applications involving vacuums, magnets, or other high impact lifters are considered severe usage (continuous
service) and require special design considerations. Please contact factory for special design pricing.
• Consult factory for usage other than moderate and all instances of high cycle rates or high impact applications such
as high speed air or electric hoists, vacuum lifters, or magnets. FACTORY MUST APPROVE ALL SUCH
APPLICATIONS.
129
Telescoping Bridges
• Provide extended reach to areas beyond a column or

under mezzanines or shelving; a neighboring worksta-
tion; or into a specific area or opening requiring coverage.
TELESCOPING
SYSTEM
• Steel anti-kickup wheels prevent bridge binding, ensur-
ing smooth movement.
• Range in capacities up to 2000 lb. For specific applications, consult factory for an engineered solution.
Cantilevered Bridges
CANTILEVERED • One or both ends of the crane bridge can be can-

SYSTEM tilevered beyond the standard 12 in. overhang in order to
cover a wider area.
• For specific applications, consult factory for an engi-

neered solution.
TRUSSED
CANTILEVERED
SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION CHARTS
SPANCO ceiling mounted bridge crane dimensional charts are organized according to the length of the
maximum support centers for each runway. Generally, considering the following points is helpful for determining spe-
cific runway support centers:
• The size of the building or specific area requiring coverage: Will the system cover the full building
perimeter or a smaller specific area within a building?
• Location of fixed structures such as machinery, building columns, overhead lighting, and fixtures.
• Specific logistics of the area requiring coverage: Is the system moving material to an assembly line, into storage,
or from one workstation to another?
CONSIDERATIONS FOR PLAIN TRACK

• Maximum runway support centers are 6 feet for 400, 500, 600, and 900 series track. Support centers Are 9 feet
for 700 series track.
• Specific headroom requirements: Runways can be flush mounted to overhead building steel if conditions permit,
allowing the lowest possible headroom constraint.
CONSIDERATIONS FOR TRUSSED TRACK

• Maximum runway support centers are 20, 25, and 30 feet.
• Specific headroom requirements: 20 ft. runway support centers allow for runway trusses with the shortest depth,
maximizing headroom space under the hoist.
130
™ CEILING MOUNTED WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES
B/R ASSEMBLY
(BRH)
BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN) ROOF BEAM OR OTHER STRUCTURE (BY
OTHERS) SPECIFY WHEN ORDERING
(BH) RUNWAY TRUSS OR

PLAINTRACK, END
TROLLEY (DIMENSIONS TRUCK, & TRUSS
TROLLEY CLEVIS HT. (TCH)

BASED ON STANDARD) (C) HANGERS
BRIDGE HOOK BRIDGE FESTOON BRIDGE HOOK

APPROACH 1 (BHA APPROACH 2 (BHA 2)
1)
BRIDGE SPAN (BS)
2" SIDE BRIDGE LENGTH (BL) 2" SIDE
CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
CLEAR SPAN (CS)
TRUSSED TRACK RUNWAY

12" TO 54" (STANDARD FESTOON TRACK 4' - 0" MAXIMUM
1' - 2 3/16"
(STD)
EXTENSIONS) SPECIAL LENGTHS AVAILABLE CANTILEVER
B/R ASSEMBLY
1' - 6" SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C) 1' - 6"

(BRH)
FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE) BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN) SPLICE PLATES
@ LONGER
RUNWAY TRUSS RUNWAYS
(RH)
END TRUCK
TROLLEY (DIMENSIONS
BASED ON STANDARD) (C) END STOPS (OR

RUNWAY FESTOON CONTINUES TO BRIDGE TRACK SPLICE
FESTOON & HOIST @ LONGER
TO POWER RUNWAYS)
SUPPLY RUNWAY HOOK
RUNWAY HOOK
APPROACH (RHA)
APPROACH (RHA)
RUNWAY LENGTH (RL) STANDARD UP TO 103'
(LONGER RUNWAYS AVAILABLE)
PLAIN TRACK RUNWAY

FSA 1' 0" MAXIMUM
CANTILEVER
B/R ASSEMBLY
1' 0" MAXIMUM SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C) 1' 0"

(BRH)
(STD)
1' - 5 3/8"
FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE) BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN)
END TRUCK
TROLLEY (DIMENSIONS
BASED ON STANDARD) (C) END STOPS (OR

TRACK SPLICE @
RUNWAY FESTOON CONTINUES TO BRIDGE LONGER RUNWAYS)
TO POWER FESTOON & HOIST RUNWAY HOOK
SUPPLY RUNWAY HOOK APPROACH (RHA)
APPROACH (RHA)
RUNWAY LENGTH (RL) STANDARD UP TO 103'

(LONGER RUNWAYS AVAILABLE)
C = TROLLEY DIMENSION (bottom of the bridge to trolley clevis) BH = BRIDGE HEIGHT RH = RUNWAY HEIGHT
131
CEILING MOUNTED WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES
END APPROACH
Applies to all runway lengths up to 103'
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR CEILING MOUNTED KITS

SPANCO Ceiling Mounted Workstation Bridge Crane kits include:
BRIDGE KITS
1. Plain bridge, tube reinforced bridge, or trussed bridge as required
2. Hoist trolley
3. Bridge end stops
4. Festoon cable with trolleys
5. End trucks
RUNWAY KITS
1. Hangers
2. Runway end stops
3. Festoon cables with trolleys
4. Standard festoon track extension
5. Plain or trussed runways
• Ceiling mounted system kits include appropriate number of hanger rods, hangers, adjustable beam clamps, and track support
brackets.
• Ceiling mounted system kits do not include hoist or required sway bracing.
• All ceiling mounted systems must be properly braced to existing structure using proper sway bracing. To achieve desired rigidi-
ty for specific application, SPANCO recommends consulting a professional architect or engineer in your local area to satisfy
all codes and ordinances.
• Dimensions shown are approximate and subject to change without notice. All catalog dimensions are developed using stan-
dard components for the spans and capacities required. Substitution of optional trolleys or other components will affect cer-
tain dimensions. If specific clearances are required, specify at time of order.
BRIDGE CRANE KITS & CEILING MOUNTED KITS

CUSTOMER: STANDARD SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C):
TRACK SERIES: CAPACITY: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C1):
NUMBER OF UNITS: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C2):
TROLLEY CLEVIS HT. (TCH): RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C3):
CEILING HEIGHT: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C4):
BRIDGE / RUNWAY RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C5):
MODEL NUMBER: HANGER ROD LENGTH:
BRIDGE LENGTH (BL): ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:
CLEAR SPAN (CS): FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE):
OVERALL RUNWAY LENGTH (RL): FESTOON CABLE LENGTH (FCL):
132
STAND ALONE
WORKSTATION
BRIDGE CRANES
standard bridge lengths to 34' Available
custom designs available
Capacities (lbs)
250
500
1,000
2,000
4,000
standard heights
10' - 12' - 14' Pre-engineered
system kit.
Everything
standard runway lengths to 124'
supplied except
hoist and sway
standard capacities to 2 tons bracing.
SOLVING YOUR MATERIAL HANDLING PROBLEMS WITH

STAND ALONE WORKSTATION BRIDGE CRANES
SPANCO stand alone workstation bridge cranes provide ideal, cost effective material handling solutions…
If you rent your building: Stand alone systems do not become a permanent part of a structure once
installed, allowing for relocation.
Your structural building support is inadequate for an overhead ceiling mounted crane: The only
mounting requirement is a standard concrete building floor (in most cases).
A specific area needs coverage, however you don’t want to tie up your existing overhead crane:
Stand alone SPANCO workstation bridge crane systems can provide coverage for individual work areas.
133
DETERMINING CAPACITY,
WIDTH, LENGTH, AND HEIGHT
• Capacity: Load weights should be predetermined in order to avoid buying extra, unneeded capacity.
Bridge dead weight will add more weight to the load the operator will be moving.
• Width: Bridge span is the length of a bridge between centers of two runways. SPANCO’s standard design
provides a standard bridge overhang of 12 in. on each end beyond the runway centerline. Bridge length
is the overall length.
• Length: Runway length is determined by the length of a specific area requiring coverage. Runways are
supported on maximum 20, 25, or 30 ft. support centers.
• Height: In order to attain minimal resistance, it is recommended that the trolley clevis height be kept as
low as possible, with practical consideration given to minimum headroom requirements. Height is meas-
ured from the floor to the trolley clevis from which a hoist is suspended. The specification charts give the
overall height of each system.

B/R ASSEMBLY
HEADER
(BRH)
(HDR)
HEADER LENGTH (HL)

BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN)
RUNWAY
TRUSS,
TROLLEY (DIMENSIONS END TRUCK,
BASED ON STANDARD) & TRUSS
HANGERS
OVERALL HEIGHT (OAH)
BRIDGE FESTOON
BHA 1 BHA 2
1' - 0" BRIDGE SPAN (BS) 1' - 0"

2" BRIDGE LENGTH (BL) 2"
COLUMN CENTERS (C/C)
COLUMN CLEAR SPAN (CS) COLUMN

SLAB OR
FOUNDATION
DESIGN NOT
BY SPANCO
OVERALL WIDTH (OAW) AT BASE
134
FESTOON TRACK
EXTENSION (FTE) 12" TO 54" (STANDARD FESTOON TRACK EXTENSIONS, SPECIAL LENGTHS AVAILABLE)
4' - 0" MAXIMUM
B/R ASSEMBLY
CANTILEVER
HEADER
COLUMN SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C)

(BRH)
1' - 6"
(HDR)
FTE 1' - 6"

BRIDGE (TRUSS TYPE SHOWN)
SPLICE PLATES
RUNWAY TRUSS @ LONGER
RUNWAYS
END TRUCK
TROLLEY (DIMENSIONS
BASED ON STANDARD)
END STOPS
CONTINUES TO BRIDGE (OR TRACK
TO POWER RUNWAY FESTOON FESTOON & HOIST SPLICE @
SUPPLY LONGER
RUNWAYS)
RHA
RHA
RUNWAY LENGTH (RL)
STANDARD UP TO 103'
(LONGER RUNWAYS
COLUMN AVAILABLE)
COLUMN
SLAB OR
FOUNDATION DESIGN
NOT BY SPANCO
RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (SEE CHARTS) S/C1, S/C2, S/C3,

SPECIFY S/C1, S/C2, S/C3, ETC. FOR CUSTOM PRODUCTS S/C4, S/C5, ETC.
SPECIFY IF NON-STANDARD
BRIDGE CRANE KITS & STAND ALONE KITS

CUSTOMER: OVERALL RUNWAY LENGTH(RL):
TRACK SERIES: CAPACITY: STANDARD SUPPORT CENTERS(S/C):
NUMBER OF UNITS: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C1):
TROLLEY CLEVIS HT. (TCH): RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C2):
BRIDGE / RUNWAY: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C3):
MODEL NUMBER: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C4):
RUNWAY SUPPORT ASSEMBLY: RUNWAY SUPPORT CENTERS (S/C5):
MODEL NUMBER: OVERALL HEIGHT (OAH):
BRIDGE LENGTH(BL): ELECTRICAL REQMNTS:
CLEAR SPAN (CS): FESTOON TRACK EXTENSION (FTE):
OVERALL WIDTH (OAW): FESTOON CABLE LENGTH (FCL):
135
END APPROACH
Applies to all runway lengths up to 108'
COLUMN DETAILS COLUMN

COLUMN
COL. + 3"
COL. + 3"
COLUMN
COL. + 2"
COL. + 5"
COL. + 6"
COL. + 5"
BASE DETAIL “A” BASE DETAIL “B” BASE DETAIL “C”

125# CAP. w/ 3" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH) 250# CAP. w/ 4" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH) 1000# CAP. w/5" COLS. (14 TCH)
250# CAP. w/ 3" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH) 500# CAP. w/ 4" COLS. (10', 12', 14' TCH) 2000# CAP. w/5" COLS. (10', 12',14' TCH)
500# CAP. w/ 3" COLS. (10' TCH)
1000# CAP. w/4" COLS. (10', 12' TCH)
4000# CAP. w/7" COLS. (10', 12',14' TCH)
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR STAND ALONE KITS

SPANCO Stand Alone Workstation Bridge Crane kits include:
1. Plain, reinforced, or trussed crane bridge with end trucks
2. Hoist trolley
3. Runway support columns
4. Runway trusses
5. Header beams
6. Hanger clamps, end stops, and flat wire electrification festooning system for both runway and bridge
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:
• Bracing to building steel for lateral and longitudinal stability required (furnished by others). To achieve desired rigidity for an application,
SPANCO recommends consulting a professional engineer in your area to satisfy all codes and ordinances.
• Four 3/4" diameter anchor bolts required per column (furnished by others).
• Hoist supplied by others.
OTHER SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS:
• Per SPANCO’s design standard, at maximum load conditions, deflection is restricted to approximately 1/450 of span. SPANCO can
design to meet any higher customer standard.
• SPANCO Stand Alone Workstations are for frequent usage in a normal industrial environment.
• Maximum support spacing for trussed track at rated capacity shall not exceed:
400 Series = 20' or 25' 700 Series = 20', 25', or 30'
500 Series = 20', 25', or 30' 900 Series = 20' or 25'
600 Series = 20', 25', or 30'
• Dimensions shown are approximate and are subject to change without notice. All catalog dimensions are developed using standard
components for the spans and capacities required. Substitution of optional trolleys or other components will affect certain dimensions if
specific clearances are required at the time of order.
136
Chain Hoist
FEATURES
FE
EATURE AND BENEFITS
Overload
Ov
verload Pr
Protection This is standard on all hoists and is factory set. The
overload is integral with the hoist and prevents the
operator from overloading the hoist. When activated, the
overload will not allow hoist operation. When the overload
is activated, lower the load, if lifting, or release the load,
if pulling. Then select a larger capacity hoist, or consult a
lifting specialist for another means of operation.
M inimal Load
Minimal Loa Lifting These hoists require 20% - 30% less effort than the
Ef
ffort
Effort competition. Lift heavy loads with ease. Ideal for frequent
lifting/pulling applications.
Fu
ully Enclosed
Fully Enclos Gearing This protects the gears from contamination and debris.
Al
ll Steel Construction
All Co These hoists are strong, durable and rugged, providing a
long and dependable service life.
M alleable H
Malleable Hooks with These hooks open when overloaded, thus providing the
Ca
ast Steel S
Cast Safety operator with a hook load reference point. Each heavy duty
La
atches
Latches cast steel safety latch has a bolt and lock nut connection
rather than roller pins used by most competitors. This
feature facilitates changing latches in the field.
W
Weather Pro Load
Proof Both hoists have a protected Weston Brake which holds
Ho
olding Bra
Holding Brake the load during the entire operation. The hoists are also
equipped with a unique twin pawl design.
Al
ll Gears and
All an Shafts This feature provides smooth controlled operation as well
Ru
un on Roll
Run Roller Bearings as maintenance free lubrication.
Sttainless Steel
Stainless St Riveted These tags will not rust and will maintain clear distinct
ID
D Tags information for easy identification.
Sa
afety Yellow
Safety Yello Powder This process provides a long lasting finish in hostile
Co
oating
Coating environments.
M aintenanc
Maintenance Hoists can be quickly disassembled for fast and easy
maintenance.
Certification Each hoist is load tested and comes with a serial number
and test certificate dedicated to each hoist. This provides
complete traceability throughout the manufacturing
process.
138
Chain Hoist with
ith o
overload
ove
e oadd protection
prote
p o ec
FEATURES AND BENEFITS
Fully Machined Lift Wheel - This feature perfectly accepts the chain allowing for
a smooth long lasting operation.
Totally Enclosed Gearing - This design protects gears from contamination and debris.
Thrust Bearing on Lower Hook - Allows easy rotation of load while suspended
& prevents load chain twisting.
Lifting or Pulling - This hand hoist can be used for lifting or pulling which makes for a more
flexible and versatile tool.
Unique Hand Wheel Design - This feature enables the hand chain to successfully feed directly into
the wheel sprocket from many directions and angles. The operator can work the hoist,
while standing above or to the side of the load, without jamming the hand chain.
Low Headroom - Provides maximum lift by minimizing space taken up by the hoist,
making it ideal in restricted space applications.
Electro Zinc Plated Hand Chain - Provides a durable finish.
Tempered Load Chain - Provides a long, reliable lifting life.
DIMENSIONS (0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5 and 10 tons)
SPECIFICATIONS (0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5 and 10 tons)

Product Code OZ005CHOP OZ010CHOP OZ015CHOP OZ020CHOP OZ030CHOP OZ050CHOP OZ100CHOP
Safe Working Load (tons) .5 (t) 1 (t) 1.5 (t) 2 (t) 3 (t) 5 (t) 10 (t)
Falls of Chain 1 1 1 1 2 2 4
Effort to Lift S.W.L (pounds) 50.10 (lbs) 66.14 (lbs) 70.46 (lbs) 77.16 (lbs) 59.52 (lbs) 90.39 (lbs) 85.98 (lbs)
Loadchain Diameter 6 (mm) 6 (mm) 8 (mm) 8 (mm) 8 (mm) 10 (mm) 10 (mm)
(millimeters)
A 10.62 (in) 12.48 (in) 15.70 (in) 16.29 (in) 18.30 (in) 25.03 (in) 29.52 (in)
Dimensional Information
B 5.00 (in) 6.22 (in) 7.36 (in) 7.36 (in) 8.26 (in) 9.96 (in) 14.68 (in)
(inches)
C 5.15 (in) 5.51 (in) 6.33 (in) 6.33 (in) 6.33 (in) 6.33 (in) 7.24 (in)
Hook-opening, upper & lower 1.18 (in) 1.10 (in) 1.41 (in) 1.31 (in) 1.57 (in) 1.96 (in) 2.51 (in)
(inches)
Net Weight of Head Only 12 (lbs) 17 (lbs) 25 (lbs) 29 (lbs) 49 (lbs) 60 (lbs) 113 (lbs)
(pounds)
139
Cyclone hand chain hoist
One of the most popular and reliable hoists ever designed, the Cyclone combines superior
engineering, efficiency and durability. Available in a variety of capacities from 1/4 ton to 10
tons, Cyclone features:
• Most interchangeability of parts in • High-strength aluminum alloy

the industry castings in frame and covers
• Standard Load Limiter for simple, • Inspected over 75 times to meet or

automatic overload protection exceed HMI and ASME/ANSI
performance and safety standards
• Enclosed contoured Weston-type
automatic brake for positive load • Standard hand chain drop is 2 feet
control less than lift, (example: 8 foot lift
hoist has 6 foot hand chain drop)
• High-efficiency spur gearing for
greater lift with minimum effort • Lifetime warranty
• Rugged Hoistaloy chain for added • Metric rated

strength and durability
• Made in U.S.A.
• Fully machined, forged liftwheel
pockets for easier lifting and smooth
free chaining
• Options Include
• Fabric chain bags Fabric

chain
• Metal chain containers bag
• Zinc-plated load and hand chain
• Unwelded hand chain
• Latchlok hooks
• Bronze hooks
Metal
• Bullard hooks chain
container
• Eye-type suspension
Geared trolley Plain trolley
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
140
Cyclone hand chain hoist
Specifications
Minimum Chain
Rated Standard distance overhauled Chain pull Shipping
capacity* Product lift† between to lift load to lift full weight
(tons) code (ft.) Reeving hooks (in.) one foot (ft.) load (lbs.) (lbs.)
1/4 4621 8 1 127/8 221/2 23 37
1/2 4622 8 1 127/8 221/2 46 37
1 4624 8 1 14 30 69 40
11/2 4625 8 1 175/16 401/2 80 65
2 4626 8 1 175/16 52 83 64
3 4627 8 2 211/2 81 85 96
4 4628 8 2 211/2 104 88 96
5 4629 8 3 241/4 156 75 128
6 4630 8 3 251/4 156 90 132
8 4631 8 4 341/2 208 89 235
10 4632 8 5 351/2 260 95 249
† Can be supplied with longer lifts
Clearance dimensions (in.)

Rated capacity*(tons)
Dimen-
sion 1/4 1/ 2 1 11/ 2 & 2 3&4 5 6 8 10
A 127/8 127/8 14 175/16 211/2 241/4 251/4 341/2 351/2
B 311/16 311/16 311/16 43/16 35/16 43/16 43/16 43/4 43/4
C 73/16 73/16 73/16 611/16 815/16 105/16 105/16 123/4 123/4
D 41/8 41/8 41/8 51/16 51/16 47/8 47/8 513/16 513/16
E 31/4 31/4 31/4 413/16 413/16 5 5 41/16 41/16
F 21/16 21/16 21/16 31/8 3 215/16 215/16 33/4 33/4
G 37/8 37/8 33/4 53/16 81/4 1113/16 1113/16 173/16 173/16
H 11/16 11/16 13/16 11/8 11/4 11/4 13/8 111/16 113/16
I 33/4 33/4 33/4 413/16 41/4 43/16 43/16 61/16 61/16
J 25/8 25/8 215/16 35/8 41/8 41/8 45/8 55/8 61/8
JJ 25/8 25/8 39/16 311/16 47/8 — — — —
K 15/16 15/16 11/8 11/2 111/16 111/16 17/8 21/4 29/16
L 13/4 13/4 13/4 11/4 31/2 47/8 47/8 75/16 75/16
M 71/16 71/16 71/16 85/8 85/8 85/8 85/8 85/8 85/8
N — — — — 107/8 107/8 107/8 107/8 107/8
R 57/16 57/16 57/16 57/16 — — — — —
S 411/16 411/16 411/16 411/16 — — — — —
T — — — — 37/8 4 4 63/8 63/8
W — — — — 41/2 61/4 61/4 67/16 67/16
X 11/32 11/32 11/8 15/16 15/8 15/8 13/4 21/16 25/16
Y — — — — 51/8 57/8 57/8 59/16 59/16
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
142
Short handle puller
• Easy one-hand operation • Forged upper and lower hooks with

• Lever pull range is 45 to 62 pounds to lift latches
full load • Simple construction with fewer parts for
• Handle that rotates 360°, making it easy to ease of maintenance
operate in any position • Optional Load Limiter device protects
and in small spaces against overload
• Tough yet lightweight aluminum • Lifetime warranty
construction and powder coat finish • Made in U.S.A.
• Hoistaloy hardened steel load chain for
strength,
long wear life and flexibility
• Free chaining for fast, easy attachment to
load
Specifications - Short handle puller

Pull to Minimum Hook Approx.
Rated Standard lift full distance Lever throat shipping
capacity* Product lift loads between length openings weight
(tons) code (ft.) (lbs.) hooks (in.) (in.) Reeving (in.) (lbs.)
3/4 7300P 5 45 121/4 12 1 11/32 16
11/2 7320P 5 55 143/4 163/4 1 11/8 27
3 7330P 5 62 175/8 163/4 2 13/16 40
Specifications -
Short handle puller
without chain
Approx.
Rated shipping
capacity* Product weight
(tons) code (lbs.)
3/4 7301P 12
Optional Optional upper
11/2 7321P 21
Load Limiter Latchlok Hook
3 7331P 28
3/4 – 11/ 2 ton
Optional kits
Approx. Rated
Product shipping capacity*
code weight (lbs.) (tons)
7310P 1 3/4
Load Limiter
7311P 2 11/ 2-3
7309P 2 3/4
Anchor Sling
7312P 3 11/ 2
1001 2 3/4
upper 1003 2 11/ 2

1004 3 3
Latchlok Hook
1001 2 3/4
Optional upper Latchlok Optional
lower 1003 2 11/ 2 Hook anchor sling
1005 3 3 3 ton
143
Professional Lever Hoists (disc brake)
• 50% wider hardened ratchet gear • Precision Bearings
• Grade 100 alloy chain for more strength • Disc Brake
with less weight • Braking capacity is 4 times rated capacity
• Chain guide system allows for horizontal • Manufactured to ISO-9002 quality
operation standard
• High impact resistant gear case and • Triple chain guide for consistent up and
brake cover down FREE WHEELING with one hand
MODEL CAPACITY STANDARD MINIMUM DISTANCE HANDLE NET WT.

NUMBER (POUNDS) LIFT (FEET) BETWEEN HOOKS LENGTH (POUNDS)
PLH-15-5 1,500 5 11” 11” 15
PLH-15-10 1,500 10 11” 11” 18
PLH-15-20 1,500 20 11” 11” 22
PLH-30-5 3,000 5 15-1/2” 16” 23 Each unit comes
PLH-30-10 3,000 10 15-1/2” 16” 27 standard with a
PLH-30-20 3,000 20 15-1/2” 16” 35 rugged storage
bag. Additional
PLH-60-5 6,000 5 22-7/16” 16” 35
bags are avail-
PLH-60-10 6,000 10 22-7/16” 16” 42
able, model
PLH-60-20 6,000 20 22-7/16” 16” 49
BAG-12
PROFESSIONAL LEVER HOIST
series PLH
CM Series 602 mini ratchet lever hoist

This Mini-but-Mighty Hoist Lifts Up To 550 Lbs. Easy Toolbox Storage
The CM Series 602 mini hoist is the
most compact ratchet lever hoist in
the market.
Convenient Carry Bag -

Product Code # 0212
• Plated load chain is standard. • Impact resistant all-steel frame, gear

case and cover
• Weston type load brake.
• Hardened link type steel load chain
• Rubber grip for better comfort and for strength and long wear.
security.
• Free chaining feature serves to
• Lightweight design weighs only 5 lbs. for quickly attach the load.
ease of operation and portability. Use in
confined conditions with one hand oper- •Conforms with ASME B30.21.
ation.
• Standard five-ft. lift. Units with ten-ft.
• Forged upper and lower hooks with lift available - Product Code # 0214
latches standard.
144
Series 602 mini ratchet lever hoist
ALL
DIMENSIONS
ARE IN
INCHES
Product code # 0210
Capacity 550 lbs.
Standard lift 5 ft.
Number of chain parts 1
Chain dimensions
d x t (in inches) . 16 x .47
Lift with one full lever turn 3.15 in.
Handle pull at W.L.L. 58.0 lbs.
Weight with standard lift 5.0 lbs.
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
145
Series 653
Lever operated hoist
Ideal for construction
and industrial applications
The Series 653 lever operated hoist is a high quality, rugged,
steel tool for close quarter pulling, stretching, and hoisting applications.
Its characteristic short handle, along with minimal lever pull effort,
make this tool ideal for a broad range of applications.
• Capacities from 3/4 to 3 tons
• Impact resistant, stamped steel frame, gear case and cover for durability and
light weight.
• Powder coated finish for added corrosion protection.
• Hardened steel load sharing gears.
• Double pawl arrangement for assured load control.
• Two chain guide rollers for positive chain engagement.
• Weston type braking system for positive load control and positioning.
• Simple one-handed, free chaining for fast load attachment.
• Hardened steel chain for strength and long wear life.
• Forged upper and lower hooks with heavy cast steel latches.
• Rubber handle grip for added operator comfort.
• Minimal maintenance with no special tools required.
• 5-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.
• Metric rated.
• Meets ASME B30.21 – Manually Lever Operated Hoist Standard and
European CE Standard.
• Designed and manufactured by Columbus McKinnon Corporation.
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
Specifications
Load Lift or Lever pull Approx.
Product rating reach to lift rated ship wt.
code (tonnes) (ft.) load (lbs.) (lbs.) A B C D E F G H J K L
5310 3/ 5 33 15.0 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16
4
5311 3/ 10 33 15.8 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/8 23/16 23/16 515/16 23/8 39/16
4
5312 3/ 15 33 16.6 125/8 15/16 11/ 11/16 11 43/ 23/ 23/ 515/16 23/ 39/16
4 8 8 16 16 8
5313 3/ 20 33 17.3 125/8 15/16 11/ 11/16 11 43/ 23/ 23/ 515/16 23/ 39/16
4 8 8 16 16 8
5328 1 5 44 15.0 125/8 15/16 11/8 11/16 11 43/ 8 23/ 16 23/ 16 515/16 23/ 8 39/16
5315 11/2 5 51 27.0 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/16
5316 11/ 2 10 51 31.4 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/ 4 43/ 8 23/ 8 23/ 8 67/ 8 3 315/16
5317 11/ 2 15 51 35.8 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/ 4 43/ 8 23/ 8 23/ 8 67/ 8 3 315/16
5318 11/ 2 20 51 40.2 143/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/ 4 43/ 8 23/ 8 23/ 8 67/ 8 3 315/16
5329 2 5 68 27.0 1413/16 11/8 11/4 13/16 161/4 43/8 23/8 23/8 67/8 3 315/16
5320 3 5 77 45.0 1811/16 113/16 19/16 11/4 161/4 71/2 33/8 43/16 77/8 33/8 49/16
5321 3 10 77 52.3 1811/16 113/ 16 19/16 11/4 161/ 4 71/ 2 33/ 8 43/ 16 77/ 8 33/ 8 49/16
146
147
Lever Hoist
FEATURES AND
A BENEFITS
Overload Protection This is standard on all hoists and is factory set. The
overload is integral with the hoist and prevents the
operator from overloading the hoist. When activated, the
overload will not allow hoist operation. When the overload
is activated, lower the load, if lifting, or release the load,
if pulling. Then select a larger capacity hoist, or consult a
lifting specialist for another means of operation.
Minimal Load Lifting These hoists require 20% - 30% less effort than the
Effort competition. Lift heavy loads with ease. Ideal for frequent
lifting/pulling applications.
Fully Enclosed Gearing This protects the gears from contamination and debris.
All Steel Construction These hoists are strong, durable and rugged, providing a
long and dependable service life.
Malleable Hooks with These hooks open when overloaded, thus providing the
Cast Steel Safety operator with a hook load reference point. Each heavy duty
Latches cast steel safety latch has a bolt and lock nut connection
rather than roller pins used by most competitors. This
feature facilitates changing latches in the field.
Weather Proof Load Both hoists have a protected Weston Brake which holds
Holding Brake the load during the entire operation. The hoists are also
equipped with a unique twin pawl design.
All Gears and Shafts This feature provides smooth controlled operation as well
Run on Roller Bearings as maintenance free lubrication.
Stainless Steel Riveted These tags will not rust and will maintain clear distinct
ID Tags information for easy identification.
Safety Yellow Powder This process provides a long lasting finish in hostile
Coating environments.
Maintenance Hoists can be quickly disassembled for fast and easy

maintenance.
Certification Each hoist is load tested and comes with a serial number
and test certificate dedicated to each hoist. This provides
complete traceability throughout the manufacturing
process.
148
Lever Hoist with overload protection
FEATURES AND BENEFITS
Free Wheel Feature - When not under load, the operator can disengage the gearing by positioning
the selection switch to the center position. This allows for a quick adjustment of chain for
faster operation.
Machined Lift Wheel - This wheel perfectly accepts the chain allowing for a smooth long lasting operation.
Pull Handle / Safety Chain Stop - When not under load, this feature allows for quick disengagement
of gearing, which allows for fast movement of the load hook. The safety chain stop is designed to
hold the load in the event that the entire load chain is transmitted through the hoist.
360 Degree Handle Rotation - This allows the operator to work in confined spaces.
Corrosion Protection - Hoist components are powder coated to prevent corrosion.
Product I.D. labels are made from stainless steel.
Fully Enclosed Lift Wheel - This maintains smooth operation while distributing the load over more
links of chain. It also helps keep debris from contaminating the lift wheel and self cleans the
chain as it enters the wheel.
Steel Handle with Rubber Grip - This handle provides a non slip, sure grip, surface.
Cast Steel Hand Wheel - Rotates to allow positive load chain positioning.
Lower Block - Included with multistrand hoists.
DIMENSIONS (0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, and 9 tons)
Lower Block
SPECIFICATIONS (0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, and 9 tons)

Product Code OZ075LHOP OZ150LHOP OZ300LHOP OZ600LHOP OZ900LHOP
Safe Working Lift (tons) 0.75 (t) 1.5 (t) 3 (t) 6 (t) 9 (t)
Headroom (inches) 12.79 (in) 14.96 (in) 18.90 (in) 24.41 (in) 27.56 (in)
Effort on lever to lift full load (pounds) 30.86 (lbs) 48.50 (lbs) 70.55 (lbs) 74.96 (lbs) 79.37 (lbs)
Number of Load Chain Falls 1 1 1 2 3
Diameter of Load Chain (millimeters) 6 (mm) 8 (mm) 10 (mm) 10 (mm) 10 (mm)
Length of Lever Handle (inches) 11.02 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in)
A 12.79 (in) 14.96 (in) 18.89 (in) 24.40 (in) 27.55 (in)
B 5.35 (in) 6.29 (in) 7.08 (in) 9.25 (in) 12.44 (in)
Dimensional Information (inches) C 5.82 (in) 6.77 (in) 7.87 (in) 7.87 (in) 7.87 (in)
D 11.02 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in) 16.14 (in)
E 3.54 (in) 3.85 (in) 4.52 (in) 4.52 (in) 4.52 (in)
Hook-opening, upper & lower (inches) 1.18 (in) 1.41 (in) 1.57 (in) 1.96 (in) 2.28 (in)
Net Weight of Head Only (pounds) 12 (lbs) 20 (lbs) 36 (lbs) 51 (lbs) 67 (lbs)
Pull Handle
Safety Chain Stop
149
ShopStar electric chain hoist
The ShopStar electric chain hoist features rugged construction and

high H4 duty cycle. It keeps lifting and lifting, up to 1,000 pounds and
300 motor starts per hour. Additional features and benefits include:
• H4 duty cycle (300 motor starts/hour) • Rugged cast aluminum alloy hoist frame
• Easy installation and maintenance • 5:1 design factor
• Standard protector overload device • Small, compact design for commercial &
industrial applications
• 10 pocket oblique lay
liftwheel provides longer chain wear • Rigid hook suspension prevents
tangling of power cord
• Epoxy powder coat finish
• Hardened forged steel latch style lower
• 61/ 2 ft. power cord with molded 3 prong hook rotates 360°
plug on 115 volt units
• Totally enclosed non-ventilated hoist
• NEMA 4 industrial rated control station frame protects motor from environmental
• Optional impact-resistant chain container contamination
available • True vertical lift
• Gear train lifetime lubricated with • Precision bearings used throughout hoist
non-oxidizing grease
• Lifetime warranty
• CM Hoist Alloy Load Chain (zinc plated
optional) • Made in U.S.A.
• Thermally protected hoist duty motor
• Dual braking system — D.C. plus
regenerative * WARNING
To avoid injury:
150
ShopStar
Clearance dimensions (in.) Approx.

Product Single Double Shipping
Reeving A B C D code reeved reeved wt., lbs.
Single 111/16 3 215/16 37/8 2063 10 5 1
Double 1115/16 3 9/16 23/8 53/4 2064 20 10 1.4
2065 40 20 1.4
2066 80 40 1.4
2067 120 60 2.2
Specifications
Product Code Max. Lifting Approx.
capacity speed Lift shipping Motor
115-1-60 230-1-60 230-3-60 460-3-60 lbs. F.P.M. Reeving ft. wt., (lbs.) H.P.
2070 — — — 250 16 single 10 26 1/6
— 2069 2071 2072 250 16 single 10 28 1/6
— — 2076 2077 250 24 single 10 28 1/6
— — 2081 2082 250 40 single 10 28 1/6
2000 — — — 300 16 single 10 26 1/6
— 2047 2026 2029 300 16 single 10 28 1/6
— — 2086 2087 300 24 single 10 28 1/6
— — 2074 2075 300 40 single 10 28 1/6
2095 — — — 500 8 double 10 32 1/6
— 2094 2096 2097 500 8 double 10 34 1/6
2090 — — — 500 12 single 10 26 1/6
— 2089 2091 2092 500 12 single 10 28 1/6
— — 2080 2084 500 16 single 10 28 1/6
— — 2101 2102 500 20 double 10 34 1/6
— — 2099 2100 500 24 single 10 28 1/6
2001 — — — 600 8 double 10 32 1/6
— 2048 2035 2038 600 8 double 10 34 1/6
— — 2106 2107 600 12 double 10 34 1/6
— — 2105 2114 600 20 double 10 34 1/6
2110 — — — 1000 6 double 10 32 1/6
— 2109 2111 2112 1000 6 double 10 34 1/6
— — 2116 2117 1000 8 double 10 32 1/6
— — 2119 2121 1000 12 double 10 32 1/6
151
Lodestar electric chain hoist
The balanced, integrated, proven design of the Lodestar has
made it the most popular electric chain hoist in the industry.
Lodestar gives you more value for your money including:
• Up to 3 ton capacities for heavy- • Hardened, forged steel, latch type

duty industrial applications hooks and Hoistaloy load chain for
long, dependable service
• Gear train lifetime lubricated with
non-oxidizing grease • Easy to install and maintain
• Precision machined and hardened • No special tools required
liftwheel with hardened chain to disassemble
guides for precise chain liftwheel fit
• High reliability and long life
• Gearing designed for exceptionally
long life and quiet operation
• Each hoist thoroughly inspected
• H4 duty standard
and tested to over 125%
• Rugged control station (NEMA 4) of rated load prior to shipment
• Hoist duty motor, standard • Meets ASME B30.16
Protector overload device and
• Metric rated
standard screw type limit switches
• Made in U.S.A.
• Designed for greater productivity,
efficiency and economy
Special applications
• Harsh environment hoists available for severe duty of plating,
galvanizing and washdown applications
• Hoists with climbing capability available for temporary rigging or lifting applications — must
be used in inverted position only
• Hoists with creep control allow precise positioning through
field adjustment within the time delay range of .05 sec. to 3 sec.
• Articulating suspension 3 ton only
Specifications — two speed

Product code†
Rated Standard Lift less suspension Approximate
capacity* lift speed Motor shipping
(tons) (ft.) (F.P.M.) H.P. Model Reeving 230-3-60 460-3-60 weight (lbs.)
1 10 10/32 1/ 4 A2 1 2707 2708 70
/8
10 20/60 1/ 2 AA2 1 2717 2718 74
1 10 5/16 1/ 4 B2 1 2727 2728 70
/4
10 10/32 1/ 2 C2 1 2737 2738 74
1 10 2.5/8 1/ 4 E2 2 2747 2748 79
/2
10 5/16 1/ 2 F2 1 2757 2758 74
10 10/32 1 J2 1 3502 3503 116
10 21/64 2 JJ2 1 3549 3550 130
1
1 10 2.5/8 /2 H2 2 2767 2768 83
10 5/16 1 L2 1 3504 3505 116
10 10/32 2 LL2 1 3553 3554 130
2 10 2.5/8 1 R2 2 3506 3507 136

10 5/16 2 RR2 2 3561 3562 150
3 10 1.75/5.5 1 RT2 3 9511 9513 161

10 3.5/11 2 RRT2 3 9512 9514 175
†Specify voltage 230 or 460
152
Lodestar electric chain hoist
Specifications — single speed

Product code†
Rated Standard Lift less suspension Approximate
capacity* lift speed Motor shipping
(tons) (ft.) (F.P.M.) H.P. Model Reeving 115-1-60 230/460-3-60 weight (lbs.)
10 32 1/ 4 A 1 2702 2705 60
10 60 1/ 2 AA 1 2712 2715 66
1/ 8 15 32 1/ 4 A 1 3101 3103 64
15 60 1/ 2 AA 1 3111 3113 70
20 32 1/ 4 A 1 3102 3104 68
20 60 1/ 2 AA 1 3112 3114 74
10 16 1/ 4 B 1 2722 2725 60
10 32 1/ 2 C 1 2732 2735 66
1/ 4 15 16 1/ 4 B 1 3121 3123 64
15 32 1/ 2 C 1 3131 3133 70
20 16 1/ 4 B 1 3122 3124 68
20 32 1/ 2 C 1 3132 3134 74
10 8 1/ 4 E 2 2742 2745 69
10 16 1/ 2 F 1 2752 2755 66
10 32 1 J 1 3512 3515 110
10 64 2 JJ 1 — 3545 117
15 8 1/ 4 E 2 3141 3143 76
1/ 2 15 16 1/ 2 F 1 3151 3153 70
15 32 1 J 1 4212 4214 116
15 64 2 JJ 1 — 4244 123
20 8 1/ 4 E 2 3142 3144 83
20 16 1/ 2 F 1 3152 3154 74
20 32 1 J 1 4213 4215 121
20 64 2 JJ 1 — 4245 128
10 8 1/ 2 H 2 2762 2765 75
10 16 1 L 1 3522 3525 110
10 32 2 LL 1 — 3555 117
1 15
15
8
16
1/ 2
1
H
L
2
1
3161
4222
3163
4224
82
116
15 32 2 LL 1 — 4254 123
20 8 1/ 2 H 2 3162 3164 89
20 16 1 L 1 4223 4225 121
20 32 2 LL 1 — 4255 128
10 8 1 R 2 3532 3535 130
10 16 2 RR 2 — 3565 137
2 15 8 1 R 2 4232 4234 140
15 16 2 RR 2 — 4264 147
20 8 1 R 2 4233 4235 150
20 16 2 RR 2 — 4265 157
10 5.5 1 RT 3 9501 9505 155
10 11 2 RRT 3 — 9508 162
3 15 5.5 1 RT 3 9502 9506 169
15 11 2 RRT 3 — 9509 176
20 5.5 1 RT 3 9503 9507 183
20 11 2 RRT 3 — 9510 190
†Single speed hoist factory wired 460V, convertible to 230V.
153
Lodestar with hook suspension
Lodestar models
A,B,C,F J, L, JJ RT and
Dimension and AA E and H and LL R RR RRT
A 161/4 195/8 189/16 241/8 241/8 299/16
B 61/8 61/8 75/8 75/8 75/8 75/8
C 11/16 7/8 7/8 11/8 11/8 11/8
D 11 11 91/2 91/2 91/2 91/2
F 73/4 73/4 1011/16 1011/16 1011/16 1011/16
H 1 13/16 13/16 11/2 11/2 11/2
I 413/16 37/8 71/4 63/16 63/16 63/16
J 315/16 47/8 57/16 61/2 61/2 61/2
L 111/16 111/16 7/16 7/16 7/16 7/16
M 1 11/8 11/8 15/16 15/16 15/16

P 65/8 69/16 713/16 713/16 713/16 713/16
R* 97/8 127/8 127/8 187/8 187/8 247/8
AP 91/4 99/16 1011/16 113/16 113/16 129/16
* Based on 10 ft. lift and increases proportionately with longer lifts
Suspension specifications
Type Product code Models
Swivel hook 2792 A-AA-B-C-F
Swivel hook 2793 E-H
Swivel hook 3661 J-L-JJ-LL
Swivel hook 3660 R-RR
Swivel hook 9557 RT-RRT
Swivel latchlok hook 2796 A-AA-B-C-F
Swivel latchlok hook 3662 J-L-JJ-LL
Swivel latchlok hook 3663 R-RR
Rigid lug for low head trolley 2778 A-AA-B-C-F
Rigid lug for low head trolley 2779 E-H
Rigid lug for low head trolley 3677 J-L-JJ-LL
Rigid lug for low head trolley 3668 R-RR
Rigid lug for low head trolley 9561 RT-RRT
Rigid hook 2788 A-AA-B-C-F
Rigid hook 2789 E-H
Rigid hook 3651 J-L-JJ-LL
Rigid hook 3658 R-RR
Rigid hook 9559 RT-RRT
Rigid latchlok hook 2790 A-AA-B-C-F
Rigid latchlok hook 3652 J-L-JJ-LL
Note: 3 ton lug suspension prevents hoist from rotating but allows hoist to
articulate below trolley
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
154
Lodestar with Series
635 low
headroom trolley
Specifications For Series 635 Trolley Std. range of adjust.

Am. standard S-beams
Approximate
Rated Flange Tread Minimum shipping
capacity* Product Depth width diameter radius curve weight
(tons) code Models (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs.)
1/ 8 to 1 3575 A – LL 4 – 15 25/ 8 – 55/ 8 31/ 8 24 22
2 3569 R – RR 6 – 18 33/ 8 –6 43/ 4 24 52
3 9576 RT – RRT 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 43/ 4 30 58
Note: Rigid lug suspension required for attaching to hoist. Apply for other than standard beam adjustment.
Beam end stop omitted for picture clarity
Lodestar with Series 635

motor driven trolley
Specifications — motor driven trolley

Standard Std. range of adj. Minimum Approx.
Rated For use travel Am. std. S-beams radius shipping
capacity* Product with Power speed Motor Depth Flange curve weight
(tons) code model supply (F.P.M.) H.P. (in.) width (in.) (in.) (lbs.)
1/ 8 -2 3670 A-RR 115-1-60 75 1/ 4 6 – 15 33/ 8 – 55/ 8 30 118
1/ 8 -2 3671 A-RR 230-3-60 75 1/ 4 6 – 15 33/ 8 – 55/ 8 30 118
1/ 8 -2 3672 A-RR 460-3-60 75 1/ 4 6 – 15 33/ 8 – 55/ 8 30 118
3 9577 RT-RRT 115-1-60 75 1/ 4 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 30 120
3 9578 RT-RRT 230-3-60 75 1/ 4 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 30 120
3 9579 RT-RRT 460-3-60 75 1/ 4 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 30 120
1/ 8 -2 9315 A-RR 115-1-60 30 1/ 4 6 – 15 33/ 8 – 55/ 8 30 113
1/ 8 -2 9316 A-RR 230-3-60 30 1/ 4 6 – 15 33/ 8 – 55/ 8 30 113
1/ 8 -2 9317 A-RR 460-3-60 30 1/ 4 6 – 15 33/ 8 – 55/ 8 30 113
3 9318 RT-RRT 115-1-60 30 1/ 4 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 30 120
3 9319 RT-RRT 230-3-60 30 1/ 4 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 30 120
3 9320 RT-RRT 460-3-60 30 1/ 4 8 – 15 4 – 55/ 8 30 120
Fabric
Metal chain
chain bag
container
CM’s chain bags offer an alternative to the
standard metal chain container for use
with Lodestar or Valustar
electric chain hoists. Chain
bags are made from an open
weave vinyl coated polyester
designed especially for
extended outdoor life. Not
recommended for applications over
300°F, in extremely caustic
environments or for chain weight
exceeding 300 lbs.
155
Lodestar XL
electric chain hoist
Columbus McKinnon introduces an A glimpse of the many

expanded line of Lodestar XL electric features of the Lodestar XL
chain hoists for lifting applications from that have honed its reputation
2 to 71/2 tons. The new offering provides for durability and long life:
heavy-duty hoists featuring faster speeds,
• Heavy-duty, multiple disc braking
less reeving, and higher capacities than
system
traditional chain hoists. Workers in auto-
motive plants, heavy equipment manufac- • Forged ten-pocket oblique-lay
turing, paper mills, and related rugged liftwheel for smooth chain operation,
work environments will experience the constant chain speed, and reduced
same dependability and versatility that chain wear
they have relied on for many years.
• Gearing operated in oil bath
for increased lifting life and
The NEW features of the Lodestar XL
quiet operation
Electric Chain Hoist include:
• Rated H-4, heavy-duty
• Lifting capacities up to 71/2 tons
• Standard overload protector
• Increased lifting speeds throughout
the line • Screw-type limit switches
• Double reeved units with 3-5 ton • Thermally protected motor
lifting capacities
• Factory tested at 125% of
• Maximum lifting speed of 30 feet rated capacity
per minute
• Made in U.S.A.
230/460-3-60 575-3-60
Capacity Speed Plain Geared Motor Driven Plain Geared Motor Driven
(tons) Reeving (fpm) Hook Trolley Trolley Trolley Hook Trolley Trolley Trolley
2 1 18 5201H 5201P 5201G 5201M 5231H 5231P 5231G 5231M
2 1 24 5204H 5204P 5204G 5204M 5232H 5232P 5232G 5232M
2 1 30 5265H 5265P 5265G 5265M 5266H 5266P 5266G 5266M
3 2 9 5209H 5209P 5209G 5209M 5233H 5233P 5233G 5233M
3 2 12 5212H 5212P 5212G 5212M 5234H 5234P 5234G 5234M
3 2 15 5267H 5267P 5267G 5267M 5268H 5268P 5268G 5268M
4 2 9 5215H 5215P 5215G 5215M 5235H 5235P 5235G 5235M

4 2 12 5218H 5218P 5218G 5218M 5236H 5236P 5236G 5236M
4 2 15 5269H 5269P 5269G 5269M 5278H 5278P 5278G 5278M
5 3 6 5221H 5221P 5221G 5221M 5237H 5237P 5237G 5237M
5 3 8 5224H 5224P 5224G 5224M 5238H 5238P 5238G 5238M
5 2 9 5279H 5279P 5279G 5279M 5280H 5280P 5280G 5280M
5 2 12 5283H 5283P 5283G 5283M 5284H 5284P 5284G 5284M
5 2 15 5285H 5285P 5285G 5285M 5286H 5286P 5286G 5286M
6 3 6 5227H 5227P 5227G 5227M 5239H 5239P 5239G 5239M
6 3 8 5230H 5230P 5230G 5230M 5240H 5240P 5240G 5240M
6 3 10 5287H 5287P 5287G 5287M 5288H 5288P 5288G 5288M
71/2 3 6 — 5289P 5289G 5289M — 5290P 5290G 5290M
71/2 3 10 — 5291P 5291G 5291M — 5292P 5292G 5292M
3.5 H.P. XL Models (unshaded) – Available in single speed, 3:1; two speed, variable speed
5.5 H.P. XL Models (shaded) – Available in single speed, variable speed
156
Lodestar XL with hook suspension
TO REMOVE COVER TO REMOVE COVER
43/4 C D 1
5 /4 14 7/16 5
18 /16 1
5 /4
X
POWER Z
CORD
12 3/8
U
A
T
X
CHAIN CONTAINER
(OPTIONAL) V
W
Single Reeved Double Reeved Triple Reeved

Dimensions 2 ton capacity 3-5 ton capacity 5-6 ton capacity
A 25 355/16 363/16
C 87/16 113/ 8 113/ 8
D 81/ 8 51/2 51/2
3 3
T (based on 10 ft. lift) 14 /16 14 /16 143/16
U (based on 10 ft. lift) 6'- 3" 6'- 3" 6'- 3"
V 11/2 21/4 21/4
W 11/ 8 1 5/ 8 1 5/ 8
5 1
X 1 /16 2 /16 21/16
1 1
Z 4 /8 5 /2 51/2
Lodestar XL with plain trolley Lodestar XL with motor driven

and geared Trolley trolley (2 ton)
Geared Trolley
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
Lodestar XL with motor driven • Do not use to lift people or loads over people.
trolley (3-71/2 ton) • Read and follow all instructions.
157
Valustar electric chain hoist
Designed specifically for general commercial applications.

This compact, lightweight hoist features:
• Fully machined and heat treated liftwheel with hardened
chain guides for smooth chain operation and reduced
chain wear
• Standard lift 10, 15 & 20 ft.
• 5 ft. power cord length
• Heavy-duty caliper type AC brake
• Rugged NEMA 4 control station, 115 volt control circuit
• Easy to install and maintain
• Hoistaloy load chain for smooth operation and maximum
chain life
• Efficient regenerative braking system to avoid heat
generation in power train
• Enclosed hoist duty motor
• Gear train lifetime lubricated with non-oxidizing grease
• Latch type hooks
• Hook suspension standard
• Fully machined and heat treated gear train
• Standard overload Protector device
• H3 duty-1 phase; H-4 duty-3 phase
• One-year warranty
• Metric rated
• Made in U.S.A.
Specifications
Approximate
Product code Hoist shipping wt. (Ibs.)
Max. lifting
230/460 capacity speed 230/460
115-1-60 3-60 Model tons FPM 115-1-60 3-60
2401 2402 WB 1/4 16 54 58
2403 2404 WF 1/2 16 60 58
Single
speed 2405 2406 WH 1 8 70 68
10' lift
2407 2408 WL 1 16 105 106
2409 2410 WR 2 8 130 122
2401B 2402B WB 1/4 16 64 62
2403B 2404B WF 1/2 16 64 62
Single
speed 2405B 2406B WH 1 8 77 75
15' lift
2407B 2408B WL 1 16 111 112
2409B 2410B WR 2 8 136 128
2401C 2402C WB 1/4 16 68 66
2403C 2404C WF 1/2 16 68 66
Single
speed 2405C 2406C WH 1 8 84 82
20' lift
2407C 2408C WL 1 16 116 117
2409C 2410C WR 2 8 150 142
Longer lifts and modifications available. Apply for details.
158
Valustar
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
Rated capacity* (tons)

1/4 1/ 2 1/ 2 1 1/2 1 2
Dimension Model WB Model WF Model WE Model WH Model WJ Model WL Model WR
A 141/ 4 141/ 4 177/8 177/ 8 159/ 16 159/ 16 221/ 2
B 61/ 8 61/ 8 61/ 8 61/ 8 75/ 8 75/ 8 75/ 8
C 11/ 16 11/ 16 7/ 8 7/ 8 7/ 8 7/ 8 11/ 8
D 8 8 8 8 9 9 9
E 161/ 16 161/ 16 161/ 16 161/ 16 203/ 16 203/ 16 203/ 16
F 81/ 16 81/ 16 81/ 16 81/ 16 113/ 16 113/ 16 113/ 16
G** 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3" 6'-3"
H 1 1 13/ 16 13/ 16 13/ 16 13/ 16 11/ 2
I 413/ 16 413/ 16 37/ 8 37/ 8 71/ 4 71/ 4 63/ 16
J 315/ 16 315/ 16 47/ 8 47/ 8 57/ 16 57/ 16 61/ 2
K 83/ 4 83/ 4 83/ 4 83/ 4 1211/ 16 1211/ 16 1211/ 16
L 111/ 16 111/ 16 111/ 16 111/ 16 7/ 16 7/ 16 7/ 16
M 1 1 11/ 8 11/ 8 11/ 8 11/ 8 15/ 16

N** 1215/ 16 1215/ 16 1515/ 16 1515/ 16 1611/ 16 1611/ 16 2211/ 16
O 39/ 16 39/ 16 39/ 16 39/ 16 4 4 4
P 63/ 16 63/ 16 61/ 2 61/ 2 67/ 8 67/ 8 73/ 8
R 1 1 13/ 16 13/ 16 13/ 16 13/ 16 11/ 2
S 11/ 16 11/ 16 7/ 8 7/ 8 7/ 8 7/8 11/8
T 1 1 11/ 8 11/ 8 11/ 8 11/ 8 15/ 16
**Based on 10 foot lift units
159
Powerstar electric
chain hoist
Designed specifically as an alternative to

wire rope hoists for high speed lifting of
loads from 2 to 20 tons in a space saving
chain hoist.
• H-4 or better rated duty cycle • Dual braking system

• Designed for heavy-duty • Heavy duty, industrial single speed
industrial applications from controls include magnetic reversing
2 to 20 ton capacities contactor which operates on 115 volts
• Liftwheel has machined chain provided by a control transformer.
pockets and is heat treated • Totally enclosed, ball bearing, 30 minute
alloy steel for maximum rated, thermally protected, hoist duty
strength and wear resistance motor is standard.
• Efficient regenerative braking • Push button control is weatherproof
system avoids heat generation (NEMA 4 rated).
in power train • Drop of push button control is 4 ft. above
• Motors up to 7 1/2 h.p. provide hook at lowest position, unless otherwise
a wide range of lifting speeds specified.
• Single or two speed controls. • External push button chain strain relief
Two speed models operate on is standard.
3:1 speed ratio • Power cord length is 2 1/2 ft. unless
• Standard adjustable upper and otherwise specified.
lower screw limit switches • Trolley design permits easy adjustment
• Standard overload Protector device for installation on a broad range of beam
• Hoistaloy load chain can be easily flange widths.
inspected for wear and abuse • Trolley wheels have double row, tapered
• True vertical lift roller bearings plus machined and hardened
universal treads to permit operation on
• Factory tested to 125% of rated American Standard or flat flanged sections
capacity prior to shipment interchangeably.
• Metric rated except for 10 & 20 ton • Spur gearing used in all motorized trolleys
capacities for improved efficiency and durability.
• Rugged aluminum alloy hoist frame • Drop of hand chain on geared trolleys is 2 ft.
• Chain guide surrounds liftwheel above hook at lowest position, unless
• Machined and hardened steel otherwise specified.
Helical gears used throughout • Designed to be maintained “on the beam.”
hoist for optimum performance • Up to 600 lineal feet of chain
and mechanical efficiency.
• Weatherproof (NEMA3R)
• Extensive use of life-lubricated bearings
plus sealed oil bath power train reservoir • Lifetime warranty
for minimum maintenance. • Made in U.S.A.
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
160
Powerstar
Specifications – standard unit

Hoist only
approx. shipping
Single speed Two speed weight
Headroom Headroom Single Two
Rated Lifting Lifting Std. w/lug w/trolley speed speed
capacity* speed Product code speed Product code Reeving lift** suspension suspension hoist hoist
(tons) (F.P.M.) 230-3-60 460-3-60 (F.P.M.) 230-3-60 460-3-60 (single) (ft.) HP (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.)
2 20 7300 7301 20/7 7302 7303 1 20 5 2815/ 16 3015/ 16 392 402

24 7001 7002 24/8 7003 7004 1 20 5 2815/ 16 3015/ 16 392 402
32 7304 7305 32/11 7306 7037 1 20 5 2815/ 16 3015/ 16 404 414
40 7005 7006 40/13 7007 7008 1 20 5 2815/ 16 3015/ 16 404 414
48 7308 7309 48/16 7310 7311 1 20 7.5 2815/ 16 3015/ 16 408 418
20 7312 7313 20/7 7314 7315 1 20 5 2815/ 16 311/ 2 404 414
3
24 7009 7010 24/8 7011 7012 1 20 5 2815/ 16 311/ 2 404 414
32 7316 7317 32/11 7318 7319 1 20 7.5 2815/ 16 311/ 2 408 418
40 7013 7014 40/13 7015 7016 1 20 7.5 2815/ 16 311/ 2 408 418
4 10 7320 7321 10/3 7322 7323 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 478 488

12 7324 7325 12/4 7326 7327 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 490 500
16 7328 7329 16/5 7330 7331 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 490 500
20 7332 7333 20/7 7334 7335 2 20 7.5 34 36 9/ 16 490 500
24 7336 7337 24/8 7338 7339 2 20 7.5 34 36 9/ 16 494 504
5 10 7340 7341 10/3 7342 7343 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 478 488

12 7344 7345 12/4 7346 7347 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 478 488
16 7029 7030 16/5 7031 7032 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 490 500
20 7348 7349 20/7 7350 7351 2 20 7.5 34 36 9/ 16 494 500
24 7017 7018 24/8 7019 7020 2 20 7.5 34 36 9/ 16 494 504
6 10 7352 7353 10/3 7354 7355 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 548 558

12 7052 7053 12/4 7054 7055 2 20 5 34 36 9/ 16 548 558
16 7356 7357 16/5 7358 7359 2 20 7.5 34 36 9/ 16 552 562
20 7056 7057 20/7 7058 7059 2 20 7.5 34 36 9/ 16 552 562
71/ 2 7 7360 7361 7/2 7362 7363 3 20 5 Apply 39 3/ 8 594 604

8 7364 7365 8/3 7366 7367 3 20 5 Apply 39 3/ 8 606 616
11 7368 7369 11/4 7370 7371 3 20 5 Apply 39 3/ 8 606 616
14 7372 7373 14/5 7374 7375 3 20 7.5 Apply 39 3/ 8 622 632
16 7376 7377 16/5 7378 7379 3 20 7.5 Apply 39 3/ 8 622 632
9 7 7380 7381 7/2 7382 7383 3 20 5 Apply 413/ 16 610 620

8 7384 7385 8/3 7386 7387 3 20 5 Apply 413/ 16 610 620
11 7388 7389 11/4 7390 7391 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/ 16 626 636
13 7392 7393 13/4 7394 7395 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/ 16 626 636
10 7 7396 7397 7/2 7398 7399 3 20 5 Apply 413/ 16 610 620

8 7400 7401 8/3 7402 7403 3 20 5 Apply 413/ 16 610 620
11 7404 7405 11/4 7406 7407 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/ 16 626 636
13 7408 7409 13/4 7410 7411 3 20 7.5 Apply 413/ 16 626 636
12 5 7412 7413 5/2 7414 7415 4 20 5 Apply 413/ 16 710 720

6 7416 7417 6/2 7418 7419 4 20 5 Apply 413/ 16 710 720
8 7420 7421 8/3 7422 7423 4 20 7.5 Apply 413/ 16 726 736
10 7424 7425 10/3 7426 7427 4 20 7.5 Apply 413/ 16 726 736
15 4 7428 7429 4/1.3 7430 7431 5 20 5 Apply 475/ 16 805 815

5 7432 7433 5/1.5 7434 7435 5 20 5 Apply 475/ 16 805 815
6 7436 7437 6/2 7438 7439 5 20 7.5 Apply 475/ 16 817 827
8 7440 7441 8/2.5 7442 7443 5 20 7.5 Apply 475/ 16 817 827
** 20 ft. lift is standard — for other lifts, apply.
161
ShopAir chain hoist TM
Compact, powerful, and precise

for assembly and manufacturing
applications up to 1,000 pounds.
The CM ShopAir combines superior lifting speeds, rugged design,

and precise load spotting in a portable air chain hoist. As a workstation
hoist or a production line hoist, the ShopAir is the ideal choice.
CAPACITIES: 250 to 1,000 Lbs.
NORMAL
OPERATING
PRESSURE: 90 PSI (6.2 bar)
AIR
CONSUMPTION: 34 cu.feet/min.
• Standard ProtectorTM overload • Industrial duty air motor for

device. tough applications.
300 Lb. model
• 10-pocket, oblique lay liftwheel • Gear train is lifetime - lubricated shown with optional
provides longer chain life. with non-oxidizing grease. chain container
• Epoxy powder coat finish • Hardened forged steel, latch -

provides a durable exterior. type lower hook rotates 360°.
• Durable reduction gearing • Hardened forged steel, rigid

means reliable operation latch - type upper hook.
• Variable flow, two lever pendant • Rugged cast aluminum

for precise load spotting. alloy hoist frame.
• Threaded external exhaust • Alloy load chain.

for piping away exhaust in
clean room or painting • Maximum pendant
applications. drop - 36 ft.
• Small, compact design for • Lifetime warranty against

commercial & industrial defects in materials
applications. and workmanship.
• Made in U.S.A.
162
ShopAir air chain hoist
TM
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
Specifications Speed FPM

Product Cap.
(in.) Number of (under full load) Shipping
code (lbs.) A B *C load chains lifting lowering weight (lbs.)
2178 250 107/8 37/8 6’ 4” 1 31 83 30
2180 300 107/8 37/8 6’ 4” 1 31 83 30
2182 500 107/8 37/8 6’ 4” 1 21 75 30
2179 500 1115/16 53/4 6’ 4” 2 16 42 34
2181 600 1115/16 53/4 6’ 4” 2 16 42 34
2183 1,000 1115/16 53/4 6’ 4” 2 11 38 34
163
AirStar chain hoist
Designed for general commercial applications where variable speed
pneumatic power is preferable. Rated for 1/4, 1/2 and 1 ton capacities,
this compact, lightweight hoist features:
• Hoistaloy load chain for heavy duty or stainless steel

chain for spark resistant, medium duty loads
• Positive action, heavy-duty shoe type brake
that holds the load
• Multi-vane rotary air motor for high torque, smooth
operation
• Accurately machined heat treated alloy steel
spur gears
• Spark resistant models available for hazardous
environments
• Pull cord or pendant throttle control available
• Pull cord control hoists provide a lightweight,
economical hoist for accurate
control of loads
• Optional pendant throttle control hoists
offer ergonomic, one-hand control for ease
of operation
• Hook or lug suspension available
• Inlet air swivel with built-in strainer provides
free hoist movement
• Aluminum frame and end cover contributes to the
lightweight, easily portable, and rugged design
• External brake adjustment
• Limit stops prevent over-travel in upper and lowering
directions
• Equa-torque gearing of alloy steel, heat treated
spur gears are accurately machined to provide
a close meshed, compact gear reduction
• Tapped exhaust port 1/2 NPTF... for cleanroom
applications or to add a supplemental muffler
in addition to the built-in muffler for even
quieter operation
• Metric rated
• Made in U.S.A.
Basic Hoist Data Air Exhaust: 1/2 NPTF

Rated Loads: 1/4, 1/2 and 1 Ton Lift: 10 foot lifts are standard. Longer lifts
(Spark resistant models are rated are an optional extra.
at 3/8 and 3/4 ton) Pendant Control: 6 foot length is standard. Longer
lengths are an optional extra.
Air Pressure
Recommended: 90 PSI Optional: For greater corrosion resistance, a plated
Air Consumption: 48 SCFM at 90 PSI load chain is offered as an optional extra.
Net Wt. (Basic Hoist): 36 lbs.
Suspension: Hook or lug
Control: Pull Cord or Pendant Throttle
Air Inlet: 3/8 NPTF
Air Supply Hose: 1/2 I.D. min.
164
AirStar with hook suspension
* Also available with lug suspension for direct trolley attachment.
1/4 and 1/2 ton standard 1 ton standard

3/8 ton spark resistant 3/4 ton spark resistant

Rated
capacity* Product
(tons) code A B C D E F G H J
15
1/ 4 7400A 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 3/16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 4 7400B 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 4 7400C 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 4 7400D 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 2 7401A 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 2 7401B 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 2 7401C 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1/ 2 7401D 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
3/ 8 7403A 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
3/ 8 7403B 15 1/ 4 10 1/ 4 4 3/ 4 13/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 5 11/16
15 3
1 7402A 18 10 1/ 4 5 3/ 4 3/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 6 11/16
15 3
1 7402B 18 10 1/ 4 5 3/ 4 3/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 6 11/16
15 3
1 7402C 18 10 1/ 4 5 3/ 4 3/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 6 11/16
15 3
1 7402D 18 10 1/ 4 5 3/ 4 3/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 6 11/16
15 3
3/ 4 7404A 18 10 1/ 4 5 3/ 4 3/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 6 11/16
15 3
3/ 4 7404B 18 10 1/ 4 5 3/ 4 3/ 4 7 1/ 16 5 1/ 16 /16 2 /16 6 11/16
Specifications
Pendant Lifting Lowering
Rated Pull cord control throttle control** speed speed
capacity* Product Net wt. Product Net wt. max.† max.†
Type (tons) code no. (lbs.) code no. (lbs.) Reeving (F.P.M.) (F.P.M.)
Standard models
Roller chain 1/ 4 7400A 37 7400B 47 1 65 95
1/ 2 7401A 37 7401B 47 1 45 120
1 7402A 51 7402B 61 2 23 60
Link chain 1/ 4 7400C 36 7400D 46 1 65 95
1/ 2 7401C 36 7401D 46 1 45 120
1 7402C 49 7402D 59 2 23 60
Spark resistant models
Link chain 3/ 8 7403A 36 7403B 46 1 60 100
3/ 4 7404A 49 7404B 59 2 29 52
**Equipped with 6 ft. pendant control.
†Speeds based on 90 PSI line pressure and with full rated hoist load.
Hoist speeds are adjustable and can be reduced to 50% of full rated speed. Shipped from factory with hoisting speed
set at maximum rated speed; lowering speed set at reduced speed.
Standard lift 10 feet. Longer lifts available.
165
AirStar 6 air hoist
Designed for general industrial applications where variable speed
pneumatic power is preferable. Rated for loads of up to 3 tons.
This compact, lightweight hoist features:
• Hoistaloy load chain for heavy duty or

stainless steel chain for spark resistant,
medium duty loads
• Lightweight aluminum frame and cover
• Positive action, spring biased Weston-type
load brake holds the load, provides exacting
load spotting and control
• Multi-vane rotary air motor with eight vanes
for high torque, smooth operation, positive
starting
• Precision cut heat treated helical and spur
gear combination for quiet, efficient operation
• Pendant throttle handle is full flow design for
precision throttle capabilities
• Spark resistant models available for
hazardous environments
• Hook or lug suspension available
• Standard overload protector device
• Internal Muffler-reduces sound level
• Throttle Valve—precision throttle valves
meter the air for smooth operation
• Chain container optional
• Metric rated
• Made in U.S.A.
Basic Hoist Data

Rated Loads: 1, 2, and 3-ton (Spark resistant
models are rated at 1/2, 1 and 2 ton)
Air Pressure
Recommended: 90 PSI
Air Consumption: 70 SCFM (full load-full
speed) slow speed model 80 SCFM (full
load-full speed) fast speed model
Pendant Control Hose: 6 foot pendant hose
standard for 10 foot lift hoist, longer hose
assemblies up to 36 foot available.
Lift: 10 foot lifts are standard. Longer lifts are
an optional extra.
Net Wt. (Basic Hoist): 100 pounds
Suspension: Hook or lug
Air Inlet Size: 3/4 NPTF
Air Supply Hose Size: 3/4 I.D. min.
166
AirStar 6 with hook suspension
* Also available with lug suspension for direct trolley attachments

Rated
capacity* Product
(tons) code A B C D E
1/ 2 7408A 16 3/ 4 111/ 16 6 3/ 4 211/ 16 6 3/ 16
1 7405A 16 3/ 4 111/ 16 6 3/ 4 211/ 16 6 3/ 16
1 7405B 16 3/ 4 111/ 16 6 3/ 4 211/ 16 6 3/ 16
1 7409A 227/ 8 1213/ 16 81/ 16 4 7/ 16 4 7/ 8
2 7406A 227/ 8 1213/ 16 81/ 16 4 7/ 16 4 7/ 8
2 7406B 227/ 8 1213/ 16 81/ 16 4 7/ 16 4 7/ 8
2 7410A 257/ 8 143/ 8 5 13/ 16 5 5/ 8 7 1/ 8
3 7407A 257/ 8 143/ 8 5 13/ 16 5 5/ 8 7 1/ 8
3 7407B 257/ 8 143/ 8 5 13/ 16 5 5/ 8 7 1/ 8
Specifications
Rated Full load Full load Approximate
capacity* Product hoist speed** lowering speed** net
Model (tons) code Reeving (F.P.M.) (F.P.M.) weight (lbs.)
Standard model 1 7405A 1 13 18 93
1 7405B 1 30 42 95
2 7406A 2 6 9 110
2 7406B 2 15 21 112
3 7407A 3 4 6 144
3 7407B 3 10 14 146
Spark resistant model 1/ 2 7408A 1 16 22 95
1 7409A 2 8 11 112
2 7410A 3 5 7 146
**Hoist speeds based on 90 PSI line pressure with full load at full throttle.
167
CM Series 632
close radius trolley
With revolutionary advances, this shorter, more compact
trolley is 50% lighter than competitive trolleys, yet every bit
as tough.
• Negotiates radius curves as tight as 7 to 10 inches

• Made of highest quality rolled steel
• Unique double row, ball bearing wheel design
for greater wear capacity
• Larger V-bars available for wider flange adjustment
• For low headroom applications
• Bearings prepacked with lifetime lubricant
• Exclusive Dial-Fit collar quickly adapts trolley to
wide range of beams and patented rails
• Dust covers shield and protect bearings
• Trolleys available for larger beams, rails or tracks;
contact CM
• Cast iron trolley guards available (except for 3 ton)
• Made in U.S.A.
* WARNING
To avoid injury:

Dimension 1/4 & 1/ 2 1 11/ 2 & 2 3

Min. radius curve (in.) 7 7 10 10
B 41/ 4 43/ 8 55/ 8 63/ 16
C 57/ 8 6 71/ 2 81/ 16
D 3/ 16 3/ 16 3/ 8 11/ 16
E 13/ 16 13/ 16 23/ 16 41/ 16

F 23/ 4 23/ 4 31/ 2 31/ 2
G 33/ 8 33/ 8 41/ 2 41/ 2
H 7 7 9 9
J 11/ 8 11/ 8 11/ 2 15/ 8
K 33/ 8 31/ 2 43/ 8 413/ 16
L 113/ 16 15/ 8 2 25/ 8
M 11/ 16 7/ 8 11/ 8 11/ 8
N 7/ 8 1 11/ 4 11/ 4
P 3 31/ 8 37/ 8 415/ 16
Dimensions given are for minimum S-beam and will vary with larger beams.
Specifications
Adj. for standard S-beams
Rated Depth Flange Tread Net Shipping Minimum
capacity* Product of beam width diameter weight weight radius curve
(tons) code (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.) (in.)
1/4-1/2 3222 4-12 25/8-51/16 23/4 9 10 7
1 3224 4-12 25/8-51/16 23/4 10 12 7
11/2-2 3226 6-15 33/8-55/8 31/2 23 25 10
3 3230 8-18 4- 61/4 31/2 29 33 10
All capacities can be supplied for S-beams larger than listed and also for wide flange beams, rails or tracks with approximately equivalent
flange widths.
168
Series 84A plain or geared trolley
Manufactured for heavy duty, industrial grade applications.CM Series
84A trolleys feature fully sealed, precision bearings, heavy duty side frames
and fully machined wheel tread for superior performance and long life — with
minimal maintenance.
• Available in capacities from 1/4 through • Trolley wheels are fully machined
25 ton with 30 through 50 ton trolleys from alloy cast iron and hardened
available as tandem construction. for high strength and long life.
• Lifetime lubricated, precision ball bear- • Alloy steel axles and equalizer pins are
ings on trolleys through 3 ton capacity. heat treated for maximum strength and
Trolleys with capacities 4 tons and wear life.
greater are equipped with eight sealed,
Timken tapered roller bearings and • Geared versions have fully machined
grease fittings. trackwheel gears and incorporate a
swinging chain guide which keeps
• Heavy rolled steel side frames extend the hand chain aligned and free from
beyond the wheels to provide these jamming.
trolleys with superior strength, rigidity
and added protection for the track- • Available to fit a broad range of wider
wheels. Units with capacities from 1/4 flange beams and patented track appli-
through 12 tons employ universal cations not listed - contact factory.
wheel treads for use on flat or tapered
beam flanges. Units with capacities • Made in the USA
from 16 through 25 tons operate on
American Standard I-beams with • Spark resistant models available —
tapered flanges. For patented track, add suffix “SR”
consult factory.
Specifications Minimum
Rated Beam Flange radius Approximate
Product code capacity height width curve net weight
Plain Geared (tons) (in.) (in.) (in.) Plain † Geared
1641-0025 1642-0025 1/ 4 - 12 2.66 - 5.00 20 23 38

4
1641-0050 1642-0050 1/ 4 - 12 2.66 - 5.00 20 23 38
2
1641-0100 1642-0100 1 5 - 12 3.00 - 6.00 24 43 62
1641-0150 1642-0150 11/2 5 - 12 3.00 - 6.00 24 45 65
1641-0200 1642-0200 2 6 - 18 3.33 - 6.25 30 67 90
1641-0300 1642-0300 3 6 - 18 3.33 - 6.25 30 70 93
1641-0400 1642-0400 4 8 - 24 4.00 - 7.00 36 155 184
1641-0500 1642-0500 5 8 - 24 4.00 - 7.00 36 160 188
1641-0600 1642-0600 6 8 - 24 4.00 - 7.00 36 160 188
1641-0800 1642-0800 8 10 - 24 4.62 - 8.00 60 300 347
1641-1000 1642-1000 10 10 - 24 4.62 - 8.00 60 310 360
1641-1200 1642-1200 12 10 - 24 4.62 - 8.00 60 310 360
1631-1600 1632-1600 16 18 - 24 6.00 - 8.00 96 800 895
1631-2000 1632-2000 20 18 - 24 6.00 - 8.00 96 845 955
1631-2500 1632-2500 25 18 - 24 6.00 - 8.00 120 1045 1200
For wide flange beam adaptation, patented track or for beams larger than standard - contact factory.
† Weight less hand chain. 8 Ft. standard zinc plated hand chain drop on geared trolley. Specify curve on order.
169
Series 80 trolley for hook mounted hoists push type
1/4, 1/2, 1 and 2 ton 3 ton only
Hook Suspension • Trolley side frames feature Rigid Mount • Offers minimum headroom
• Available in 1/4 ton to all steel construction • For use with lug suspend- • Push, hand geared, or
3 ton capacities for strength and durability ed hoists such as the motorized models available
• Can be used with any • Steel wheels with hardened CM AirStar or AirStar 6 • On hand geared models,
hook suspended hoist treads and ball bearings • Available in 1/2 to 3 ton anti-tilt rollers eliminate the
provide easy and long life Trolleys attach directly tilting of the trolley when
• Runs on either American
Standard or wide • Hand geared trolleys are to the lug brackets on operating with a light load
flange shapes. ideal for accurate the hoist • Features a lifetime warranty
positioning and long lifts and are made in U.S.A.

Rated † **
capacity* Product Min. Min.
(tons) code A B C D WD F G H J K L
1/4 80 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/ 4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8
80SR 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/ 4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8
80WFA 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/ 4 113/16 97/8 315/16 31/6 7/8
1/2 81 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/ 4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8
81SR 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/ 4 113/16 79/16 315/16 11/16 7/8
81WFA 43/8 213/16 41/8 1 31/8 3/ 4 113/16 97/8 315/16 31/16 7/8
1 82 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 11/16 21/4 81/4 47/8 13/16 1

82SR 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 11/16 21/4 81/4 47/8 13/16 1
82WFA 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 1 23/16 103/8 47/8 213/16 1
82WFB 61/8 39/16 51/8 11/8 4 1 23/16 123/8 47/8 413/16 1
2 83 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 13/16 21/4 83/4 — 3/4 11/8
83SR 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 13/16 21/4 83/4 — 3/4 11/8
83WFA 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 3/4 23/16 103/4 — 33/8 11/4
83WFB 67/8 313/16 53/4 15/16 415/16 3/4 23/16 123/4 — 53/8 11/4
3 905480 67/8 43/8 15/8 415/16 415/16 9/16 23/8 12 6 11/4 113/32
905481 67/8 43/8 15/8 415/16 415/16 9/16 23/8 143/4 6 41/4 113/32
905482 67/8 43/8 15/8 415/16 415/16 9/16 23/8 175/8 6 7 113/32
† Clearance dimensions “F” and “G” are based on the largest beam on which trolley will operate. Dimension increases slightly for each smaller beam size.
**Dimension “K” occurs on smallest beam size only. On larger beams it is increased by the difference in flange width.
Specifications
Approx.
Rated capacity* Min. beam Min. radius Adj. flange net weight
(tons) Product code depth (in.) curve width (in.) (lbs.)
1/4 80 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13
80SR 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13
80WFA 4 2'-6" 5-7 14
1/ 2 81 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13
81SR 4 2'-6" 25/8-45/8 13
81WFA 4 2'-6" 5-7 14
1 82 5 3'-0" 3-5 25
82SR 5 3'-0" 3-5 25
82WFA 5 3'-0" 5-7 26
82WFB 5 3'-0" 7-9 27
2 83 6 4'-0" 33/8-6 35
83SR 6 4'-0" 35/8-6 35
83WFA 6 4'-0" 6-8 36
83WFB 6 4'-0" 8-10 37
3 905480 6 4'-0" 33/8-6 41
905481 6 4'-0" 61/8-87/8 43
905482 6 4'-0" 9-11 44
170
CM Series 633
wide range trolley
* Also available in hand geared
Simple, rugged, built for trouble-free service and ease of
operation across a wide range of beam applications.
Series 633 features:
• Rugged steel side plates formed to include bumpers

and trolley guards
• Frames connected by steel equalizer pin, secured by
two nuts on each side
• Universal tread flanged trackwheels equipped
with shielded ball bearings
• Easy rolling on American standard shapes, wide flange
shapes or patented rail
• Hardened wheels and axles for added strength and durability
• Spacer washers can be shifted inside or outside for easy
adjustment to wide range of beams
• To be used with hook suspended hoist
• Suspension plate for easy attachment is standard
• Bearings prepacked with lifetime lubricant
• Imported

Dimension 1/ 2 1 2 3 5
Min. radius curve (in.) 35 35 59 71 94
A 81/ 2 1013/ 16 127/ 32 1413/ 16 181/ 8
B** 25/ 32 213/ 32 211/ 16 31/ 16 3 21/ 32
C 51/ 16 6 9/ 16 625/ 32 713/ 32 8
D** 1/ 16 7/ 16 13/ 32 1/ 2 9/ 16
E** -1/ 4 11/ 32 25/ 32 17/ 16 23/ 16

F 2 9/ 32 315/ 32 315/ 16 51/ 8 61/ 8
G 4 47/ 8 51/ 2 6 9/ 16 77/ 8
H** 3 411/ 32 429/ 32 61/ 8 79/ 32
J** 11/ 32 11/ 32 25/ 32 13/ 16 21/ 8
K 13/ 4 2 3/ 32 21/ 2 313/ 32 313/ 32
L 1/ 2 1/ 2 5/ 8 5/ 8 13/ 16
M** 15/ 16 31/ 32 5/ 16 15/ 16 17/ 16

N** 43/ 32 51/ 16 513/ 16 77/ 16 915/ 16
P 17/ 32 13/ 4 25/ 32 29/ 16 323/ 32
Q 19/ 32 19/ 32 13/ 16 13/ 8 125/ 32
R 31/ 32 15/ 32 15/ 8 131/ 32 29/ 16
**Dimensions given are for minimum S-beam and will vary with larger beams.
Specifications
Adj. for standard S-beams
Rated Depth Flange Tread Net Shipping
capacity* Product of beam width diameter weight weight
(tons) code (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.)
1/ 2 3302 3-15 21/ 2-55/ 8 29/ 32 15 17
1 3304 5-24 3-8 315/ 32 34 36
2 3306 6-24 35/ 8-8 315/ 16 50 53
3 3307 8-24 4-8 51/ 8 95 100
5 3309 10-24 45/ 8-8 61/ 8 172 175
171
RailStar motor driven trolley
• Fits wide range of beam sizes efficiency, low maintenance
for maximum versatility • Cast iron control enclosure
• Universal use with any hook • Four-button control
suspended single speed station included for operating
hoists that are equipped with single speed hoist. Drop pro-
reversing contactor portioned to 20' lift
• Steel plate side frames • 115 volt control circuit
• Steel spur gearing for opti- • Trolley guards standard
mum strength and smooth • One-year warranty
operation • Metric rated
• Durable hardened cast iron • IImported
trackwheels that operate on
standard S-beams or flat
flanged beams
• Lifetime lubricated double row
ball bearings for high

Dimension 1/ 8 -2 3
A 123/ 4 141/ 8
B 63/ 8 63/ 4
C** 413/ 16 51/ 4
D 39/ 16 315/ 16
E 29/ 16 215/ 16
F** 43/ 4 53/ 16
G** 6 65/ 16
H** 17 ft. 17 ft.
J 71/ 2 915/ 16
K 41/ 8 411/ 16
SINGLE PHASE L 123/ 4 153/ 16
THREE PHASE L 117/ 16 137/ 8
M** 11/ 2 215/ 16
N** 3/ 8 3/ 4
P** 17/ 16 19/ 16

Q** 51/ 8 57/ 8
R 1/ 2 3/ 4
S 11/ 16 11/ 16
T** 87/ 8 99/ 16
**Dimensions given are for minimum S-beam and will vary with larger beams.
* WARNING
To avoid injury:
172
Tractor drive
Power tractor drives push-type hoists, trolleys and underhung cranes.
Easy installation without removing or modifying existing equipment. This
drive also features:
• Compact design
• Capacities up to 5 tons available in 230/460-3-60 operation
• Monorail trolley track or twin unit synchronized drives available
• Direct drive with right angle worm gear reducer
• Enclosed aluminum housing for lubrication of gears and bearings
• Steel plate construction with tie-rods for easy adjustment
• Squirrel cage motor with permanently lubricated bearings
• Fully machined trolley wheels with universal tread
operate on tapered or flat flange beams
• Adjusts to standard I-beams or flat flange beams up to 8 inches wide
• Standard magnetic reversing contactor with mechanical interlock
inside NEMA 1 enclosure
• Made in U.S.A.
Options
• 575 volt 3 phase 60 hertz operation

• 2, 4, 6 & 8 button push-button station
• Additional push-button cable length
(10' standard)
• NEMA 12, 4 or 4X control enclosures
• Motor brake
• Soft start (recommended for speeds
above 70 F.P.M.)
• Two speed or variable controls
• Transformer for 115 volt control power
• Tow bar
• For other beams, options or custom
designs, consult factory
Rated Approx.
capacity* Product Speed Std. beam Min. radius Max. flange shipping
(tons) code (F.P.M.) size (in.) curve (in.) thickness (in.) wt. (lbs.)
1 TD 235 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110
1 TD 255 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110
1 TD 270 70 3.38-8 36 .62 110
1 TD 2105 105 3.38-8 36 .62 110
11/ 2 TD 335 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110
11/ 2 TD 355 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110
11/ 2 TD 370 70 3.38-8 36 .62 110
11/ 2 TD 3105 105 3.38-8 36 .62 110
21/ 2 TD 535 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110
21/ 2 TD 555 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110
21/ 2 TD 570 70 3.38-8 36 .62 110
3 TD 635 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110
3 TD 655 55 3.38-8 36 .62 110
5 TD 1035 35 3.38-8 36 .62 110
173
More Info:
See page 177
More Info: More Info:

See page 184 See page 184
174
More Info:
See page 182-183
More Info: More Info: More Info:

See page 180-181 See page 180-181 See page 178-179
175
More Info:
See page 199
More Info: More Info:

See page 198 See page 198
176
LB
Lever Hoists
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
NER/ER Electric Chain Hoists
Available with:
• Hook and Lug Suspensions (NER)
• Motorized Trolley (NERM)
• Push (NERP) and Geared Trolley (NERG)
The NER/ER Series of electric chain hoists were designed using the
latest technology. The results are high quality, low-headroom, full-
featured hoists that provide daily reliable performance in both routine
workplace situations and severe working environments.
Standard Hoist Specifications
Capacity Range Limit Switch

1/8 Ton - 20 Ton Prevents overwinding/overlifting
Standard upper
Reconnectible Voltage
208-230/460-3-60 for Chain Falls
both single and dual speed hoists Single chain fall through 3 Ton
(optional voltages available) (except NER030C)
Control Voltage Standard Lift

110V (optional 24V and 48V) 10’ (longer lifts available)
Duty Cycle Standard Pendant Drop

Single Speed—60 Min. 4’ less than lift
Dual Speed—30/10 Min. (longer drops available)
Classification Standard Power Supply Cord

ASME H4 15’ (longer lengths available)
ISO M5 or M4
FEM 2M or 1Am Standard Pendants
2-button (Up/Down)
Ratings Momentary contacts
Hoist—IP55
Pendant—IP65 Chain Containers
Optional
Canvas, plastic, or steel
NER vs. ER Features

ER Model has same high-quality features as NER plus the following:
• Second brake—Weston-style mechanical load brake
• Count hour meter
• Large capacity—8 Ton-20 Ton
184
JD NEUHAUS Air Hoists
Up to 100 Ton Capacity
mini Air Hoists
Small in size, High in Performance. From 275 Lbs. to 2200 Lbs. Capacity, Air Pressure 85
PSI (6 Bar)
The JDN “Economy Line” mini completes our PROFI series of hoists, proven in heavy-duty indus-
trial applications. The mini brings that famous JDN quality to the light duty sector.
Features:
• New patented wear-resistant braking system • Rugged lightweight aluminum housing
• Precise variable lifting and lowering speed • Very low headroom
• Easy to handle because of its low weight
PROFI Air Hoists (Rental Available)

Rugged, Reliable, Versatile. From 550 Lb. to 100 Ton Capacity, Air Pressure: 65PSI (4 Bar)
or 85 PSI (6 Bar)
Proven in practice, the JDN PROFI Series air hoists excel in places where safety is paramount.
Unlike electricity, compressed air does not generate sparks, making the JDN PROFI Series the hoist
choice in hazardous areas. The highest quality materials, coupled with six generations of experi-
ence result in a product that is second-to-none. The PROFI is available with rope or push-button.
Features:
• Rugged construction, minimum headroom • Small and handy relative to its capacity
• Simple design means low maintenance cost • Impervious to dust, vapors, humidity and
• Unlimited switching and operation frequency temperatures
• Explosion proof • Variable speed control
• Positive start system ensures a smooth start and
consistent operation
Options:
Spark-resistant package Chain container Offshore paint Delta-P overload protection
Monorail Air Hoists EH

Specialized Lifting Systems for Large Capacity Loads Offshore, Underground,
Anywhere. From 20 Ton to 100 Ton Capacity, Air Pressure 85 PSI (6 Bar)
Monorail Hoists EH are special high capacity lifting systems designed to handle heavy
loads over monorail systems. Because of the trolley wheel design, they can be used on
standard I-beams either with tapered or parallel flanges, or on special fabricated beams.
JDN Monorail Hoists are especially suited for applications in high humidity, dust or haz-
ardous environments with a high risk of explosion.
Features:
• Explosion-proof • Low headroom
• Small size relative to capacity • Little air consumption
• High performance mutli-vane motor with • Trolleys with anti-drop and anti-climb devices
self-lubricating features and positive start-up • All-steel cast iron construction
system for a smooth start and consistent operation • Silencer for low noise operation
Options:
Spark-resistant package Chain container Offshore paint Delta-P overload protection
185
Standard Specifications
Capacity: 5, 7½ and 10 tonne
World Series Hoist Service Class: Meets the duty cycle requirement
of HMI H4 Service
Operation: Indoor
Power Supply: 460, 230 or 575/3/60
Wheels: Compound tread machined steel
hardened to 220 BHN, 8" diameter for the 7½
and 10 tonne models and 6½" diameter for the
5 tonne model
Flange Width Range: Trolley flange width range
for the 7½ & 10 tonne models is 4 5/8 - 20" with
a maximum flange thickness of 2". For the 5 tonne
model width range is 4 5/8 -14" with a maximum
flange thickness of 1¾" as standard
Bumpers: Optional
Hoist Gearing: Triple reduction, helical for the
first two reductions, spur for the third, heat-
treated alloy steel. All gearing is oil bath lubricated,
contained in a vacuum cast aluminum gear case
mounted outside of the rope drum
Mechanical Load Brake: None
Rope Drum: Steel machined up to 50% of rope's
diameter. Rope secured to drum with three heavy
The Shaw-Box World Series wire rope hoist was Ductile Iron clamps and three extra wraps
created for the world market and combines over Sheaves: Machined steel
117 years of experience with the latest in manu- Rope Guide: Heavy duty metal rope guide is
facturing and materials technology, rigid design standard
Headroom: Low headroom design is standard
standards and the best quality components avail-
Hoist Motor Brake: D.C. disc rated at 200% of
able to create a feature-filled, rugged, easily the motors full load torque
maintained hoist. Trolley Brake: Optional - retardation by non-
The World Series hoist is metric capacity rated, locking worm gear reducer
low headroom, heavy-duty, rated for H4 service Trolley Traverse Gearing: Totally enclosed, oil-
as a minimum with the higher lifting speeds and bath lubricated single worm
precise positioning control demanded by industry Hoist Motor: Two speed, two winding with a 6:1
ratio between the high and low speeds
worldwide.
Trolley Motor: Two speed, two winding with a
Available Options 3:1 ratio between the high and low speeds
Control: Magnetic contactor type. Temperature
Trolley: Soft Start actuated switches standard. Pushbutton station
Single Speed Trolley Control not furnished as standard
Variable Frequency Control Control Enclosure: Both hoist and trolley control
Trolley Brake
are contained in one NEMA 4/12 panel mounted
Trolley Bumpers
Different Traverse Speeds and wired in as standard
Wider Flange Width on 5-Tonne B-Frame Models Limit Switch: Rotary geared upper and lower
and upper block operated control circuit limit
Hoist: Mainline Contactor switch
Overcapacity Lift Protection Bearings: Antifriction type throughout
Pushbutton Station
186
187
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
LAMCO provides custom hook/nut machining

to fit your exacting needs. See page 190 for cus-
tom machining dimensional requirements.
The hook at left shows a LAMCO “Open
Throat Chain” (OTC) hook latch. This custom
latch provides an open throat for loading with-
out pinching fingers like a spring loaded latch.
Call LAMCO for details.
188
See page 190 for
custom machining
requirements
SEE APPLICATION AND

WARNING INFORMATION
189
Shank Hook Custom Machining
Dimensions
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
Frame Size:
Material Symbol:
190
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
pages 63-64
191
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
192
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
193
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
58-59 and 188-191.
58-59 and 188-191.
194
Universal Latch Kits
Latch Kit Neck Diameter Throat Opening

Product N T
Code (in) (in)
A 9/16 to 5/8 11/16 to 11/8
B 3/4 to 13/16 11/4
C 7/8 to 1 1 3/8 to 11/2
D 11/8 to 11/4 1 3/4 to 1 7/8
E 13/8 to 11/2 2 1/16
F 15/8 to 111/16 2 1/4
G 13/4 to 113/16 2 1/2
H 17/8 to 2 3
J 2 1/16 to 2 1/8 3 3/8
K 2 3/16 to 2 1/4 3 1/2
L 2 5/16 to 2 3/8 3 3/4
M 2 7/16 to 2 3/4 4
O 3 to 3 1/4 4 1/2
Generic design to fit most hooks. Available in standard steel or stainless steel. Neck and throat dimensions can
be combined for proper fit. (Example, neck size E with throat size L) Neck measurement must be diameter—not
circumference. Latch kit brochures available upon request. Contact Customer Service for dimensions not shown.
Heavy Duty J-Latch Replacement Kit

CRANE PART J-LATCH WEIGHT HOOK
BLOCK SAFE NUMBER KIT (LBS) PART
WORKING NUMBER NUMBERS
LOAD
(TONS)
3-5 471782 JL3-5 0.2 2590 / 10390 / 10153
10-15 471784 JL10-15 0.3 2217 / 10392
20-25 471785 JL20-25 0.4 2632
30 471786 JL30 0.6 2635
35-45 471787 JL35-45 0.8 2633
50-70 471788 JL50-70 1.7 2636 / 2637 NOTE: J-Latches fit only
75-110 471789 JL75-110 3.1 2638 / 2639 Johnson hooks with a lock pin
hole drilled through hook tip.
115-165 471790 JL115-165 3.3 2600 / 2630
195
UESCO Cranes
Together LAMCO and UESCO provide total service & installation for
all your overhead crane needs.
Call LAMCO for a free quote on a new overhead crane
at 309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885
UESCO standard and custom engineered cranes
feature the latest technology in the overhead material
handling industry. Single or two speed control for all
motions, two or three step infinitely variable speed
adjustable frequency control, or two, three or five
speed adjustable frequency control. Operation from
cab, pendant pushbutton or radio remote control.
Many additional features are available on our standard
pre-engineered cranes, or custom engineered cranes
for special applications such as bucket or magnet
cranes, outdoor or harsh environments and many
other special applications.
UESCO's seventy-five plus years of experience shows best in

our cost-effective pre-engineered designs: single and double
girder in both top running and underrunning configurations; all
featuring dual-motor drive systems. Capacities range from 1/2
thru 40 tons, with spans to 100 ft. Custom designed cranes to
meet your specific needs are also available, providing the same
performance and service-ability evident in the pre-engineered
cranes.
The best design is only as good as the care taken in fabrication.

Strict specifications, rigidly adhered to during all phases of the
assembly process assure you of a quality, cost-effective lifting
tool. Built of structural steel girders which meet or exceed
C.M.A.A. design specifications, UESCO cranes have a minimum
deflection of 1/600, with a built-in safety factor of 5 to 1.
UESCO maintains a fleet of service trucks and installation

crews skilled in all trades related to crane erection and servicing.
These technicians bring years of experience and factory training
to the jobsite, ensuring a safe, efficient installation with all
equipment adjusted to the manufacturer's operating specifications
Our service technicians are qualified to repair all makes of

overhead material handing equipment. Our service department
is on call around the clock, seven days a week to handle all
emergency repairs. We guarantee same day service for
breakdowns and the best delivery on reworks in the industry
Call LAMCO
309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885
197
Harrington complete crane systems offer you the ability to purchase a
complete crane system and save on installation by installing it yourself.
Call LAMCO for a free quote on a new overhead crane

at 309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885
Harrington Offers -
• Heavy Duty Class C Single & Double
Girder Complete Cranes - Motorized,
Geared or Push
• Medium Duty Series 300 & Light Duty
Series 200 Complete Push Cranes
Harrington’s heavy duty cranes have side guide
rollers which means these cranes operate much
easier than flanged wheel cranes.
Complete crane system includes:

• All bolted construction for ease in assembly
• End trucks come standard with bumpers, drop stops, and rail
sweeps.
• Drive shaft assembly with hand wheel and hand chain for
geared cranes.
• Standard bridge beam assembly with bracing and capacity
labels.
• Trolley hoist available in a wide selection of styles.
• Power supply to trolley hoist (if required).
• Optional runway electrification.
• Documentation including assembly and installation instruc-
tions, crane operator’s guide, and owner’s manuals.
• Touch-up paint.
• One year warranty.
Capabilities to count on:

• Capacities through 10 ton and spans through 60 feet.
• Order with or without hoist and trolley.
• Manual or electric hoists and trolley available.
• Suitable for use on ASCE crane rail or square bar.
198
HPC500
• 1/2 - 2 TON Capacities
Push End Trucks • Up to 24’ span
199
FREE STANDING
JIB CRANES
FREE STANDING JIB CRANES
• 360° rotation.
• Allows for electrified, motor driven, powered rotation through various collector ring assemblies.
• The boom or I-beam is designed to meet all specifications utilizing a 25% factor of rated load for impact and 15% of
rated load for hoist and trolley weight.
• The pipe mast or column is designed to give maximum strength and minimum deflection to resist bending, buckling,
and crushing as well as wear by the trunnion roller assembly.
• The top bearing assembly utilizes a Timken tapered roller bearing provided with a grease fitting for proper lubrication.
• The bearings are designed for a 5000 hour, B-10 design life.
Free standing jib cranes are available in three basic styles to suit
specific applications: base plate mounted, foundation mounted, and
sleeve insert mounted. 360° rotational capability can maximize the
utilization of any work area.
No additional support is needed other than the specified rein-
forced concrete foundation.
100 SERIES
standard spans to 20 ft.
up to 60 ft. on request
standard Base Plate Mounted

under boom • Utilizes a hexagonal base plate reinforced with six knee braces equally spaced
heights from
8 to 20 ft., on the circumference of the mast.
up to 40 ft. • The base plate assembly is secured by means of anchor bolts to a prescribed
on request
reinforced concrete foundation, with the number of anchor bolts varying with
the capacity of the crane.
• Six bolts are used for columns less than 16" in diameter and 12 bolts for
columns 16" in diameter and greater.
standard capacities to 5 tons,

special capacities to 15 tons
200
101 SERIES
Foundation Mounted
• Utilizes a square steel plate which is welded to the bottom of the
column.
standard
• The plate positions and levels the mast by anchoring it to a first-pour
under boom concrete footing.
heights from
8 to 20 ft., • A second-pour foundation of reinforced concrete supports the mast.
up to 40 ft. Makes complete use of the work floor area and can be used in
on request
applications where a base plate could hamper floor activity.
102 SERIES

standard
under boom
heights from
8 to 20 ft.,
up to 40 ft.
on request

Sleeve Insert Mounted

• 360° rotation.
• Utilizes a square steel plate which is welded to the
bottom of the sleeve.
• Allows for relocation of the mast.
• The plate positions and levels the sleeve by anchor-
ing it to a first-pour concrete footing.
• A second-pour foundation of reinforced concrete
supports the sleeve.
• The mast is then placed into the sleeve where it is
leveled by wedges and welded in place. 102 series
can be relocated without damaging the mast.*
• Makes complete use of the work floor area and can
be used in applications where a base plate could
hamper floor activity.
*New sleeve and foundation would be required.
201
MAST JIB CRANES
• SPANCO mast mounted jib cranes offer a lower cost alternative
to free standing jib cranes.
M AST
JIB CRANES
•
•
Full 360° rotation, without requiring a large mounting foundation
(which can cost more than the crane).
Requires top and bottom support of the mast to building floor
and overhead building steel.
• Power rotation is available on all models.
WARNING:
Jib cranes should not be hung from any existing building structure without first
consulting a qualified architect or engineer for the purpose of determining if the
structure is adequate. Severe bodily injury and property damage can result if
this procedure is not followed.
200 SERIES
Full Cantilever
• Utilizes an I-beam for the boom and an H-beam for the column.
• Two types of bearing arrangements:
1. A self-aligning spherical bearing is used on the top bearing assem-
bly.
2. A bronze bearing and bronze thrust washer are used on the bottom
standard assembly.
height to • Both bearing assemblies are provided with grease fittings to provide
20 ft.
lubrication and to aid rotation.
• The boom is mounted at the top of the mast in order to provide maxi-
mum underboom clearance.
standard capacities to 5 tons

Greater spans, heights, and
capacities on request
201 SERIES
standard Drop Cantilever

height to
20 ft.
• Identical to the Series 200 with the
addition of side-plate connections which
allow the boom to be mounted perma-
nently at any specified height on the
mast.
• Provides clearance for overhead
standard capacities to 5 tons obstructions above the boom, below
Greater spans, heights, and
capacities on request the top of the mast.
202
WALLMOUNTED
JIB CRANES
Cost-effective Solutions
For Lifting and Moving
Heavy Material WALL MOUNTED JIB CRANES
300 SERIES
(longer spans available)
Wall Cantilever Jib Cranes

• 200° rotation.
• Offers greatest potential underboom clearance
because it can be installed more closely to the ceil-
ing than other wall mounted styles.
• Two connection types:
standard
capacities to 1. A welded connection is used in most capacity and
5 tons, boom spans.
higher capaci-
ties available 2. A bolted connection is used for larger spans and
capacities because of shipping considerations.
Stiffeners are welded to the mast at the point
where the wall brackets are connected to stiffen the
web of the I-beam.
• Powered rotation is available on all models.
• Hardware for mounting to wall or column supplied
by others.
Wall Cantilever Kits (shown above)

Customers can fabricate their own Wall Cantilever Jib Crane using the hinge
components supplied by SPANCO. All hardware for bolting the hinges to
the jib are supplied.
203
WARNINGS FOR 300 AND 301 SERIES JIBS
This equipment is not, in any way, designed for the lifting, supporting, or
transporting humans. Failure to follow the specified load and mounting limitations can
result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage.
Jib cranes should not be hung from any existing building structure without first
consulting a qualified architect or engineer for the purpose of determining if the
structure is adequate. Severe bodily injury and property damage can result if this
procedure is not followed.
301 SERIES
standard capacities to
5 tons
WALL BRACKET KITS

Include all components
except the I-beam, tie rod,
and mounting hardware
which if preferred, can be
standard spans to 30 ft. purchased locally.
(longer spans available)
Wall Bracket Tie Rod Supported Jib Cranes

• 200° degree rotation.
• Utilizes a standard I-beam boom, a tie rod threaded
at both ends, a fabricated beam bracket, and two
wall brackets; one for the tie rod and one for the
boom.
• Allows maximum usage of the work area, including
work close to the existing structure, because there
are no supporting components under the boom.
• This design is the most economical style of jib crane,
provided overhead clearance or building column
strength is not a limiting factor.
• Hardware for mounting to wall or column supplied by
others.
Wall Bracket Connection

• Top and bottom wall brackets utilize a formed steel
channel, with two bronze bushings, bronze thrust
washers, and formed tie rod clevises.
• All bolted connections are in double shear.
• All swivel connections utilize bronze bushings and grease
fittings to ease rotation,
promoting long life and low maintenance.
204
ARTICULATING
JIB CRANES
ARTICULATING JIB CRANES
Free Standing
• Articulating jib cranes can move loads around corners and columns,
reach into machinery and containers and service an area from close to
the pivot point to the end of the boom for 360° of operation. Capacities
from 150 to 2,000 lbs., spans to 16 ft.
• Articulating jibs can be floor, wall, ceiling, or bridge crane mounted to
best suit your application.
• Free standing and ceiling mounted series offer
360° rotation with options to
internally pipe
compressed air,
vacuum or
electrification
to any device supported on
the end of the boom.
Bridge and Ceiling

Mounted
• SPANCO’s bridge mounted
articulating jib design offers
more headroom than those
by other manufacturers.
• Bridge mounted jibs can
support nearly any type of
manipulator, balancer,
or hoist.
205
SELECTING YOUR SPANCO GANTRY CRANE
T SERIES-3-Way Adjustable gantries, fabricated from heavy gauge square mechanical tubing, offer the greatest under I-
beam height and range of adjustability. Maximum flexibility of span, height, and tread adjustment allows use on
uneven flooring. Adjustability allows travel through doorways and aisles, under mezzanines, or other overhead
obstructions.
Motorized option available.
• All steel construction capacities to 10 tons.
-maximum overall heights to 24'-3" -standard spans to 40 ft.
• Steel construction with aluminum I-beam capacities to three tons.
• All aluminum construction capacities to three tons.
A SERIES gantries, fabricated from heavy gauge rectangular mechanical tubing, provide a lower cost and lighter weight
lifting alternative to the T Series for applications requiring movement through doorways and under obstructions. Design
does not require brace legs, allowing greater clear span. Adjustable span optional. Motorized option not available.
• All steel construction, adjustable and fixed height capacities to 10 tons.
-maximum under beam heights to 16 ft. -standard spans to 40 ft.
• All aluminum construction, adjustable height/span capacities to two tons.
-maximum under beam heights to 12'-2" -standard spans to 15 ft.
E SERIES ECONOMY gantries, fabricated from heavy gauge square mechanical tubing, offer a no-frills lifting alternative
to A Series in fixed and adjustable heights and spans. Motorized option not available.
• Steel construction, fixed height capacities to five tons.
-standard under beam height 10 ft. -standard span 12 ft.
• Steel construction, adjustable height/span standard capacities to three tons
-maximum under beam heights to 14 ft. -standard span 11'-6"
PF SERIES gantries, fabricated and welded from heavy gauge steel mechanical tubing, provide solid lifting for applica-
tions requiring movement of large heavy loads. Ample bracing ensures high rigidity for trackless or track-mounted
motor-driven applications. Offers greatest fixed height. Ideal for motorized applications and single leg (semi-gantry)
configurations.
• All steel construction capacities to 15 tons.
-maximum under beam heights to 35 ft. -standard spans to 40 ft.
Floor Protecting Casters

• Standard on all gantries through 15 tons.
• Wheels feature moldon polyurethane tread that provides maximum floor protection, resisting chipping
and outwearing ordinary plastic wheels.
• Equipped with four-position swivel locks (except E series). Casters lock at 90° intervals to allow
travel in a straight line and to help prevent movement under load when locked in opposable
directions.
• Wheel brakes and other optional accessories can be supplied on all gantries. SPANCO can supply
any style of caster to meet customer specifications.
206
T SERIES
GCRANES
ANTRY Adjustable Span
Adjustable Height
Adjustable Tread
*capped I-beam
207
*capped I-beam
208
*capped I-beam
T Series all aluminum up to 2 TON, 15’ span and T Series aluminum I-beam up to 3 TON, 15’ span
available upon request
209
A SERIES
GCRANES
ANTRY
*capped I-beam
210
A SERIES
GCRANES
ANTRY
*capped I-beam
“A Series” adjustable height gantry available. Allows loads to be moved through door-
ways, under obstructions and lifted on uneven surfaces.
“A Series” all aluminum up to 2 TON, 15’ span available on request.
211
E SERIES
GCRANES
ANTRY
LUG-ALL winch-hoist kits not available for height adjustment

of E Series gantries.
212
PF SERIES
GCRANES
ANTRY
213
PF SERIES
GCRANES
ANTRY
214
POWER DRIVES FOR
GCRANES
ANTRY
POWER DRIVES - Available on T and PF Series only
Power drive kit includes two-drive assemblies with either
polyurethane (trackless) or V-groove wheels, sprockets,
chains, two-gear reducers, two single-speed, 230/460V-three
phase TEFC motors, solid state adjustable “soft start,” and
two-idler assemblies. Standard travel speed is 50 FPM. Other
speeds and voltages available on request.
Trackless kit- also includes guide rollers on one drive and one idler
assembly. Idler and drive assemblies are supplied with
polyurethane bumpers.
TRIPODS
TRIPODS Quick, easy setup for heavy

lifting in outdoor areas
with no overhead sup-
Free swiveling port.
eyebolt hangs
plumb to protect tri- Steel and aluminum con-
pod head from struction capacities to
twist and strain. two tons.
Aluminum feet are • Independently,

used on all hard adjustable legs permit
surfaces. Standard use on uneven ground
on all models and adjust on six inch
unless otherwise centers.
specified. • Standard lashing kit, included with every tripod, prevents legs
from spreading on hard or soft surfaces.
Mud feet are used
on soft ground.
Integral spikes firm-
ly entrench legs to
prevent slipping or
sinking into ground.
Complete inter-
changeability with
aluminum feet and
available in place of
aluminum feet or
as an optional
accessory.
215
ELECTROMOTIVE™
Electromotive Systems is an industry leader in providing precision
electrification products for overhead material handling equipment.
FESTOON SYSTEMS AND ELECTROBAR® FS Electrobar Elite®

CABLE
A totally enclosed 4 conductor

bar system available in 60, 100,
130 and 200 Amp configurations.
Electrobar FS® Conductor Bar System IP23 Finger Safe Rating.
for the electrification of cranes, Lightweight, rigid design.
monorails and automated storage and Modular construction and other
Electromotive Systems offers a complete retrieval systems! design features significantly
line of festooning hardware and cable to reduce installation time and cost.
efficiently complete the delivery of power Standard Features
or control in a variety of material handling • A unique shape that maximizes Standard Features
applications. safety and performance • Snap together covers, power
• A UL Listed "finger safe" design feeds and hangers
Festoon Systems that minimizes the potential for • Lightweight, rigid construc-
• C-Track electrical contact tion
• Heavy-Duty Aluminum • Easy installation and maintenance, • Ease of installation, lower
• Heavy-Duty I-Beam which reduces labor costs. total system cost
• Mill Duty I-Beam • Low maintenance
• Tag Line Wire Supported Available in 90, 110, 125*, 250 and 400 • Improved safety, (finger safe
AMP ratings, and single and double rating of IP23).
Plug and Play Festoon Hardware shoe collector assemblies. Snap-in
hanger kits are available for 2, 3 and
Electromotive™ Cable 4 pole applications.
*Suitable for 125 Amp configurations

in non-UL applications.
SBP2® PENDANT PUSH-BUTTON Pre-Engineered Panels

STATIONS I M P U L S E ®o P 3 ,
Featuring a lightweight, IMPULSE®oG+ Series 2,
ergonomic design, Electromotive and IMPULSE ® oVG+
Systems SBP2 Pendant Series 2 drives can be
Pushbutton Stations provide purchased as part of a
optimum control and complete, pre-engineered
performance with less effort and TCONTROLS ® motor
fatigue than traditional pendants. control system. These
With most models weighing quick-ship, easy-to-install
under two pounds, this slim-line panels offer cost-effective and reliable operation using high
pendant rests easily and quality components. All panels are tested and quality-approved
comfortably in the palm of your prior to shipment.
hand. The high-impact resistant, watertight enclosure
is ideally suited for any industrial application.
216
Williams Wireless Pendants
Solo 400 Series
Industrial Radio Remote Controls
• 100% Error Free Transmission • Safe Design
• One Million Press Cycles • Familiar Pendant Design
• 200 Hour Battery Life • Synthesized RF
• 32,768 Unique ID Codes • Main Safety Relay
• Waterproof & Durable • Total Solution
• No Site License Required • One Year Guarantee
AVAILABLE IN SIX MODELS
Solo 400 6 single-speed buttons + AUX + EMS Stop
2 dual-speed buttons + 4 single-speed buttons + AUX +

Solo 410
EMS.
6 dual-speed buttons (3 wire cumulative) + AUX + EMS + 2

Solo 420
Separate Common Circuits (Typical)
6 dual-speed buttons + SELECT button for dual hoist and

Solo 430
trolley + EMS.
Solo 430A 6 dual-speed buttons + 3rd Speed/AUX button + EMS
6 dual-speed buttons (4 wire non-cumulative) + AUX +

Solo 430B
EMS + 3 Separate Common Circuits
217
™
telePilot Remote Radio Controls
DELIVERS MAXIMUM VALUE FOR YOUR INVEST-

MENT
• Transmitter backward compatible to old receivers—preserve your
9K and 10K receiver investment.
• Stores four complete system configurations eliminating the cost

and hassle of tracking and maintaining a fleet of spares.
• Delivers more than 200 hours of operation with a disposable lithi-

um battery.
• Easy programming using Palm Pilot-® and free telePilot.
FEATURES SET IT APART FROM THE COMPETITION

• Three motions standard, up to five motions optional.
• Single or two speed operation.
• Electronically synthesized frequency allows for 29 operating channels ...no crystals to break.
• Special output mapping available to customize your crane configurations.
• Lightweight ergonomically designed transmitter.
• Easy interactive PDA programming via infrared wireless link.
• Compact receiver design installs easily in the most confined spaces.
• Controller and diagnostic LEDs allow you to perform diagnostics without opening the receiver door.
• Internal master relay disable switch allows you to safely test the controls "live" without moving the crane.
MOST DURABLE TRANSMITTER ON THE MARKET

• Durable, lightweight, extruded aluminum transmitter housing.
• Rubber coated, polycarbonate end caps.
• Switches rated for one million plus operations.
• Shock mounted circuit boards are more impact resistant.
• 3 Battery options:
AA batteries
Rechargeable lithium
Disposable lithium
218
™
telePendant Remote Radio Controls
FLEXIBILITY YOU WILL ONLY FIND FROM TELEMO-

TIVE
• Available in up to 3 motions with 6 auxiliary functions or 5 motions
with 4 auxiliary functions.
• Available in single, two or three-speed designs.
• Backward compatible to older Telemotive receivers - preserve your

10K investment.
• Can be configured to operate 4 cranes in one transmitter.

9.5”
• Palm Pilot programmable in under a minute. (24 cm)
• Electronically synthesized frequency allows for 29 operating chan-

nels ...no crystals to break.
• telePendant™ can be custom labeled.
MOST DURABLE TRANSMITTER ON THE MARKET

• Durable, lightweight, specially blended polymer case withstands Sized right to fit your
shocks and is chemically resistant. hand comfortably
• Simple-to-operate, maintenance-free, "Pendant Style" pushbutton switches save you money and are tested
to in excess of one million operations.
• Exceptionally long battery life - can operate up to 200 hours with a disposable lithium battery pack. May also
be operated with standard AA batteries.
AWARD-WORTHY ERGONOMICS
• Total weight less than 1.3 Ibs.
• 50% smaller by volume than its predecessor.
• Ergonomically designed switches are easy to handle and control.
219
DYNAFOR® • HANDIFOR®
DYNAFOR® MWX Crane weigher
The DYNAFOR® MWX gives you the possibility to control and measure loads on cranes with the
DYNAFOR® LLX technology. It has great work autonomy of up to 700 hours battery life. The MWX,
with its LCD readout, programmable functions, and remote display, is ideal for weighing with
cranes. Models 2.5 to 12.5 are available with infrared control and LED, remote read-out.
Dynafor® MWX 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5
lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000

Capacity
t 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5
±lbs. 1 2 5 10 20 50
Accuracy (0.2%)
±kg 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 25
in. 1 1 1 1 3/4 1 3/4 1 3/4
Height of Digits
mm 25 25 25 44 44 44
lbs. 10.4 10.4 10.4 15.5 18.7 46.3
Weight
kg 4.7 4.7 4.7 7 8.5 21
lbs. 0.2 0.5 1.0 2 5 10
Smallest Readout kg 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5
lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000
Maximum Display kg 250 500 1,250 2,500 5,000 12,500
Dimensions 0.25/0.5/1.25 2.5 5 12.5
in. 17.3 x 5.4 x 6.3 17.3 x 7.9 x 7 20.5 x 7.9 x 7 27.6 x 7.9 x 8
HxWxD mm 440 x 138 x 160 440 x 200 x 177 520 x 200 x 177 700 x 200 x 205
HANDIFOR® Compact weigher

The lightweight, compact and ergonomic HANDIFOR® is built for measuring small forces or loads.
Specially designed for difficult load checking conditions, the HANDIFOR® will measure the weight of
your packages, dispatch bags, courier, materials in laboratories and many other materials that need
weighing.
Handifor® 20 50 100
Capacity lbs. 44 110 220

daN 20 50 100
Accuracy (0.8%) ±lbs. 0.5 1 2

±daN 0.2 0.4 0.8
Height of Digits in. 0.53 0.53 0.53

mm 13.5 13.5 13.5
lbs. 0.5 0.5 0.5
Weight
kg 0.22 0.22 0.22
lbs. 0.2 0.4 1
Smallest readout kg 0.1 0.2 0.5
lbs. 44 110 220
Maximum Display kg 20 50 100
Dimensions in. 5.51 x 3.15 x 1.57
HxWxD mm 140 x 80 x 40
DYNAFOR® LLZ Compact electronic load indicator

The DYNAFOR® LLZ is a compact and economical load indicator built for measuring tensile forces and
checking loads. Ideal for monitoring lifting systems, check weighing in factories, for checking tension in
power lines and guy ropes, and many other applications. The DYNAFOR® LLZ displays in mass (lbs.)
or force (daN) and offers more than a 100 hours battery life.
Dynafor® LLZ 0.25 0.5 1 2 3.2 6.4 10 20
lbs. 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 6,400 12,800 20,000 40,000
Capacity t 0.25 0.5 1 2 3.2 6.4 10 20
±lbs. 4 8 16 30 50 100 160 300
Accuracy (0.8%) ±daN 2 4 8 15 25 50 80 150
in. 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Height of Digits mm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
lbs. 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.9 3.3 5.1 8.8 15.5
Weight kg 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.5 2.3 4 7
lbs. 1 2 5 10 10 20 50 100
Smallest Readout daN 0.5 1 2 5 5 10 25 50
lbs. 550 1,100 2,200 4,400 7,000 14,000 20,000 40,000
Maximum Display kg 275 550 1,100 2,200 3,500 7,000 10,000 20,000
Dimensions 0.25/0.5/1 2 3.2 6.4 10 20
in. 8.7 x 3.5 x 1.7 8.7 x 3.5 x 1.9 9.6 x 3.8 x 1.9 10.8 x 4.5 x 1.9 12.8 x 4.33 x 2.44 14.8 x 5.27 x 2.83
HxWxD mm 220 x 90 x 42 220 x 90 x 48 243 x 97 x 48 275 x 115 x 48 376 x 110 x 62 376 x 134 x 72
220
DYNAFOR® LLX • LLX-TR WIRELESS
DYNAFOR® LLX Electronic dynamometer
The DYNAFOR® LLX load indicating device is an accurate and compact instrument
for measuring tensile forces and loads. Designed for use in though job sites
conditions, the DYNAFOR® features a built-in LCD readout, programmable functions
and remote display.
Dynafor® LLX 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250
Capacity lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 500,000
t 0.25 0.5 1.25 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250
Accuracy (0.2%)* ±lbs. 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 400 1,000

±kg 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 25 50 100 200 500
Height of Digits in. 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 1 1 1 1 1.75

mm 19 19 19 19 19 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 44
±lbs. 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 4 8.4 14.5 33 101 474
Weight
kg 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.98 3.8 6.6 15.1 46 215
lbs. 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 N/A N/A
Smallest Readout t N/A N/A N/A 0.001 0.002 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1
lbs. 500 1,000 2,500 5,000 10,000 25,000 50,000 99,950 N/A N/A
Maximum Display t N/A N/A N/A 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250
FCC APPROVED
*
Units of measures can be displayed in lbs., kg, t, metric ton, daN and kN (on most mod-
els). U.S. & Canada
Display features auto shut-off, peak hold and zero tare.
Dimensions 0.25/0.5/1.25 2.5 5 12.5 25 50 100 250
in. 7.5x3.2x2.2 8.4x3.2x2.2 9.2x3.5x2.2 12.2x4.32.3 14.1x5.3x2.7 17.3x6.5x3.9 26x10.2x4.7 35.6x16.7x9.8

HxWxD mm 190x83x56 214x83x56 234x90x56 310x110x58 360x134x68 440x164x98 660x260x18 905x424x248
DYNAFOR® LLX-TR Wireless electronic dynamometer

Using the popular DYNAFOR® load indicating strain gauge technology, the
DYNAFOR® LLX-TR wireless radio-controlled dynamometer will let you read data at
a distance of up to 200 ft. (60 m). An infrared transmitter lets you adjust the on/off,
tare, peak hold parameters from a distance of up to 70 ft. (20 m) for efficient, precise
and secure load readouts. Unique frequencies available for use of units near on
another. See our DYNAFOR® LLX table for technical specifications.
U.S. FCC Identifier: OVL-DYNAFORHHDRX

Canada Cert. No.: 36191031952
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Remote readout for LLX & MWX
• Connection by cable up to 325 ft. (100 m)

• Hand held with 3/4 in. (18 mm) (LCD) digits
• Peak Hold, and Tare functions
Portable printer for LLX-TR w. Wireless Remote
• Radio signal received up to 200 ft. away

• Same functions as below
Portable printer for LLX and MWX
• Connection by cable up to 325 ft. (100 m)

• Printer receives signal, records load, date, time
• Aluminum casing, measuring 14.5 x 12 x 3.7 in.
(370 x 300 x 94 mm)
221
dynasafe
®
“UNIVERSAL” load limiter - HF 32 series

The DYNASAFE load limiter, model HF32, is a mechanical
device that has been designed particularly for fitting to exist-
ing overhead cranes and hoists with a dead end wire rope
and connecting directly into the UP function of the lifting sys-
tem.
It is a simple device with a microswitch to allow for certain
dynamic effects and which, when correctly adjusted, will pre-
vent an overload condition of the lifting system.
Application:
This mechanical load cell has been designed to provide a Axle
trip point for lifting systems which have a dead end wire rope. pin
The trip point provides a signal that the user may employ
depending on his requirements, e.g.:
for load limiting in lifting systems
to limit the speed as a function of the load on traversing A
to limit the effort applied for pulling
This UNIVERSAL load cell is recommended for its
simplicity and quick-fitting capability.
Operating principle
The load cell operates by the movement of metal within its
elastic limits. This movement acts on an adjustable switch
giving an “all-or-nothing” signal. The position of the
adjustable pin sets the capacity range. The central
“UNIVERSAL” fixing bracket is adapted to suit wire ropes
from 5 to 16 mm (model HF 32/1), 17 to 26 mm(model HF
32/2), and from 27 to 36 mm (model HF 36/3)
Full details may be found in the installation manual.
The effort applied through the wire rope “deforms” the body
of the load cell creating a difference in the relative positions
of the two sections. This operates a microswitch which may B
be wired directly into the UP Relay of the lifting system to
prevent an overload condition. Fig. 1 - HF 32 “universal” load cell
Operating principle
Complies with ANSI/ASME HST-4M
overload limiting device
Technical Specification:
Max. capacity HF 32/1/A: 6000 lbs on a single fall
HF 32/2/A: 12,000 lbs on a single fall
HF 32/3/A: 24,000 lbs on a single fall
Adjustment: Fine-Thread Screw
Measuring cell: Microswitch
Model Code Dia. of Capacity A B Depth Trip point power 4A/220 Vac
w. rope 0.5/220 Vdc
in.(mm) lbs. in. in. in. Repeatability of cut out: +/- 5%
o o
HF 32/1/A 0420600 3/16 - 5/8 550-6000 5.9 2.75 1.57 Temperature range: From -30 C to + 80 C
(5 -16) Connections: 4 Conductor (NO,NC)
HF 32/2/A 0420601 11/16 -1 600-12000 7.9 3.9 1.97 (6 ft lead supplied)
(17 - 26) Material: Anodized, Aircraft
HF 32/3/A 0420602 1 1/16 -1 3/8 2000-24000 11 5.43 2.36 grade aluminum
Protection class IP55
(27 - 36)
Special versions are available for smaller

capacities, dynamic filtering, dual trip points and
explosive atmospheres
222
Hand Winches – for Lifting or Pulling
Spur Gear Spur Gear Spur Gear Worm Gear Worm Gear
up to 1,000 lb up to 2,000 lb up to 10,000 lb up to 4,000 lb Speed Reducers
Power Winches – for Lifting or Pulling
Series 4WP and 4WP2T8 Series 4WP2D8 Series 477 Series 4WS
up to 2,000 lb up to 1,500 lb up to 2,000 lb up to 6,000 lb
Power Winches – for Lifting or Pulling
Series 4WS Series 4HS Series 4HPF Series 4HPFC Series 4HWF
up to 26,000 lb up to 56,000 lb up to 25,000 lb up to 15,000 lb 8,100 lb
Davit and Floor Cranes
Series 5122 Series 5110 Series 5124 Series 57 Series 548

up to 500 lb up to 1,000 lb up to 2,000 lb up to 2,200 lb up to 1,000 lb
Thern products are not for lifting people or things over people.
Contact LAMCO for ordering details

309-764-7400
800-447-1885
223
Griphoist / Tirfor
Heavy-duty wire rope hoist for unlimited lifts and pulls
Approx. Wire
Speed Weight Weight Dimensions Wire
Rope
per of of of Handle Rope
Dimensions of break
min Nominal Capacity Machine Wire Rope Ext./Closed dia.
Machine strain
Model (fpm) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) in (mm) in (mm)
in (mm) in (mm)
2,000*/1,500** 18.5 30ft./9m 20-3/4x9-3/4 x4-1/2 28/18 5/16 10,000

TU-17 7-9 (800/600) (8.4) 8 (3.6) (528x284x113) (730/450) (8.3) (4,800)
4,000*/3,000** 26x13x5-3/4
41 60ft./18m 45/26 7/16 20,000
TU-28 7-8 (1,600/1,200) (660x360x145)
(20) 28.9 (13) (1147/648) (11.5) (9,600)
8,000*/6,000** 27x13x6-1/8
59.5 60ft./18m 45/26 5/8 40,000
TU-32 5 (3,200/2,400) (685x365x156)
(27) 28.9 (13) (1147/648) (16.3) (19,200)
2,000* 14.25 30ft./9m 16-1/2x9-7/8x3-7/8 27/16 5/16 10,000

T-508 7-9 (420x250x99)
(800) (6.6) 8 (3.5) (690/405) (8.3) (4,800)
4,000* 30 60ft./18m 20-7/8x12-7/16x5 45/26 7/16 20,000

T-516 6 (530x315x127)
(1,600) (13.5) 28.9 (13) (1147/648) (11.5) (9,600)
8,000* 51 30ft./9m 24-7/16x14x5-1/8 45/26 5/8 40,000

T-532 6 (631x357x148)
(3,200) (24) 8 (3.5) (1147/648) (16.3) (19,200)
224
Gripwinch
High speed powered wire rope winch
Rated Speed Motor Motor Wire Electric
Model Load (FPM) Type KW Rope Control
lbs. in.- ft. Pendant
Gripwinch - Mobile Winch with 1600 ft. (500 m) driven wire rope reeler with clutch
GXE504 1,000 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE500 1,000 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE505 1,000 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/1.1 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE506 1,000 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/2.2 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE503 1,000 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE704 1,500 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.75 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE700 1,500 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.5 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE705 1,500 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.75/1.5 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE706 1,500 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.75/3 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE703 1,500 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.5/3 5/16-1,600 10 ft.
GXE1024 2,200 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 3/8-1,300 10 ft.
GXE1020 2,200 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2 3/8-1,300 10 ft.
GXE1025 2,200 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 3/8-1,300 10 ft.
GXE1026 2,200 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 3/8-1,300 10 ft.
GXE1023 2,200 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2/4 3/8-1,300 10 ft.
GXE3050 6,600 23 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 4.5 9/16-1,600 10 ft.
Gripwinch - Mobile Winch with 200 ft. (60 m) free running wire rope reeler
GXE300 700 33 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE302 700 66 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE504 1,000 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE500 1,000 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE505 1,000 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE506 1,000 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 0.55/2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE503 1,000 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE704 1,500 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE700 1,500 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE705 1,500 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE706 1,500 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/4.0 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE703 1,500 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2/4.0 5/16-200 10 ft.
GXE1024 2,000 17 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1 3/8-160 10 ft.
GXE1020 2,000 35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2 3/8-160 10 ft.
GXE1025 2,000 17/35 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/2.2 3/8-160 10 ft.
GXE1026 2,000 17/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 1.1/4.0 3/8-160 10 ft.
GXE1023 2,000 35/70 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 2.2/4.0 3/8-160 10 ft.
GXE3050 6,600 21 3 Phase 220V, 60HZ 4.5 9/16-360 10 ft.
225
HEAVY DUTY WINCHES
AND RIGGING FOR
WORK BOATS
& BARGES
ELECTRIC WINCHES HAND WINCHES

Simple to operate and rugged, Patterson's tow- Proven track record of efficient and fast
boat winches provide tensioning by electric operation.
power, allow for controlled pay-out and require
minimal maintenance.
• Available in a wide range of models from 20 ton • Available from 20 ton to 65 ton capacities.
to 65 ton capacity. • Dished handwheel for operator safety.
• Electric spring-loaded brake. • Solid handwheel option available.
• Heavy-duty roller chain and sprockets. • Pull-up ratchet enables high tension.
• Rope and gear guards protect wire rope and • Many models include Patterson's brake-lock
enclose the gearing. system which uses an eccentric-cam safety-
• Release knob frees brake for manual operation. release design.
• Machined alloy gearing - no castings! • Full size rope guard helps to prevent fouling of
• High-strength phosphor bronze bearings. wire rope.
• Bolted keeper plate allows fast, easy shaft • Hinged gear shroud protects gearing.
removal. • Sturdy and durable components offer reliable, low
• 230/460V-3 Phase-60Hz NEMA Design D motors. maintenance operation.
Other special motors available.
65 TON ELECTRIC WINCH (WWP65E-10-14 ) 20 TON HAND WINCH (WWP20M-6)
226
228
229
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
230
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
231
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
232
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
233
SUITABLE FOR:
• Excavators
• Wheel Loaders
• Other weld-on applications
Available in capacities ranging from 500 - 75,000 lbs.

Thread diameters range from 1/4” - 2 3/4”.
Take up ranging from 4” - 24”
Contact LAMCO at 309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885 for dimensions available.

234
STANDARD RATCHET
TURNBUCKLES
Patterson offers a complete line of
turnbuckles for various uses including applications in general industry,
farming, mining, construction, shipbuilding, and the marine industry.
Eye & Eye

Ratchet Turnbuckle*
235
236
237
TENSOR
TENSORS have a screw-type action with eccentric loading. By turning the drive head, the large tube telescopes
over the inner tube and pulls the anchoring points together. The drive head can be turned manually for initial
tightening. Maximum tightening is achieved by using a square drive ratchet wrench or impact wrench in the drive
head. Up to 1,000 pounds tension is possible with hand tightening alone!
Initial low tensioning or pulling (up Easy tensioning with a common Effortless, speedy tensioning with
to 9,000 Ibs.) simply by turning ratchet wrench. a powered impact wrench.
the drive head by hand.
Because all of the working parts are completely enclosed, the TENSOR is almost indestructible. Because the
TENSOR leaves the factory fully lubricated, the TENSOR is almost maintenance free.
Designed initially as a marine tensioner to safely secure heavy trailers, cargo containers, rail cars and more
even in rough seas, the TENSOR has evolved into an industrial tool for any tensioning or pulling application.
Now used in mining, trucking, railroading ...even guy wire tensioning for portable radar antennas.
238
239
240
241
240.
242
240.
243
BIG ORANGE ATTACHMENTS—SHACKLES—CARBON
CM super strong anchor shackles
• These shackles have higher working • All bolt, nut & cotter shackles • Painted shackles are orange.
load limits than specified by Federal have thread protected ends.
• Ton = 2,000 lbs. ( 3/16" – 2"), 2,200 lbs.
Specifications. (21/2" – 31/2").
• When ordering, specify galvanized (G)
• All shackle pins are forged from alloy or painted (P). • Standard industry tolerances apply.
steel, heat treated and tempered to
• Galvanized per ASTM A153. • Built-in Distortion Detectors ( 3/16" – 2").
give greater strength.
• All shackles are marked with
size (inches and millimeters)
and working load limit in tons.
• Ultimate strength equals
6 times working load limit.
Proof load equals 2.2 times
working load limit.
Screw pin type Round pin type Bolt & nut type
Working
load Painted Galv. Painted Galv. Painted Galv.
Size limit Product UPC UPC Product UPC UPC Product UPC UPC
(in.) (tons) code 43927- 43927- code 43927- 43927- code 43927- 43927-
3/16 111/2 M645 — 40061 M345 — 40095 — — —
1/4 113/4 M646 40004 40062 M346 40100 40099 — — —
5/16 111 M647 40008 40064 M347 40105 40104 — — —
3/8 1111/2 M648 40012 40066 M348 40110 40109 — — —
7/16 112 M649 40016 40068 M349 40115 40114 — — —
1/2 113 M650 40020 40070 M350 40120 40119 M850 40183 40182
5/8 1141/2 M651 40023 40073 M351 40125 40124 M851 40186 40185
3/4 116 1/2 M652 40027 40074 M352 40130 40129 M852 40189 40188
7/8 118 1/2 M653 40031 40076 M353 40135 40134 M853 40192 40191
1 110 M654 40036 40077 M354 41950 40139 M854 40195 40194
11/8 112 M655 40039 40080 M355 40145 40144 M855 40198 40197
11/4 114 M656 40041 40082 M356 40150 40149 M856 40201 40200
13/8 117 M666 40044 40084 M366 40158 40157 M866 40204 40203
11/2 120 M657 40048 40087 M357 40164 40163 M857 40207 40206
15/8 124 M685 40052 40089 M385 40169 40168 M885 40210 40209
13/4 130 M677 40056 40091 M377 40175 40174 M877 40213 40212
2 135 M658 40060 40093 M358 40180 40179 M858 40216 40215
Dimensions (inches) apply to all styles of anchor shackles

Dia. Width Inside Outside Approx.
of between Inside width dia. of weight
pin eyes length at bow eye each
Size P W L B (min.) R (max.) (lbs.)
3/16 1/4 3/8 17/8 5/8 5/8 111.06
1/4 5/16 15/32 111/8 3/4 7/8 111.12
5/16 3/8 17/32 111/4 13/16 1 111.20
3/8 7/16 21/32 117/16 15/16 11/8 111.30
7/16 1/2 3/4 1111/16 11/16 11/4 111.50
1/2 5/8 13/16 117/8 13/16 13/8 111.75
5/8 3/4 11/16 12 3/8 11/2 17/8 111.3
3/4 7/8 11/4 12 13/16 13/4 2 1/8 112.3
7/8 1 17/16 13 5/16 2 2 3/8 113.5
1 11/8 111/16 13 3/4 2 5/16 2 5/8 115.0
11/8 11/4 113/16 14 1/4 2 5/8 2 7/8 117.0
11/4 13/8 21/32 14 11/16 2 7/8 3 1/4 119.5
13/8 11/2 2 1/4 15 1/4 3 1/4 3 1/2 112.5
11/2 15/8 2 3/8 15 3/4 3 3/8 3 3/4 117.2
15/8 13/4 2 5/8 16 1/4 4 4 1/8 123.5
13/4 2 2 7/8 17 4 1/2 4 1/2 127.7
2 2 1/4 3 1/4 17 3/4 5 1/4 5 1/4 139.0
MADE IN U.S.A.
244
245
SKOOKUM®
Gold Standard®
Anchor Shackles
No. 320 No. 263 No. 264

Safety Pin Shackle Screwpin Shackle Screwpin Shackle
Available 1/2” - 4 1/2” Available 1/2” - 3” Hex Head Pin
or Marine Hex Head
Available 1/2” - 3”
WLL1 Nominal WT.2

Size W Tol. ± L Tol. ± B R P
(TONS) D (lbs)
1/2” 5 5/8” 13/16” ± 1/16” 1 7/8” ± 1/8” 1 9/32” 1 7/16” 5/8” .75
5/8” 7 3/4” 1 1/16” ± 1/16” 2 1/2” ± 1/8” 1 3/4” 1 5/8” 3/4” 1.5
3/4” 9 7/8” 1 1/4” ± 1/16” 2 7/8” ± 1/4” 2” 1 27/32” 7/8” 2.2
7/8” 12 1” 1 7/16” ± 1/16” 3 5/16” ± 1/4” 2 9/32” 2 1/8” 1” 3.7
1” 16 1 1/8” 1 11/16” ± 1/16” 3 3/4” ± 1/4” 2 11/16” 2 1/4” 1 1/8” 5.5
1 1/8” 18 1 1/8” 1 13/16” ± 1/16” 4 1/4” ± 1/4” 2 15/16” 2 5/8” 1 1/4” 7.2
1 1/4” 21 1 1/4” 2 1/32” ± 1/16” 4 5/8” ± 1/4” 3 1/4” 3” 1 3/8” 10.5
1 3/8” 26 1 3/8” 2 1/4” ± 1/8” 5 1/4” ± 1/4” 3 5/8” 3 1/4” 1 1/2” 13.8
1 1/2” 31 1 1/2” 2 3/8” ± 1/8” 5 3/4” ± 1/4” 3 7/8” 3 7/16” 1 5/8” 18.5
1 5/8” 35 1 5/8” 2 5/8” ± 1/8” 6 1/4” ± 1/4” 4 5/8” 4” 1 3/4” 23
1 3/4” 41 1 3/4” 2 7/8” ± 1/8” 7” ± 1/4” 5” 4 1/4” 2” 29.5
2” 52 2” 3 1/4” ± 1/8” 7 3/4” ± 1/2” 5 3/4” 5” 2 1/4” 42
2 1/4” 67 2 1/4” 3 7/8” ± 1/8” 9 1/4” ± 1/2” 6 1/2” 5 1/2” 2 1/2” 60
2 1/2” 82 2 1/2” 4 1/8” ± 1/8” 10 1/2” ± 1/2” 7 1/4” 5 7/8” 2 3/4” 90
2 3/4” 104 2 3/4” 4 1/2” ± 1/8” 11 1/2” ± 3/4” 7 1/2” 6 1/4” 3” 115
3” 117 3” 5” ± 1/8” 13” ± 3/4” 7 7/8” 6 1/2” 3 1/4” 150
3 1/2” 150 3 1/2” 5 3/4” ± 1/4” 15” ± 3/4” 9 1/2” 8” 3 3/4” 250
4” 175 4” 6 1/2” ± 1/4” 17” ± 3/4” 11” 9” 4 1/4” 350
4 1/2” 210 4 1/2” 7 1/4” ± 1/4” 19” ± 1 1/8” 12 1/2” 9 3/4” 5” 475
1 Design factor is 5 to 1
2 Weights vary slightly with style of shackle pin used.
246
INDUSTRIAL
PRODUCTS Long Reach Shackle
A Division of Columbus McKinnon Corporation
Columbus McKinnon’s new Load Rated Long Reach Alloy Steel Shackles were developed
for those special situations when a standard shackle needs that little extra reach to get the
job done right.
Born out of customer demand, these highly versatile shackles will prove to be an indispen-
sable addition to the rigger’s toolbox. The open design, extra long reach and generous load
bearing surfaces will accommodate many rigging hookups that a standard shackle cannot
reach.
As with all rigging gear, extreme care should be taken to center loads and observe the
working load limit of each component of your hookup.
Size Working
Product diameter load limit Wgt
Type code (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.) P L W
M7152 3/4 10,000 2.8 .88 4.56 2.75
LONG REACH M7152P 3/4 10,000 2.8 .88 4.56 2.75
SHACKLES M7154 1 19,000 6.4 1.00 5.50 3.25
SELF COLORED OR M7154P 1 19,000 6.4 1.00 5.50 3.25
P=PAINTED ORANGE M7157 1 1/2 34,000 19.6 1.63 7.00 4.50
M7157P 1 1/2 34,000 19.6 1.63 7.00 4.50
SKOOKUM®
All Alloy No. 59A
Sheet Pile Shackles
The No. 59A shackles were specifically
designed for pulling sheet piling. They are
equipped with an easy opening pin which will
not detach and become lost. No tools are
required.
WLL1
Size Opening2 A B C D E F G H Weight (Tons)
1” 1 3/4” 4 1/4” 2 1/4” 1” 1 1/8” 7” ± 1/4” 5/8” 2 3/8” 5” 8 lbs. 8
1 1/8” 1 7/8” 4 1/2” 2 1/2” 1” 1 1/4” 8” ± 1/2” 3/4” 3” 5” 13 lbs. 10
1 1/4” 2” 5 1/4” 2 3/4” 1 1/4” 1 3/8” 9” ± 1/2” 7/8” 3” 5” 18 lbs. 12
1 1/2” 2 1/8” 6 1/4” 3” 1 1/2” 1 5/8” 10” ± 1/2” 1 1/8” 3 1/2” 6” 28 lbs. 17
1 3/4” 2 1/2” 7” 3 1/2” 1 3/4” 2” 11” ± 1/2” 1 1/4” 4” 7” 47 lbs. 24
2” 3” 8” 4” 2” 2 1/4” 12” ± 3/4” 1 3/8” 4 1/2” 8” 63 lbs. 30
1 Design factor is 5 to 1
2 Max opening with pin in open (unlocked) position
247
DEFINITIONS - FOR RENFROE CLAMPS
VERTICAL LIFT: The lifting of a single plate or member HORIZONTAL LIFT: Clamps (used in pairs or multiples)
in which the lifting force exerted by the rigging is directly are attached to the side edges of a plate or bundle of plates
above and in line with the lifting shackle as shown in the positioned horizontally to the floor level. The rigging
illustration below. attached to clamps is generally multi-legged slings with the
connecting point of the slings being approximately centered
LIFTING FORCE between the distance separating the clamps. Refer to illus-
LIFTING SHACKLE trations shown below.
CLAMP
WARNING: The capacity of all horizontal clamps is
based on a sling angle of sixty degrees (60°). See illus-
PLATE OR tration below. Sling angles less than sixty degrees (60°)
MEMBER increase the load exerted on the clamps. Sling angles
VERTICAL TURN/LIFT: A vertical turn/lift clamp is a ver- greater than 60° reduce gripping force, Do not exceed
tical lifting clamp specifically intended to turn a single plate 60°.
or member thru a ninety degree (90°) arc and back to ver-
tical thru the same ninety degree (90°) arc or from horizon-
tal to vertical to horizontal thru a one hundred and eighty
degree (180°) arc. Refer to Application Section of specif-
ic Turn/Lift clamps for further detail.
During the turning operation the edge of the plate opposite

the edge to which the clamp is attached should always be
in contact with a supporting surface such as a factory floor
and the load on the clamp should not exceed one half
rated capacity of clamp — refer to illustrations shown
below. STEEL PLATES: Unless otherwise specified, lifting clamps
are manufactured to handle hot-rolled steel plates whose
Brinell Hardness does not exceed 300.
WARNING: Do not lift plates with coatings or mill scale

that prevent the gripping surfaces of the clamp from
making positive contact with the base metal.
For applications not covered by the above information,

secure written recommendations from RENFROE.
Rated Plate
Capacity Thickness MAX. MAX. Weight
Model JPA Tons
1/2
A
0- /8 5
B
2 /4
3
C
6 /2
1
D
12
E
2 /8
3
F
5 /8
5
G
3 /4
1
H
2 /41
J
1
/2
(in pounds)
12
/2-1
1
2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 6 3 1/4 2 1/4 1
/2
VERTICAL LIFTING 3
/4-11/4 2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 6 1/4 3 1/4 2 1/4 1
/2
11/4-13/4 2 3/4 61/2 12 23/8 6 3/4 3 1/4 2 1/4 /2
LOCKING
1
1 0- 3/4 3 3/8 7 3/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 7 3 1/2 2 5/8 5

/8 20
/2-1
1
3 3/8 7 3/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 7 1/4 3 1/2 2 5/8 5
/8
3
/4-11/4 3 3/8 7 3/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 8 3 1/2 2 5/8 5
/8
1-11/2 3 3/8 7 3/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 8 1/4 3 1/2 2 5/8 5
/8
The Model JPA is a vertical 1 /2-2
1
3 3/8 z7 3/4 13 3/4 2 5/8 8 3/4 3 1/2 2 5/8 5
/8
lifting clamp capable of turn- 2 0-1 3 5/8 9 1/2 17 3/8 3 1/2 8 3/4 41/2 3 3
/4 40
3
/4-11/2 3 5/8 9 1/2 17 3/8 3 1/2 9 1/4 41/2 3 3
/4
ing a single plate or member 11/4-2 3 5/8 9 1/2 17 3/8 3 1/2 9 3/4 41/2 3 3
/4
2-23/4 3 5/8 9 1/2 17 3/8 3 1/2 101/2 41/2 3 3
/4
from horizontal to verti- 4 3
/16-11/4 4 3/8 11 1/2 20 1/8 3 1/2 9 1/4 41/2 3 1/4 11/2 50
cal to horizontal through 1-2 4 3/8 11 1/2 20 1/8 3 1/2 10 41/2 3 1/4 11/2
2-3 4 3/8 11 1/2 20 1/8 3 1/2 11 41/2 3 1/4 11/2
a 180 degree arc. 3-4 4 3/8 11 1/2 20 1/8 3 1/2 12 41/2 3 1/4 11/2
6 /4-13/8
1
4 7/8 12 3/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 10 3/4 43/4 3 3/4 11/2 72
Incorporates a push 1-21/8 4 7/8 12 3/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 111/2 43/4 3 3/4 11/2
2-31/8 4 7/8 12 3/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 12 1/2 43/4 3 3/4 11/2
button auxiliary lock. 3-41/8 4 7/8 12 3/8 20 7/8 3 1/2 13 1/2 43/4 3 3/4 11/2
Permits side loading of 8 /8-11/2
3
1-21/8
5 3/8
5 3/8
12 3/4
12 3/4
22 5/8
22 5/8
3 3/4
3 3/4
12 3/8
13
51/4
51/4
4 1/4
4 1/4
2
2
93
lifting shackle to 90 2-31/8 5 3/8 12 3/4 22 5/8 3 3/4 14 5/8 51/4 4 1/4 2
3-41/8 5 3/8 12 3/4 22 5/8 3 3/4 15 5/8 51/4 4 1/4 2
degrees by derating of Additional capacities available. Contact LAMCO.
clamp’s rated capacity. SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
Refer to Figure 1 for Figure 1

derated capacities.
Model JPA incorporates a pivoting shackle that
permits side loading of the lifting shackle at 100
percent of rated capacity from vertical to 30
degrees, 75 percent of rated capacity between
30 and 45 degrees and 50 percent of rated
capacity between 45 and 90 degrees.
249
Model HR & HDR
HORIZONTAL LIFTING
NON-LOCKING Model HR
The Model HR is a horizontal lifting
clamp intended to be used in pairs,
Rated Jaw
sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrange- Capacity Opening Weight
Tons A B C D E F G H J K (in pounds)
ment for transporting steel plates 1/4 0-1 2 /43 1
/2 + 1 3 /16
9
4 /16
1
3 3
/8 1
/2 31/2
horizontal. The Model HDR is sim- 1/2 0-2 41/4 1
/2 + 13/8 55/8 61/8 7 /4
3 1
/2 14
ilar to the Model HR except that it 3/4 0-2 43/8 5
/8 + 13/8 55/8 61/4 7 /4
3
/4
3
19
contains dual cam assemblies 11/2 0-2 43/8 /4

3
+ 13/8 55/8 63/8 7 /4
3
/4
3
23
3 0-2 45/8 5
/8 15/8 13/8 55/8 71/4 7 /4
3
/4
3
24
which provide two gripping sur- 4 0-3 55/8 /4
3
21/8 13/8 71/2 95/8 7 11/8 1 44
faces. SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. + No backpad on 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 or 11/2 ton models.
Equipped with serrated gripping

cams as standard equipment, both
models are available with smooth,
bronze or stainless steel gripping
cams to prevent marring when han-
dling polished metals such as stain-
less steel, copper, aluminum, etc.
Model HDR
Rated Jaw
Capacity Opening Weight
Tons A B C D E F G H J K L (in pounds)
1 /2
1
0-2 4 /8
3
/8
5
+ 3 /4
1
5 /8
5
6 /41
12 15
/16 3
/4 5 44
3 0-2 43/8 /4
3
+ 31/4 55/8 63/8 12 15
/16 3
/4 5 48
6 0-2 45/8 /8
5
15/8 31/4 55/8 71/4 12 15
/16 15/8 5 53
8 0-3 55/8 /4
3
21/8 31/4 71/2 95/8 121/4 15
/16 15/8 51/4 84
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. + No backpad on 11/2, or 3 ton models.
Model SCP & SCPA

LOCKING, SCREW TYPE
The Model SCP and SCPA clamps

are capable of handling steel plate Model SCP Model SCPA
from the horizontal through a 180
degree arc and may be used for
handling plate at rolling and form-
ing machines. These clamps fea-
ture a spring loaded pivoting cam
jaw that "cams in" when a load is
applied to the lifting shackle.
Clamp is capable of handling plate
Rated Plate
horizontally when used in pairs or Capacity Thickness
Tons A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R
sets of pairs, or in a tripod 1/2 0- 3/4 2 3/8 41/2 9 2 3/8 6 5/8 2 3/8 1 7/8 1
/2 11/2 — 1 3/4 13/4 9
/16 12 3/16
arrangement. 11/2 0-11/4 2 7/8 5 1/2 10 9/16 2 5/8 8 7/16 3 3/8 2 3/8 5
/8 13/4 81/4 2 2 11
/16 14 3/16
3 0-2 3 1/8 5 3/4 12 2 3/8 1013/16 4 1/16 2 13/16 3
/4 2 8 5/8 3 6 3
/4 21 3/8
6 0-2 1/2 4 5/16 7 9/16 14 3/8 3 14 3/8 5 3/8 3 7/16 1 215/16 — 3 1/2 7 1 27 3/4
10 0-3 51/2 9 3/4 19 1/4 3 1/4 16 3/8 6 3/4 4 3/8 1 31/8 — 3 1/2 7 1 29 7/16
15 0-4 71/4 12 1/8 22 7/8 3 3/4 211/2 81/4 5 9/16 11/4 4 — 3 7/8 8 11/4 36 1/2
20, 30, 50, 100 and 150 Ton capacities available upon request.
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
250
251
252
253
Locking Clamp
Horizontal to Vertical - 180°
Models AVL and VL 1/2 through 12 Ton Rated Lift Capacities
Features:
* Universal Shackle
- Allows for side loading of lifting shackle up to 90°.
- The rated lift capacity is lowered as the
angle of the pull increases (see figure 1).
* Horizontal to Vertical Lift
- Capable of turning a single steel plate
from horizontal to vertical to horizontal
through a 180° arc.
* Lock Open and Close * Rated for 420 Brinell Surface Hardness
- Lock open to facilitate loading and unloading - Grippers are rated to lift material with a surface
clamp. hardness up to 420 Brinell.
- Lock close onto material for a more secure lift. - 2 through 12 ton lift capacities have dual gripping
* Remote Release Locking Mechanism cams and a self-aligning gripping pad.
- Enables user to open the clamp from a distance - Also available with stainless grippers.
when the load is at rest and secured. * Working Parts Enclosed
- Also available: Remote Locking Mechanism - Protects parts for longer use.
that also allows the user to lock the clamp * Also Available with an Auxiliary Lock and/or
closed onto the material. Stainless Grippers
Larger sizes up
to 12 ton are
available on
request
Figure 1
The Universal Shackle permits side loading of
the lifting shackle at 100 percent of rated
capacity from vertical to 30 degrees, 75 percent
of rated capacity between 30 and 45 degrees,
and 50 percent of rated capacity between 45
and 90 degrees.
254
Campbell®
Duplex Hand Grip
• Designed to carry or pull any object that will fit into its jaws
• Grips and releases automatically
Dimensions
Working
Merrill Load Limit Handle Grip Range C J O Weight
Part UPC No. Length
No. Cat. No. 020418 lb kg in. in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lb kg
3 6421801 096693 500 227 2 0-5/16 0-8 6 152 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 2 1
3 6421802 096709 500 227 Eye nut 0-5/16 0-8 8 203 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 2 1
3 6421803 096716 500 227 6 0-5/16 0-8 12 305 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 3 1
3 6421805 096723 500 227 10 0-5/16 0-8 16 406 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 3 1
3 6421806 096730 500 227 18 0-5/16 0-8 23 584 1 7/8 48 3 3/4 95 4 2
Replacement Parts for Duplex Hand Grip
255
Permanently Fixed Adjustable Girder Clamps
• Designed for light industrial applications • Positive Grip on flange
• Lightweight one piece adjustable design • For use at 0° from vertical
• Ideal for permanent overhead anchor point above machinery or equipment
Universal SUPERCLAMP
• Can be fully loaded at any angle, i.e. 90° in 360° rotation
• Designed for side load applied at full rated capacity
• Low headroom anchor point
• Single or twin lifting point
• Light weight one piece adjustable design
• Positive Grip on beam flange and web
• Used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point
• Approved for Personnel tie-off use
A B C D E
Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps

• One piece adjustable design • Used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point
• No tools required for mounting/removal • Integrated lifting shackle
• Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar • Designed with maximum safe jaw grip adjustment
• For use at up to 15° from vertical • Approved for Personnel tie-off use
256
Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Dog
• One piece adjustable design • Used for lifting, pulling as an anchor point
• Enhanced by balanced distribution of side plates • Maximum grip & hold and safety
• Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar • No tools required
Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps

• One piece adjustable design • Used for lifting, pulling as an anchor point
• Added benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment • Integrated lifting shackle
• Full length/width of swivel jaw anchors on flange • Positive Grip left/right threaded adjusting bar
Geared Runway Beam Trolleys with Anti-Drop Plates

• One piece adjustable design • Hand geared for easy movement of heavy loads
• Ball bearing wheel movement • Integrated lifting shackle
• Adapts to beam width by turning left/right • Includes locking collar and wheel guard anti-drop
hand threaded adjusting screw plates for maximum safety
• Ideal for temporary and permanent installations • Approval for personnel tie-off use
requiring speedy installation and use
Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys with Anti-Drop Plates

• Lightweight hand push, easy to use ball bearing wheels • Developed for lighter industrial applications
• Adapts to beam width by turning left and right hand adjusting bar • Fitted with width adjustment locking mechanism
• Wheel guarding anti-drop plates • No additional width adjusting tools required
• Positive Grip Clamps • Approval for personnel tie-off use
257
VESTIL MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
Magnetic Lifters
Pick up sheets of material by use of overhead crane or chain with the
permanent Magnetic Lifer. Magnet is activated or deactivated by simple
rotating the lever. Units are lightweight, so transporting from work area to
work area is convenient.
MODEL OVERALL DIMENSIONS BASE PLATE CAPACITY NET WT.

NUMBER (W x D x H) (W x L) (POUNDS) (LBS.)
ML-2 21/2” x 5” x61/2” 21/2” x 33/4” 200 6
ML-6 31/2” x 8” x 7” 31/2” x 61/2” 600 22
ML-12 43/4” x 11” x 103/4” 43/4” x 83/4” 1200 53
Magnetic Trigger Lift Power Grip

Hand held lift grips parts with • Effective holding against shear force
an easy to use trigger release. • Securely grips heavy parts
• Aluminum housing • High heat epoxy encapsulated
• One handed operation • Aluminum insulator
• Permanent magnet
• Move parts faster & easier
• Retrieve hot parts from
Burn Tables
• 300°F (148°C)
Holding No. of
Holding Part Value Part Number Width Length Height Poles
Value Number Length Width Height Weight 22.5 Lbs. AC2100WLH 1 4-1/2 2-7/8 2
45.0 Lbs. AC2200WLH 1 4-1/2 2-7/8 3
50 LBS. B090 3-3/8 2-3/8 4-13/16 1.5 Lbs
55.0 Lbs. AC2201WLH 1-1/4 4-1/2 2-7/8 3
Rapid Fire Retriever
• Retrieve hot parts off burn tables with speed & precision!
• Increases production while reducing the potential for injury
• Powerful Rare Earth magnet hold parts securely
• “On-Command” release with just a quick blast of shop air
• Actuate release with just one finger, it’s as simple as the pull of a
trigger
Versatile, swivel-head design allows various pickup positions on the part,

and the long handle enables the operator to safely grab pieces that
would normally be out of arms reach. While lift capacity will vary Holding
depending on the size and thickness of parts, the magnetic Rapid-Fire Value Part Number Length Width
retriever is capable of handling up to 35 Lbs. and exceeds the lift capac- 35 RFR2400 24 3
35 RFR3600 36 12
ity of most suction cups. 35 RFR4800 48 16
Air Connection: 3/8” NPT Universal male quick coupler Note: Customer supplied air hose and proper
Air requirements: 25 psi min. to 60 psi max. line pressure are required for correct operation
259
The most practical, safe and
economical way to lift ferrous loads
MaxX lifters are a real revolution in magnetic handling of ferrous loads.
Absolute compact dimensions and low weight, great power and

total work safety are the quali-
ties which make MaxX the ideal
solution for small and large factories in the industry, with near zero operat-
ing costs and quick return on investment.
A range of 5 models is available with lifting capacity from 250 kg (550 Ibs)
to 2000 kg (4450 Ibs). Easy to use and manage, they give huge advantages
through increased efficiency and productivity in a great number of applica-
tions even with limited handling space and short range hoisting or lifting
equipment.
Ideal for handling workpieces in machine tools and oxygen cutting

operation, for plates, sheet and iron blocks in steel structural works
and shipyards building, in
steel industries and distri-
bution centers, for changing
tooling in production and in
general for all the require-
ments of the modern mechanical workshops.
Load Characteristics
Load max Thickness Length Diameter
Type of load Model lbs min. In max In max In
MaxX 250 550 0.79 59 -
S
MaxX/V MaxX 500 1100 0.98 79 -
S stem
y
Vertical MaxX 1000 2200 1.57 118 -
MaxX 1500 3300 1.77 118 -
The MaxX are MaxX 2000 4400 2.17 118 -
Plate
also available in the VS
Version, that is MaxX 250 220 0.39 59 11.9
complete with a vertical MaxX 500 440 0.59 79 15.8
loading device. MaxX 1000 880 0.98 118 17.7
Recommended lifting
capacity reduced by 30% MaxX 1500 1320 1.18 118 19.7
compared to standard Round MaxX 2000 1760 1.38 118 23.6
declared values.
Technical Characteristics
Weight Dimensions In
Model lbs A B C D E F G
MaxX 250 13 7.5 7.3 3.2 3.1 2.5 1.7 1.4
MaxX 500 33 9.8 9.3 4.2 4 3.5 2.4 2
MaxX 1000 75 13.5 12.5 5.3 5.2 3.5 2.4 2
MaxX 1500 145 15.1 18 6.6 6.7 4.8 3.4 2.5
MaxX 2000 176 18 18 6.6 6.7 4.8 3.4 2.5
260
Creative Lift Magnets
For non-flexing steel items!
Permanent lift magnets are ideal for handling steel plates,
die castings, forgings, etc. They eliminate the need for
clamping devices, slings or chains. One person can per-
form operations previously calling for two or more people.
• Non-Marring Roller Cam Release
• Less torque required to release part
• Lift capacity clearly stated on magnet
• No electrical power required for operation
• Durable stainless steel casing
Note: Never stand under load being
Holding Part
lifted. Always use extra caution.
Value Number Name A B C D E F Weight
Only use magnetic lifts on material
400 Lbs. 5C1382 Mighty Mite 9-7/8 3-1/2 9-1/4 3-3/16 6 2-1/4 12 Lbs. that does not flex or bend. The sur-
1000 Lbs. 5C1383 Junior 12-5/8 5 9-1/4 3-3/16 8-11/16 2-1/4 28 Lbs. face of the lift and the load need to
1500 Lbs. 5C1384 Tuffy 14-7/16 7 20 3-3/16 10-1/2 2-1/4 42 Lbs. be clean & free of chips, oil, slag,
1250 Lbs. 5C1385 Long John 19-5/8 3-1/2 20 3-3/16 15-3/4 2-1/4 49 Lbs. dirt, etc. Lifts must be centered on
3000 Lbs. 5C1386 Big Daddy 19-5/8 10 20 3-3/16 15-3/4 2-3/4 105 Lbs. the load. Not recommended for
painted or finish coated surfaces
Patented Release
U.S. Patent 6,471,273 B1
The non-marring 1-5/16
roller cam will easily C I.D.
release parts. This
ensures that your
valuable materials F
will be scrape and
drag free.
D
E
A B
Holding Value & Max. Sheet Size for Specified Material Thickness
Stated Part
Value Number 3/16” 1/4” 3/8” 1/2” 3/4” 1”
400 Lbs. 5C1382 400 Lbs. [4’x6’] 400 Lbs. [4’x8’] 400 Lbs. *[4’x6’] 400 Lbs. *[4’x4’] 400 Lbs. *[4’x3’] 400 Lbs. *[3’x3’]
1000 Lbs. 5C1383 600 Lbs. [4’x6’] 900 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1000 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1000 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1000 Lbs. *[4’x8’] 1000 Lbs. *[4’x6’]
1500 Lbs. 5C1384 800 Lbs. [4’x6’] 1000 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1500 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1500 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1500 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1500 Lbs. *[4’x6’]
1250 Lbs. 5C1385 650 Lbs. [4’x6’] 1000 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1250 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1250 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1250 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1250 Lbs. *[4’x8’]
3000 Lbs. 5C1386 800 Lbs. [4’x6’] 1100 Lbs. [4’x8’] 1800 Lbs. [4’x8’] 2700 Lbs. [4’x8’] 3000 Lbs. [4’x8’] 3000 Lbs. [5’x10’]
* These maximum sheet sizes are recommended due to the weight of the specified sheet. All other maximum sheet sizes are selected due to
the sag characteristics of the specified sheet. NOTE: When lifting sheets over 4’ x 8’, use two or more lifts on a spreader bar to prevent sheet
flexing, sagging or peel-off. Material less than 3/8” thick is susceptible to magnetic bleed through, resulting in two sheets being lifted at once.
Sheet Handlers Lift by hand
• Available in magnetic and vacuum models for all of your sheet

metal handling applications
• Lift or move sheets, plates, hot or oily parts
• Handle sheets stacked horizontally or vertically
• Protect workers from cuts, slivers, nicks & burns
• Increase production time
• No electricity required
Magnetic Sheet Handler Operation

Lift Release Part
Lift with hook Vacuum Style Pull Part Part
Holding Part
Value Number Style Width Length/Dia. Height Weight
125 Lbs. B250 Magnetic 5-1/4 6 1-1/8 6.75 Lbs.
200 Lbs. B400 Magnetic 5-1/2 6 1-7/16 6.75 Lbs.
330 Lbs. BV330 Vacuum NA 8 1-3/4 8.00 Lbs.
261
CM Toter
Magnets
Permanent Lift Magnets for Flat Material
Handling
The TOTER is a compact, self-contained, lifting magnet which uses

permanent magnets that maintain holding power indefinitely. Within
the steel housing are powerful ceramic magnets whose field is con-
trolled by the "on-off" position of the handle. Because no electric
power is required, TOTERS can operate completely free of the
restriction of power cords, and can be used where electric power is
not readily available.
Standard Features
• High strength steel bail
• Operating mechanism moves on bearings for ease of
operation
• Specially shaped pole shoes ensure the full magnetic
field is directed into work piece
• Operating handle plunger must be fully depressed to
prevent accidental operation
• Handle locks in "On or Off" positions to prevent uninten-
tional operation
• Meets all the requirements of ANSI/ASME B30.20
(safety standard)
• Supplied with manual, pull test certificate, video, and
safety poster.
Recommended Applications
Permanent lifting magnets require good surface conditions to achieve maximum lifting. The TOTER is ideally suit-
ed for in-plant handling, loading, and unloading machine tools, and is commonly found in industrial plants, machine
shops and warehouses. When greater holding capacity is required, refer to our battery magnets or our circular
electric magnets.
262
WBM Magnet
Local & Cordless Remote Controlled Battery
Powered Lift Magnets for Flat Material Handling
These Walker Lift Magnets are compact, mobile, self-contained battery

powered units. Operating on their own power sources, they are free of
restricting cords and wires and have the further advantage of being usable
in areas where electric power is not available. The WBM-13 is a new,
compact model for general utility lifting. The WBM-36 has a special shoe
design for plate lifting, but it has almost universal capability. WBM-13,
WBM-25 and WBM-36 are all single units. The WBM-50 is two magnets
on an adjustable spreader beam operated from a single battery pack.
Standard Features
• Pocket for IR Remote Transmitter*
• Removable cover allows inspection of battery.
• Temperature compensated: built-in automatic cut-off charg-
WBM-13
er prevents over-charging of battery.
Rated Lift Capacity
• For safety, magnet can not be turned "ON" if battery charge
0-3,000 lbs.
is too low.
• Interlock prevents magnet de-energization when suspended
in air.
• Audible Warning Alarm and flashing light indicate low battery
• Lighted display indicates battery charge level.
• 110V AC cord and plug for built-in battery charger
• Uses "Deep Discharge" type low maintenance Gel Cell
Battery.
• Meets all the requirements of ANSI/ASME B30.20 (safety
standard).
• Supplied with manual, pull test certificate, video, and safety
poster.
*One IR Remote Transmitter Supplied with each WBM - WBP Magnet.
WBM-25
Rated Lift Capacity
0-5,500 lbs.
263
THE BROAD RANGE OF TECNO-LIFT PERMANENT-ELECTRO MAGNETIC SYSTEMS
ALLOWS HANDLING ANY TYPE OF FERROUS LOAD
CV BR
Modules for handling Modules for handling
cold-rolled coils, slabs, even on harbor
vertical eye. cranes.
CO TU
open coils, vertical layers of seamless
eye. pipe.
CH RO
cold-rolled coils, layers of rails.
horizontal eye.
RD BL
rounds. layers of billets up to
450° C.
EM Bat Grip
Electromagnetic Bat Grip Permanent
modules for handling electric battery lifters for
bundles. loads up to 3000 kg.
Contact LAMCO for ordering details

309-764-7400
800-447-1885
264
SINGLE MODULES
SML
For handling single plates or semifinished
blocks.
SML permanent electro-magnetic modules
are the ideal answer for handling where oper-
ational air gaps are small.
SMH
For handling single thick slabs and forged
blocks.
SMH permanent electro-magnetic modules
are designed for hoisting loads with big
operational air gaps.
BEAM AND SECTION UNITS
TP
For handling merchant beams and
sections.
Their specially shaped profile allows
overturning of beams on the ground.
TILTING BEAMS
TB
For handling single plates up to 12 meters long.
Fixed beams with tilting modules provide vertical plate handling.
This joins the intrinsic safety of permanent electromagnet sys-
tems to compactness and great warehouse space saving.
FIX BEAMS FOR CUTTING SYSTEMS
TT
For handling single plates and skeleton cutting.
They allow easy and fast loading & unloading operations on any type of cut-
ting machines.
265
Mechanical & Powered
Vacuum Lifters
Self-Powered Mechanical Vacuum

Suction Hand Cup with
Lifter with Four Adjustable In-Line
Plastic Body Eight Pad Self-Powered
Vacuum Pads
Mechanical Vacuum Lifter
Six Pad Self-Powered

Mechanical Vacuum Lifter
Vacuum Lifters for Coil

Handling and Roll Vacuum Lifters for Coil
Handling Handling and Roll
Vacuum Tube Lifting System with Handling
Two Pad Box Lifting Attachment
Contact LAMCO for a quote on an Anver

Vacuum tube system vacuum system to fit your
for roll handling specific needs.
309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885
266
Mechanical & Powered
Vacuum Lifters
Vacuum Lifters for Vacuum Lifters for

Air & Electric Powered Bag Lifting Bag and Roll Lifting
Multiple Pad Vacuum Lifters
Four Pad Electric Powered

Vacuum Lifter with Powered Tilt Two Pad Air Powered Air Standard Heavy-Duty
Balancer Vacuum Lifter with Powered Vacuum Lifters
Powered Tilter
Eight Pad Electric Powered

Two Pad Compressed Air
Vacuum Lifter with Powered Tilt
Powered Vacuum Lifter and
Tilter with ANVER AL1001 Mini
Vacuum Station
Four Pad Air Powered
Vertical Lifter
Contact LAMCO for a quote on an Anver

vacuum system to fit your specific needs.
309-764-7400 or 800-447-1885
267
VacuumSystemComponents
For All Applications and Industries
ANVER offers
you a full range of
vacuum compo-
nents, from
miniature vacuum
suction cups, air
and electric pow-
ered vacuum
pumps and vacu-
um generators, to
complete vacuum
stations and sys-
tems.
Since our
establish-
268
DBI/SALA & Protecta is the world's leading manufacturer
solely dedicated to providing innovative solutions in fall protection and
industrial rescue systems. We offer two brands delivering these
solutions:
• DBI/SALA: Ultimate in fall protection for any work environment

• PROTECTA: Fundamental fall protection at exceptional value
These two product lines offer:

• Anchorage Connectors • Confined Space Equipment • Full Body Harness • Horizontal Systems
• Positioning Devices • Rescue and Descent Systems • Rope Grabs & Lifelines • Self-Retracting Lifelines
• Shock Absorbing Lanyards • Vertical Systems
In addition, DBI/SALA offers:

• Compliance in a can • Compliance in a Can Light • Equipment Bags • Skyseat Working Chair
Protecta also offers:

• Body Belts • Load Arrestors
Standard Vest Style Harness Standard Vest Style Harness

1102000 1103321
• Delta No-Tangle™ design for • Delta No-Tangle™ design for
added comfort and easy donning added comfort and easy donning
• Back D-ring • Back D-ring
• Adjustable non-slip chest strap • Adjustable non-slip chest strap
with easy to use pass-thru buckle with easy to use pass-thru buckle
• Parachute buckles on lower • Parachute buckles on lower
shoulder straps for quick and shoulder straps for quick and
easy adjustment easy adjustment
• Tongue buckle leg straps for fast • Pass-thru buckle leg straps for
& easy donning fast & easy donning
• Polyester webbing construction • Polyester webbing construction
for added durability for added durability
• Coated hardware for corrosion • Coated hardware for corrosion
resistance resistance
• Universal sized • Universal sized
ShockWave2™ Shock Absorbing Lanyard ShockWave2™ Shock Absorbing Lanyard

1224406 1224306
• Expands to 6 ft. and contracts to • Expands to 6 ft. and contracts
4-1/2 ft. in reaction to your to 4-1/2 ft. in reaction to your
movements movements
• Reduces trip fall hazards, drag- • Reduces trip fall hazards, drag-
ging and snagging for complete ging and snagging for complete
freedom of movement freedom of movement
• Twin-leg 100% tie-off style helps • Easy to use self locking snap
you remain connected at all hooks at both ends
times • Abrasion resistant tubular web-
• Easy to use self locking snap bing for durability and longevity
hooks at center and at the leg ends • Impact indicator allows user to
• Abrasion resistant tubular webbing for durability visually inspect unit for a fall
and longevity • 6 ft. in length
• Impact indicator allows user to visually inspect unit • Limits arresting forces to 900 lbs. or less
for a fall
• 6 ft. in length
• Limits arresting forces to 900 lbs. or less
All above items meet or exceed all applicable industry standards

including OSHA, ANSI and the stringent ANSI Z359
270
Ultra-Lok® Self Retracting Lifeline
3504430
• Stainless steel working components
for corrosion resistance
• 30 ft. 3/16" galvanized steel wire rope
Fixed Beam Anchor for durability
2108406 • Reserve lifeline retention system for
• Anchor is easily added safety
installed by sliding • Self-locking swivel snap hook with
the adjustable impact indicator
hook-end sown to • Swiveling anchorage loop to prevent
the flange and twisting of lifeline
securing a pin
• Easily adjust to exactly where you want it in any ori-
entation or direction
• Fits 1-1/2" thick flange, 2-1/2" to 12" wide
• 5,000 lbs. minimum strength in any direction
Ultra-Lok® Self Retracting Lifeline - 20
ft. web
3103208
Tie-Off Adaptor • Stainless steel working components
1003000 for corrosion resistance
• Pass-through design makes • 20 ft. one-inch nylon web lifeline for
attaching to anchorage quick and reduced weight
easy • Reserve lifeline retention system for
• 1-3/4" polyester strength member added safety
(5,000 lb. Min. tensile strength) • Self-locking swivel snap hook with
• 3" wide polyester wear pad for impact indicator
added abrasion resistance and • Swiveling anchorage loop to prevent
product longevity twisting of lifeline
• 3 ft. in length, other lengths avail-
able
• Coated steel hardware for corrosion resistance
and strength
AD111A Rebel®
AD111A
Sayfline Horizontal Lifeline • The industry’s lightest and
System most compact 11 foot SRL
7600502 • Lightweight and compact
• Sayfline™ system is a aluminum housing construc-
complete kit coming in its tion weighing only 2.8 lbs.
own carrying bag that is • Best lifeline length-to-weight
easily installed with no ratio in the industry
special tools or equipment • Unique super strength thin
• System is lightweight (12 webbing for total security
lbs.) and extremely and added length in a com-
portable allowing you to pact SRL
move it and reuse it over • Unique speed sensing
and over again brake reduces clearance
• Complete with kernmantle rope lifeline assembly requirements and limits fall arrest forces to 900
with a tensioning device for ease-of-use lbs. or less
• Two tie-off adaptors are included to anchor the • Designed for smooth consistent operation
system to a structure • AJ565A snap hook on lifeline, AJ514A carabiner
• System length = 20 ft. (30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 on housing
and 100 ft. systems are also available) • Two year warranty, no recertification necessary
All above items meet or exceed all applicable industry standards

including OSHA, ANSI and the stringent ANSI Z359
271
MANBASKETS
Wire Rope With

Protective Cover
Master Link
Data Plate
42” High Guardrail
Inner Grab Rail
Steel Pipe
Construction Cable Run Pipe
Mid-Rail
Toeboard Perforated Steel Enclosure
Patented Detachable Test

Weight with Pins
(US Patent No. 4,884,454)
Dimensions Max. Rated

RECTANGULAR Test Weight Basket Weight
Load Capacity
MODELS W L H lbs. lbs.
lbs.
BM1-300 28” 38” 42” 300 375 385
BM2-600 36” 60” 42” 600 750 560
BM3-900 36” 84” 42” 900 1125 690
BM4-1200 36” 108” 42” 1200 1500 860
Dimensions Max. Rated
Test Weight Basket Weight
SQUARE MODELS Load Capacity
W L H lbs. lbs.
lbs.
SM1-300 28” 28” 42” 300 375 315
SM2-600 38” 38” 42” 600 750 440
SM3-900 48” 48” 42” 900 1125 560
SM4-1200 58” 58” 42” 1200 1500 675
Max. Rated
Dimensions Test Weight Basket Weight
ROUND MODELS Load Capacity
Diameter lbs. lbs.
lbs.
RM1-300A 19”, 21”, 26”, 32” 300 375 355
RM2-600 38” 600 750 395
RM3-900 48” 900 1125 510
RM4-1200 60” 1200 1500 600
All dimensions are outside dimensions.
Rated load capacity of all models may be increased.
Access gates are available on most models.Overhead protection is available on all models.
LTI welcomes inquiries for custom-designed platforms of almost any size or shape.
272
FORKLIFT WORK PLATFORMS
IN G T H E
F E AT U R
LAW
®
QUICK C
M
F E T Y S Y S T E 5,433,493
SA .S. PATEN
U
T NO .
QUICK CLAW SAFETY SYSTEM

All LTI platforms feature our unique patented Quick Claw safety
system which automatically attaches itself securely to the forks of
the truck when lifted, then releases itself when returned to the
floor -- all without driver dismount. This system eliminates haz-
ardous slippage, saves time, and complies with OSHA Proposed
Rule 29 CFR Part 1910.31, Subpart D.
STRONG AND LONG-LASTING

Our 5x design factor ensures that every LTI platform will support its own
weight plus five times its maximum load. Standard Model platforms are
built of .125” wall, 1.500” square tubular steel, plus perforated steel mast-
guard and enclosures, to enable them to hold up under many years of
industrial maintenance punishment. A 4-mil thick electrostatic powder coat
finish adds long-life durability.
FULL OSHA COMPLIANCE

LTI platforms meet or exceed all OSHA rules for mastguard protection,
guardrail, inner grab rail, personal fall arrest system anchorage, and enclo-
sures.
Platform Recommended
Dimensions Load Capacity Platform Weight
STANDARD MODEL NO. Minimum Truck
lbs. lbs.
W L H OH Capacity lbs.
FL1-400G 40” 36” 42” 72” 400 560 2000
FL2-700G 60” 36” 42” 72” 700 625 3000
FL2-800G 48” 48” 42” 72” 800 655 4000
FL3-1200G 84” 36” 42” 72” 1200 700 5000
FL4-1600G 108” 48” 42” 72” 1600 1045 6000
“G” denotes access gate option
FOLD DOWN WORK PLATFORM • Model WP-3737-FD

The Fold Down Work Platform, model WP-3737-FD, folds easily out of the way
by one person for storage when not in use. Unit stores conveniently in the 4”
deep bottom base.
• Platform Size: 37”W x 37”D
• Folded Height: 11-9/16”
• Capacity: 1,000 lbs.
• 36”H Handrail, 22”H Mid-rail and 4”H Kickplate
• 60” High Extended Metal Back
• Fork Pocket: 7-3/4”W x 3-
7/8”H on 26” centers
• Fork Truck Tine Lock
• Tri-Lingual Safety
Instruction Sign
273
Winch Strap & Ratchet Strap Tie Down Assemblies
Winch strap and ratchet strap tie down assemblies are designed to handle most types of flatbed tie down
requirements. Assemblies are available in 1” - 4” webbing widths with breaking strengths ranging from
500 - 15,000 lbs. Working Load Limits range from 165 - 5,000 lbs.
All standard 2” x 27’ assemblies have an 18” fixed end and are equipped with flat hooks on each end.
Standard lengths are 27’ and 30’ but straps can be made to any length required. Special end fittings are
available as well to fit almost every need.
Repairs
Tie down hardware, if not damaged, can be used to build a new assembly after the webbing is worn out.
Web Width 2” 2” 3” 3” 4” 4” Working Breaking

Description Load
Length 27’ 30’ Strength
27’ 30’ 27’ 30’ Limit
2” Winch Strap LMX- LMX-

2054 Webbing 3,335 lbs. 10,000 lbs.
10M- 10M-
1015 Flat Hook 1515 kgs. 4540 kgs.
324 360
3” Winch Strap
3000 Webbing
LMX- LMX- 4,300 lbs. 13,000 lbs.
1021 Flat Hook 15M- 15M- 1950 kgs. 5096 kgs.
324 360
4” Winch Strap LMX- LMX-
4000 Webbing 5,400 lbs. 16,200 lbs.
1021 Flat Hook 16M- 16M-
2455 kgs. 7365 kgs.
324 360
2” Ratchet Strap LMX- LMX-

803 Long Wide Handle 3,335 lbs. 10,000 lbs.
2004 Webbing 10MSD- 10SD-
18-324 18-360 1515 kgs. 4540 kgs.
1015 Flat Hook
2” Ratchet Strap LMX- LMX- 3,335 lbs. 10,000 lbs.

804 Wide Handle 10MXD- 10MXD-
2004 Webbing 1515 kgs. 4540 kgs.
3705-2 Chain Anchor
24-324 24-360
The items below and on the following two pages are

available as options on cargo restraint straps:
802 803
2” Standard Handle Code: 29 2” Long Wide Handle Code: 35

Breaking Strength: 11,000 lbs./4990 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,670 lbs./1665 kgs. Breaking Strength: 11,000 lbs./4990 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,670 lbs./1665 kgs.
Weight: 2.34 lbs./1.06 kgs. Weight: 2.44 lbs./1.11 kgs.
274
804 608
2” Wide Handle Code: 30 1” Cam Buckle Code: 26

Breaking Strength: 11,000 lbs./4990 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,670 lbs./1665 kgs. Breaking Strength: 700 lbs./320 kgs. Working Load Limit: 235 lbs./110 kgs.
Weight: 2.41 lbs./1.10 kgs. Weight: 0.13 lbs./0.06 kgs. Webbing: FE129 or 1010
605 910
1” Cam Buckle, One-Piece Frame Code: 21 2” Cam Buckle, One-Piece Frame Code: 81
Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs./545 kgs. Working Load Limit: 400 lbs./185 kgs. Breaking Strength: 2,500 lbs./1135 kgs. Working Load Limit: 835 lbs./380 kgs.
Weight: 0.27 lbs./0.12 kgs. Webbing: 1000 Weight: 0.58 lbs./0.26 kgs. Webbing: 4900
43010 1015
2 ” Cam Buckle Code: 19 2” Flat Hook Code: 20
Breaking Strength: 2,500 lbs./1135 kgs. Working Load Limit: 835 lbs./380 kgs. Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4540 kgs. Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1515 kgs.
Weight: 0.69 lbs./0.31 kgs. Webbing: 4900 Weight: 0.68 lbs./0.31 kgs.
FE7915-1 1021
2” Flat Hook Code: 23 4” Flat Hook with Abrasion Clip Code: 21
FE7900-1 1209
2” Snap Hook Code: 70 2” Snap Hook Code: 63

275
FE8028-1 1212
1” Snap Hook Code: 69 2” Twisted Snap Hook Code: 64

1101 - Vinyl Coated 1003
1” Vinyl Coated S Hook Code: 87 1” Narrow Hook Code: 81

Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs./545 kgs. Working Load Limit: 400 lbs./185 kgs. Breaking Strength: 2,500 lbs./1135 kgs. Working Load Limit: 835 lbs./380 kgs.
1006 3705-2
2” Narrow Hook Code: 84 18“ Chain Anchor Code: 39

Use with 5/16 and 3/8 chain.
1703 1023
1” D-Ring Code: 45 2” Flat Delta Ring Code: 42

Contact LAMCO for all your custom

winch strap & ratchet strap
tie down needs.
Local: 309-764-7400
Toll Free: 800-447-1885
276
CARBON — WELDED CHAIN
CM binder chain assemblies
Used by truckers, contractors, oil field crews, highway crews and farmers.
Eye grab hook

Grade 43 Grade 70
Working Working
Size Product UPC load limit Product UPC load limit
Eye grab (in.) code 43927- (lbs.)* code 43927- (lbs.)*
hook 5/16 x 14 638228** 38228 3,900 638259** 33301 4,700
5/16 x 16 638229** 33855 3,900 638264** 33303 4,700
5/16 x 18 638230** 33856 3,900 — — —
5/16 x 20 638231** 27117 3,900 638224 33300 4,700
5/16 x 25 — — — 638306** 33314 4,700
3/8 x 12 638227 33857 5,400 — — —
3/8 x 14 638239 27448 5,400 — — —
3/8 x 16 638240 27449 5,400 — — —
3/8 x 18 638242 27451 5,400 — — —
3/8 x 20 638241 27450 5,400 — — —
3/8 x 25 638232 33858 5,400 — — —
Sizes not coded can be furnished upon request.
**Standard packaging 1 per bag. Others bulk.
All can be furnished bulk or bagged upon request.
Clevis grab hook

Grade 43 Grade 70
Working Working
Size Product UPC load limit Product UPC load limit
(in.) code 43927- (lbs.)* code 43927- (lbs.)*
5/16 x 14 — — — 638281 33309 4,700
5/16 x 16 — — — 638282 33310 4,700
5/16 x 18 — — — 638283 33311 4,700
5/16 x 20 — — — 638284 33312 4,700
5/16 x 25 — — — 638279 33308 4,700
3/8 x 12 638215 33859 5,400 — — —
3/8 x 14 638216 31888 5,400 638291 33860 6,600
Clevis 3/8 x 16 638217 38217 5,400 638292 33488 6,600
grab hook 3/8 x 18 638218 27442 5,400 638293 33489 6,600
3/8 x 20 638219 27443 5,400 638294 33490 6,600
3/8 x 25 638220 27444 5,400 — — 6,600
1/2 x 18 — — — — — —
1/2 x 20 — — — — — —
Sizes not coded can be furnished upon request.
All can be furnished bulk or bagged upon request.
* WARNING
277
278
SEE APPLICATION AND
WARNING INFORMATION
279
280
281
INDEX
-A-
Clamps:
Air Balancer 120 - 121 Beam/Girder 256 - 257
Aircraft Cable 44 Plate Lifting 249 - 255
Anchor Shackles 241 - 246 Clips, Wire Rope 51 - 52
Articulating Jib Crane 205 Coil Lifters 110 - 112
Assemblies: Coil Upender 114
Chain 74 - 100 Connecting Links 20, 22 - 23, 80 - 81, 95, 97
Nylon 7 - 17 Cordage 280 - 281
Wire Rope 33 - 36, 45 - 46 Core Lifter 118
Coupling Links:
-B- Alloy Chain 20, 80 - 81, 95, 97
Web/Round Sling 20, 22 - 23
Beam Clamps 256 - 257 Cranes:
Binders: Bridge 128 - 136, 176, 197 - 199
Binder Chains 277 Davit 223
Binder Straps 274 - 276 Enclosed Track 128 - 136
Load Binders 279 Floor, Portable 126, 223
Blocks: Gantry 206 - 215
Crane 66 - 68 Jib 126, 200 - 205
Snatch 65 Crane Blocks 66 - 68
Bolt Type Shackles 21 Crane Scale 220 - 222
Braided Wire Rope Slings 35 - 36 Crane Tractor 173
Bridge Cranes 128 - 136, 176, 197 - 199 Cumalongs 143 - 148, 174, 177
Bridge Crane Electrification 216 - 219
-D-
-C-
Davit Cranes 223
Cable Assemblies 33 - 36, 45 - 46 Dynamometer (Crane Scale) 220 - 221
Cable Laid Wire Rope Slings 35
Cable Lubricant 38 -E-
Care, Use & Inspection:
Alloy Chain Slings 72 - 74, 90 - 91, 97 Enclosed Track 128 - 136
Synthetic Web Slings 2-6 End Trucks 176, 199
Wire Rope Slings 29 - 32 Ergonomic Lifting Devices 117 - 136
Wire Rope, Running 37 - 38 Excavator Hooks 234
Cargo Restraint Systems 274 - 279 Eye Bolts 233
Carts 119
Chain: -F-
Alloy:
Grade 63 99 Fall Restraint 270 - 273
Grade 80 74 - 76 Festooning 216
Grade 100 92 - 93 Fist Grip Wire Rope Clips 52
Grade 120 97 Forklift Work Platforms 273
High Test 98
Proof Coil 98 -G-
Transport 98
Stainless Steel 98 Galvanized Air Craft Cable 44
Chain Hoists & Pullers 138 - 185 Gantry Cranes 206 - 215
Chain Lubricant 38 Grab Hooks 82 - 84, 95, 97
Chain Mesh Slings 100
Chain Shackles 241 - 243 -H-
Chain Slings:
Grade 80 Alloy 74 - 76 Hammerlok Coupling Link 80, 95
Grade 100 Alloy 92 - 93 Headache Balls 62
Grade 120 Alloy 97 Hoists & Accessories:
Choker Hooks 20, 57, 60, 81 Air Manipulator 123
282
Balancer, Air 120 - 121 Load Binders 274 - 279
Chain, Air 162 - 167, 175 - 176, Load Positioning/Rotating Beam 125
178 - 181, 185 Lubricant - Wire Rope & Chain 38
Chain, Electric 149 - 161, 174 - 175,
182 - 184 -M-
Chain, Hand 138 - 142, 174
Chain, Lever 143 - 148, 174, 177 Magnets, Lifting:
Dynamometer (Scale) 220 - 221 Permanent 259 - 262
Electrification 216 - 219 Powered 263 - 265
Hooks 187 - 190 Manbaskets 272 - 273
Load Limiter 222 Manila Rope 280 - 281
Load Point Control 123, 182 Manipulator 117 - 118, 122
Remote Controls 216 - 219 Master Links 77 - 79, 94, 97
Trolleys 155, 157, 168 - 172,
174 - 175 -N-
Turnover 124
Wire Rope, Air 185 Nylon Rope 280 - 281
Wire Rope, Electric 149, 176, 186 Nylon Web Slings 7 - 18
Hoist Rings 230 - 232
Hooks: -O-
Barrel 19
Choker 20, 57, 60, 81 Oblong Master Links 77, 79, 94, 97
Coil 110 - 112 Overhaul Balls 62
Grab 82 - 84, 95, 97 Overhead Crane 176, 197 - 199
Excavator, Weld-on 234
Hoist 187 - 190 -P-
Flat 275
Foundry 88 Pac-Flex Alloy Chain Mesh Sling 100
J-Hook 106 Pallet Lifter 113
Latch Kit 87, 96, 192 - 195 Pendant, Hoist 216 - 219
Plate 87, 109 Plate Clamps 249 - 255
S-Hook 107 Plate Hooks 87, 109
Safety 86 Polyester Roundslings 24 - 26
Shank 188 - 190 Polyester Web Slings 7 - 18
Shortening 84 Polypropylene Rope 280 - 281
Sliding Choker: Positioning Equipment 117 - 125
Chain 81 Pullers (Cumalongs) 143 - 148, 174, 177
Synthetic Web 20
Wire Rope 57, 60 -R-
Sling (Slip):
Chain 85 - 86, 96 - 97 Ratchet Lever Hoists 143 - 148, 174, 177
Rigging 58 - 59 Ratchet Tie Downs 274 - 276
Synthetic Web 19 Rope, Manila & Synthetic 280 - 281
Snap 60, 275 - 276 Roundslings:
Sorting 60 Polyester 24 - 26
Stirrup 108 Twinpath 27
Swivel 62 - 64, 187, 190 - 191
-S-
-J-
S-Hooks 107
J-Hooks 106 Scale, Crane 220 - 222
Jib Cranes 126, 200 - 205 Shackles:
Alloy Type 246
-L- Bolt Type 21, 243 - 244, 246
Long Reach 247
Lanyards 270 - 271 Round Pin 23, 241, 244
Latch Kits 87, 96, 192 - 195 Screw Pin 21 - 22, 242, 244, 246 - 247
Lift Beam 105 Web Sling 21 - 23
Lift Table 119 Wide Body 245
Load Arrestors 122
283
Shank Hooks 188 - 190
Sheaves 66, 69 - 70 Wire Rope:
Sheet Lifter 115 Standard 39 - 41
Shortening Hook 84 Rotation Resistant 41 - 42
Sling: Premium Value 41, 43
Chain, Alloy 74 - 76, 92 - 93, 97, 99 Wire Rope Assemblies 33 - 36, 45 - 46
Chain Mesh 100 Wire Rope Clips 51 - 52
Flat Web, Nylon & Polyester 7 - 18 Wire Rope Fittings:
Roundsling 24 - 27 Field Installed 47 - 50
Transformer 280 Swaged 45 - 46
Wire Mesh 101 Wire Rope Lubricant 38
Wire Rope 33 - 36 Wire Rope Sheaves 66, 69 - 70
Snatch Blocks 65 Wire Rope Swivels 63 - 64
Sockets, Wire Rope 45 Wire Rope Slings 33 - 36
Sorting Hooks 60 Wire Rope Thimbles 55 - 57
Spreader Beams 104
Stirrup Hooks 108
Swaged Fittings 45 - 46
Swivel Hoist Rings 230 - 232
Swivel Hooks 62 - 64, 187, 190 - 191
Swivels 63 - 64, 89
Synthetic Rope 280 - 281
Synthetic Web Slings 7 - 18
-T-
Tea Cup Pipe Carrier 61

Thimbles, Wire Rope 55 - 57
Tie Down Straps 274 - 276
Tilt Tables 119
Tool Balancers 122
Tractor, Crane 173
Training III
Trolleys, Hoist 155, 157, 168 - 172, 174 - 175
Turnbuckles 234 - 239
Twin Path Roundslings 27
-U-
Utility Cable 44
-V-
Vacuum Lifters 266 - 268
-W-
Wear Pads 18
Web Sling Hooks 19 - 20
Web Sling Chain Connector 20
Web Sling Connector 20, 22
Web Sling Shackle 21 - 23
Web Sling Sliding Choker Hook 20
Wedge Socket 53 - 54
Winch Lines:
Synthetic Rope 280 - 281
Wire Rope 45 - 46
Winches 223 - 226
Wire Mesh Slings 101
284
LAMCO SUPPLIERS
CARGO RESTRAINTS HOISTS & ACCESSORIES
(Synthetic, Chain) (Air, Electric, Hand, Pullers)
Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM) Cattron, Inc.
Crosby Group (Lebus) Chester Hoists
Kinedyne Coffing Hoists
Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)
CHAIN & FITTINGS Demag
(Alloy, Welded, Misc.) Duct-O-Wire Co.
ACCO Chain Electromotive Systems
Campbell/Cooper Tools Griphoist, Inc.
Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM) Harrington Hoists, Inc.
Crosby Group Insul 8
Gunnebo-Johnson Corp. OZ Lifting Products
Peerless Chain Co. Williams Wireless
Pewag, Inc.
Thiele HOIST RINGS
(Safety Swivel, Forged Bail)
CLAMPS Actek Manufacturing and Engineering, Inc.
(Plate, Beam, Pipe) American Drill Bushing Co.
General Clamp Industries Crosby Group
Crosby IP Jergens, Inc.
JC Renfroe & Sons, Inc.
Merrill LIFTERS
Safety Clamps, Inc. (Coil, Magnet, Vacuum)
Anver Corp.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT Caldwell Group
(Blocks, Sheaves, Swivels) Industrial Magnetics, Inc.
Crosby Group Letellier M.H.E.
General Clamp Industries O.S. Walker Co., Inc.
Gunnebo-Johnson Corp. Tecnomagnete, Inc.
Miller Products, Inc. Vestil Manufacturing Corp.
Skookum/Rope Master
RIGGING & HARDWARE
CRANE SYSTEMS (Hooks, Clips, Eye Bolts, Turnbuckles, Shackles)
(Overhead, Jib, Gantry, Crane Hooks) Campbell/Cooper Tools
Abell-Howe Co. Chicago Hardware & Fixture Co.
Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM) Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)
Crosby Group Crosby Group
Demag Esmet, Inc. (Electroline)
Harrington Hoists, Inc. Newco Mfg. Co., Inc.
Spanco, Inc. Skookum/Rope Master
UESCO
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
ERGONOMIC EQUIPMENT (Belts, Lanyards, Manbaskets)
(Positioners, Lifters, Air Balancers, Lift Tables) DBI/Sala
Caldwell Group Lifting Technologies, Inc.
Columbus McKinnon Corp. (CM)
GCI WINCHES
Posi-Tech (Hand, Electric, Barge)
Vestil Manufacturing Corp. Griphoist, Inc.
Thern, Inc.
W.W. Patterson Co.

Lamco PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lamco PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LAMCO Slings & Rigging, Inc.

4960 41st Street Court, Moline, IL 61265

Visit our website at www.lamcoinc.com

Manufactured by LAMCO - Same Day Emergency Service

Customer Satisfaction Is Our Goal!

VP Marketing & Finance Theodore (Ted) King (ext. 204)

Contact Your Outside Sales Representative for On-Site Help

Your Outside Sales Representative Is:

SYNTHETIC - ALLOY CHAIN - WIRE MESH SLINGS

WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES AND WIRE ROPE SLINGS

OVERHEAD HOISTS AND CRANE SYSTEMS

“FLOOR TO RAFTER” OVERHEAD LIFTING INSPECTIONS

TRAINING AND INFORMATION SERVICES

About the Seminars

Full-day seminars are offered 4 times a year at our Moline loca-

Who should attend?

• ON SITE SLING INSPECTIONS, PERFORMED

Item Number Description Special Remarks

Synthetic Slings & Attachments

Wire Rope Slings / Wire Rope /

Alloy Chain Slings & Attachments

Custom Lifting Devices

Ergonomic / Work Cell Equipment

Hoists & Accessories

Overhead Cranes / Jibs / Winches

Lifting & Beam Clamps

Vacuum & Magnet Lifters

Permanent Lever Actuated Magnets ............................. pg. 259

Fall Restraint / Cargo Restraint / Fiber Rope

Chapter 5.0 Operating Practices for Web Slings

Section 5.2 Mechanical Considerations

Hitch/Vertical Hitch/Choker Hitch/Vertical Basket Hitch/Angled Basket

Sling Rating x Adjustment Factor = Rated Capacity

120 - 180 100%

5.2.11 Do not drop web slings equipped with metal fittings.

5.2.17 Shock loading should be avoided.

5.2.18 Twisting and kinking the legs (branches) shall be avoided.

Section 5.3 Environmental Considerations

CAUTION: Degradation can take place without visible indications.

A. Factors which affect the degree of strength loss are:

C. Some visual indications of sunlight or ultraviolet degradation are:

1. Bleaching out of web sling color

5.4.1 Type of Inspection

C. Periodic Inspection - This inspection shall be conducted by designated personnel.

1. Frequency of web sling use

Section 5.5 Removal from service

A. If sling rated capacity or sling material identification is missing or not readable.

Section 5.6 Inspection records

Section 5.7 Repair of web slings

5.7.5 Temporary repairs of webbing, fittings or stitching shall not be permitted.

CLASS 75 - EYE & EYE SLINGS

LAMCO SLINGS & RIGGING, INC.

TYPE FOUR - HALF TWIST EYE

LAMCO SLINGS & RIGGING, INC.

CLASS 75 - ONE PLY

CLASS 98 - EYE & EYE SLINGS

LAMCO SLINGS & RIGGING, INC.

TYPE FOUR - HALF TWIST EYE

CLASS 98 - ONE PLY

CLASS 75 ENDLESS SLINGS - TYPE FIVE

LAMCO SLINGS & RIGGING, INC.

RATED CAPACITY IN LBS.

CLASS 75 - ONE PLY